Home

MPE720 Version 6 - Support

Contents

1. 3 42 3 5 Debugging Ladder Programs 3 46 3 5 1 Monitoring Ladder Program Execution 3 46 3 5 2 Searching and Replacing 3 47 3 5 3 Searching and Replacing within Projects 3 50 3 5 4 Cross Reference Searching 3 53 3 5 5 Searching for Duplicate Coils 3 54 3 5 6 Forcing Coils ON OFF 3 55 3 5 7 Referencing Called Programs 3 58 3 6 Converting CP Ladder Programs to Ordinary Ladder Programs 3 59 3 6 1 Converting CP Ladder Programs as a Batch 3 59 3 6 2 Converting a Program Individually 3 61 Chapter 4 Motion Programming 4 1 4 1 Overview 4 2 4 1 1 What Is a Motion Program 4 2 4 1 2 Main Programs and Sub Programs 4 2 4 1 3 Group Definitions 4 2 4 2 Creating New Motion Programs 4 3 4 3 Managing Motion Pr
2. 1 45 deleting constant variable groups 5 20 deleting constant variables 5 20 deleting global variables 5 17 deleting internal variables 5 23 deleting ladder programs 3 42 Dialog Box Adjust Scale Offset 7 11 Calculate 7 26 Communications Setting 1 56 1 66 1 71 1 79 Compare Flash to RAM 1 81 Compare Program Compare with Controller 1 79 Compare Program Compare with Project File 1 82 Compile Option 3 38 Constant Group Variable Registration 5 17 Constant Variable Registration 5 18 Create New Program 3 6 3 35 4 4 Cross Reference Setting 3 53 Cursor Setting 7 10 Edit the constant variable 5 20 Edit variable 3 33 5 10 5 16 Editor Option 3 15 Environment Setting 1 39 Find 7 25 Group Definition 4 3 5 5 Ladder Display Property 3 41 Ladder Magnification 3 14 Logical Port Setting
3. 1 5 1 3 4 Uninstalling MPE720 Version 6 1 9 1 3 5 Communication Process Settings 1 11 1 4 Starting and Exiting MPE720 Version 6 1 21 1 4 1 Starting MPE720 Version 6 1 21 1 4 2 Exiting MPE 720 Version 6 1 23 1 5 MPE720 Version 6 Window Operations 1 24 1 5 1 Names and Descriptions of Window Components 1 24 1 5 2 Start Window 1 25 1 6 Subwindow Operations 1 27 1 6 1 Descriptions of Subwindow Components 1 27 1 6 2 Displaying and Hiding Subwindows 1 28 1 6 3 Updating Subwindow Data 1 29 1 6 4 Types of Subwindow Displays 1 29 1 6 5 Changing the Subwindow Display Type 1 30 1 7 Project Files 1 31 1 7 1 What Is a Project File 1 31 1 7 2 Creating New Project Files 1 32 1 7 3 Opening Project Files 1 34 1 7 4 Opening an MPE720 Ver
4. 5 26 5 5 Using Comments 5 27 5 5 1 Saving Comments 5 27 5 5 2 Linking with CP Ladder Programs 5 27 5 6 User Structures 5 28 5 6 1 What is User Structure 5 28 5 6 2 Creating User Structures 5 29 5 6 3 Assigning User Structures 5 34 5 6 4 Transferring User Structures 5 34 5 7 Comment Lists 5 35 5 7 1 Referencing Comment Lists 5 35 5 7 2 Search Replace Delete in Comment List 5 39 5 8 Exporting Importing Variables 5 41 5 8 1 Exporting Importing Global Variables I O Variables and Comments 5 41 5 8 2 Exporting Importing Local Variables and Comments 5 47 5 8 3 Exporting Importing Constant Variables 5 51 5 8 4 Exporting elmporting User Structures 5 56 5 8 5 Importing MPE720 Version 5 CMT Files 5 60 Chapter 5 Variables 5 1 1 Types of Variables 5 1 Overview 5 1 1 Types of Va
5. 10 11 programs asa batch acts 4c SS oes eee Ses 10 6 program comments 3 12 Program Password Dialog Box 1 87 1 88 1 89 Program Property Dialog Box 3 43 3 44 Project 1 75 project files 1 31 copying 1 38 deleting 1 38 moving 1 38 renaming 1 38 saving as project file 1 37 property 3 44 R reading from a project file 1 75 reading from machine controllers 1 71 reading privilege levels 3 7 reading privilleges 1 43 referencing 5 35 referencing called programs 3 58 register lists 6 3 register maps 6 3 registering groups and logical axes 5 5 registering structures 5 14 renaming ladder programs 3 43 Replace Dialog Box 3 48 Replace in the Project Dialog Box 3 51 replacing
6. 1 50 1 8 14 Transfer Transfer 1 51 1 8 15 Transfer MPLoader 1 52 1 8 16 Print Ladder 1 53 1 9 Connecting to and Disconnecting from Machine Controllers 1 55 1 9 1 Connecting to Machine Controllers 1 55 1 9 2 Disconnecting from Machine Controllers 1 60 1 10 Stopping STOP and Restarting RUN the Machine Controller CPU 1 61 1 10 1 Stopping Machine Controller CPU STOP 1 61 1 10 2 Restarting Machine Controller CPU RUN 1 63 1 11 Transferring Data 1 64 1 11 1 Overview of Data Transfers 1 64 1 11 2 Writing to Machine Controllers 1 66 1 11 3 Program Disable Processing when a Write Error Occurs 1 69 1 11 4 Saving to Flash Memory 1 70 1 11 5 Reading from Machine Controllers 1 71 1 11 6 Writing into a Project File 1 73 1 11 7 Reading from a Project File
7. 1 11 Motion Display 4 7 Object Variable Setting 7 24 Open DWG setting 3 9 Open Project 1 82 Page Setup 10 2 Print 10 5 Program Password 1 87 1 88 1 89 Program Property 3 43 3 44 Replace 3 48 Index 1 Index Replace in the project 3 51 Search 3 47 Search in project 3 50 Security 1 34 1 35 Select Monitor Setting 7 19 Serial Port Setting 1 12 Transfer 1 64 Transfer Program Save to flash 1 70 Transfer Program Write into Controller 1 66 1 68 1 71 Trigger and Configuration 7 7 User Registration 1 42 1 43 Variable Registration 5 12 5 14 5 22 disable main program 3 43 disconnecting from machine controllers 1 60 Display Buttons 3 40 displaying and hiding subwindows 1 27 displaying graphs 7 5 disp
8. 5 25 editing 5 25 functions 3 4 G general 1 48 global variables 5 12 graph area 7 4 graph area pop up menu 7 9 Group Definition Dialog Box 4 3 5 5 H hierarchical or non hierarchical display 3 40 hierarchical structure on ladder programs 3 4 I O register variables 5 5 I O variable tables A 27 I O variables 5 7 importing global variables I O variables and comments 5 41 motion parameters 2 6 user Structures 5 56 variables 5 41 input guide 3 12 inserting and editing new rung comments 3 22 inserting and editing rungs 3 23 inserting branches 3 24 inserting instruction objects 3 28 installing 1 5 instruction object component names 3 29 instruction objects 3 12 internal variables
9. 2 4 2 2 4 SERVOPACK Parameters 2 4 2 2 5 Exporting Importing Motion Parameters 2 6 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 1 3 1 Overview of Ladder Programming 3 3 3 1 1 What is Ladder Programming 3 3 3 1 2 Overview of Ladder Program Functions 3 4 3 2 Beginning Ladder Programming 3 5 3 2 1 Creating New Ladder Programs 3 6 3 2 2 Creating Ladder Programs in the CP Form 3 8 3 2 3 Opening Ladder Programs 3 10 3 2 4 Opening CP Ladder Programs 3 10 3 2 5 Displaying and Editing MPE720 Version 6 Ladder Programs on MPE720 Version 5 3 11 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs 3 12 3 3 1 Ladder Program Edit Window 3 12 3 3 2 Main Functions Used in Editing Ladder Programs 3 13 3 3 3 Updating Subwindow Displays 3 14 3 3 4 Changing Edit Window Displays 3 14 3 3 5 Editing Progra
10. 7 30 setting the Set Tab page 7 28 setting the X Y graph Tab page 7 29 setup 1 46 1 47 Start Window 1 25 starting 1 21 stopping STOP 1 61 subwindow operations 1 27 subwindows 1 24 system 1 40 1 41 system monitor 1 50 6 10 System Monitor subwindow 11 2 system requirements 1 4 system setting 1 46 system variables 5 4 system set variables 5 2 T table of structures 5 16 A 38 toolbar 1 24 trace definition data default setting 7 27 deleting 7 27 saving 7 27 transfer 1 51 Transfer Dialog Box 1 64 Transfer Program Save to Flash Dialog Box 1 70 Transfer Program Write into Controller Dialog Box 1 66 1 68 1 71 transferring data
11. 3 48 replacing in projects 3 51 reserved words A 46 restarting machine controllers CPU RUN 1 63 rung comments 3 12 rung number blocks 3 12 rungs 3 12 S S register variables 5 4 saving motion programs 4 5 saving project files 1 37 scan time settings 1 47 Search Dialog Box 3 47 Search in Project Dialog Box 3 50 searching 3 47 searching and replacing within projects 3 50 searching for duplicate coils 3 54 searching in projects 3 50 Index security 1 42 1 44 1 45 Security Dialog Box 1 34 1 35 Select Monitor Setting Dialog Box 7 19 Serial Port Setting Dialog Box 1 12 setting passwords 1 87 3 42 setting project password 1 44 setting the Graph Tab page 7 28 setting the List Tab page 7 30 setting the Print Tab page
12. 7 24 7 6 10 Find Dialog Box 7 25 7 6 11 Calculate Dialog Box 7 26 7 7 Other Functions 7 27 7 7 1 Saving and Deleting Trace Definition Data and Setting Defaults 7 27 7 7 2 Print Settings 7 27 7 7 3 Optional Settings 7 28 Chapter 8 Electronic Cam Data Preparation Tool 8 1 8 1 Overview of Electronic Cam Data 8 2 8 2 Starting and Operating the Electronic Cam Data Tool 8 2 Chapter 9 Data Table Programs 9 1 9 1 Overview of Data Table Programs 9 2 9 2 Starting and Using Data Table Programs 9 2 Chapter 10 Printing 10 1 10 1 Printing Ladder Programs 10 2 10 1 1 Page Setup 10 2 10 1 2 Print Previews 10 3 10 1 3 Printing 10 5 10 1 4 Printing Cross Reference Information 10 8 10 1 5 Printing Call
13. 1 50 1 8 14 Transfer Transfer 1 51 1 8 15 Transfer MPLoader 1 52 1 8 16 Print Ladder 1 53 1 9 Connecting to and Disconnecting from Machine Controllers 1 55 1 9 1 Connecting to Machine Controllers 1 55 1 9 2 Disconnecting from Machine Controllers 1 60 1 10 Stopping STOP and Restarting RUN the Machine Controller CPU 1 61 1 10 1 Stopping Machine Controller CPU STOP 1 61 1 10 2 Restarting Machine Controller CPU RUN 1 63 1 11 Transferring Data 1 64 1 11 1 Overview of Data Transfers 1 64 1 11 2 Writing to Machine Controllers 1 66 1 11 3 Program Disable Processing when a Write Error Occurs 1 69 1 11 4 Saving to Flash Memory 1 70 1 11 5 Reading from Machine Controllers 1 71 1 11 6 Writing into a Project File 1 73 1 11 7 Reading from a Project File 1 75 1 11 8 Writing into the CF Card 1 7
14. 5 26 5 5 Using Comments 5 27 5 5 1 Saving Comments 5 27 5 5 2 Linking with CP Ladder Programs 5 27 5 6 User Structures 5 28 5 6 1 What is User Structure 5 28 5 6 2 Creating User Structures 5 29 5 6 3 Assigning User Structures 5 34 5 6 4 Transferring User Structures 5 34 5 7 Comment Lists 5 35 5 7 1 Referencing Comment Lists 5 35 5 7 2 Search Replace Delete in Comment List 5 39 5 8 Exporting Importing Variables 5 41 5 8 1 Exporting Importing Global Variables I O Variables and Comments 5 41 5 8 2 Exporting Importing Local Variables and Comments 5 47 5 8 3 Exporting Importing Constant Variables 5 51 5 8 4 Exporting elmporting User Structures 5 56 5 8 5 Importing MPE720 Version 5 CMT Files
15. MPE720 version 6 Communications such as RS 232C SERVOPACK 4 HE F seese sre O g Tel gt DI d esl DF JE al lk 3 s A s Servomotor Q Programming Control Monitoring 1 2 Basic Engineering Procedure Using MPE720 Version 6 Use the following procedure to operate a Machine Controller and motion system using MPE720 version 6 1 Connect the computer to the MP2000 series Machine Controller V 2 Install MPE720 version 6 on the computer Refer to 1 3 3 Installing MPE720 Version 6 Vy 3 Set the Communication Process Refer to 7 3 5 Communication Process Settings V 4 Start MPE720 version 6 Refer to 1 4 1 Starting MPE720 Version 6 V 5 Create a project file Refer to 1 7 2 Creating New Project Files V Make the required settings Refer to 1 9 1 Connecting to Machine Controllers and 2 1 Module Configuration V T Create the programs Refer to Chapter 3 Ladder Programming and Chapter 4 Motion Programming V 8 Transfer the programs to the Machine Controller Refer to 1 11 Transferring Data V 9 Perform a test run Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 3 1 MPE720 Version 6 System Requirements 1 3 Installing and Uninstalling MPE 20 Version 6 1 3 1 MPE720 Version 6 System Requirements
16. 1 64 trend graphs 7 13 Trigger and Configuration Dialog Box 7 7 troubleshooting 10 1 11 1 troubleshooting and pop up displays 11 2 types of monitoring 6 2 types of subwindow displays 1 29 types of variables 5 2 U uninstalling 1 9 updating subwindow displays 3 14 user registration 1 42 User Registration Dialog Box 1 42 1 43 user structures 5 28 5 56 creating user structures 5 29 user set variables 5 2 using variables 5 26 V variable display icon 3 15 Variable Registration Dialog Box 5 12 5 14 5 22 Variable subwindow 3 13 variable tables A 2 Index 4 variables 1 49 variables that are automatically assigned by system 5 4 axis variables I O registers 5 5 global variables M registers 5 12 gloval constants C registers 5 17 I O variables I O register
17. 1 75 1 11 8 Writing into the CF Card 1 77 1 11 9 Reading from CF Card 1 78 1 11 10 Comparison with the Machine Controller 1 79 1 11 11 Comparing Flash Memory and RAM 1 81 1 11 12 Comparing Project Files 1 82 1 11 13 Comparing with CF Card Data 1 84 1 11 14 Detailed Comparison of Programs and Registers 1 85 1 12 Security 1 87 1 12 1 Security for User 1 87 1 12 2 Security for Project Files 1 87 1 12 3 Setting Passwords for Ladder Programs 1 87 1 12 4 Online Security 1 90 Chapter 2 Configuration 2 1 2 1 Module Configuration 2 2 2 2 Motion Parameters 2 4 2 2 1 Fixed Parameters 2 4 2 2 2 Setting Parameters 2 4 2 2 3 Monitoring Parameters
18. 5 22 K Key Allocation Tab 3 20 L ladder 1 48 Ladder Display Property Dialog Box 3 41 ladder editor toolbar 3 13 Ladder Instruction subwindow 3 13 ladder instruction toolbar 3 13 Ladder Magnification Dialog Box 3 14 ladder program 3 3 3 4 Ladder Program Edit Window 3 5 3 12 ladder program types 3 4 ladder programming 3 3 ladder tab 3 18 launcher 1 24 list area 7 4 list area operations 7 16 list operation buttons 7 17 local variables for use in one variable function external variable A registers 5 24 local variables that are used in one variable internal variables D registers 5 22 Logical Port Setting Dialog Box 1 11 M M register variables 5 12 main functions used in editing ladder programs 3 13 ladder editor toolbar 3 13 ladder instruction subwindow 3 13 ladder instru
19. 5 60 Chapter 6 Monitoring 6 1 6 1 Types of Monitoring 6 2 6 2 Detailed Descriptions of Monitoring Operations 6 3 6 2 1 Register Lists 6 3 6 2 2 Watch Function 6 6 6 2 3 Displaying Online Current Value 6 8 6 2 4 Displaying Offline Current Value 6 9 6 2 5 System Monitor 6 10 vii vill Chapter 7 Data Tracing 7 1 7 1 Overview of Data Tracing 7 3 7 1 1 What is Data Tracing 7 3 7 2 Data Trace Windows 7 4 7 2 1 Starting a Data Trace Window 7 4 7 2 2 Data Trace Window Configuration 7 4 7 3 Displaying Graphs 7 5 7 4 Operation Panel 7 6 7 4 1 Operation Panel Button Functions 7 6 7 4 2 Trigger and Configuration Dialog Box
20. Start H Main Program H Main Program OG DRIVE AT 1ST AXIS LEA op 0 5s Sampling Relay DB000010 DB000011 VAR_VIA HighScan HalfSecond DB000010 DB000011 Bp000014 DBo000000 hooo H lt j Forced ON 0000 NL 1 DB000010 DB000011 DB000010 bpB000011 iH Start H Main Program 7x H Main Program a OG DRIVE AT 1ST AXIS g 0 5s Sampling Relay a VAR_VIA DB000010 DB000011 HighScan HalfSecond DB000010 bB000011 B000014 gt m 1 DB000010 bpBo000011 bBoo0010 bpoo0011 iH bDBO000000 Forced OFF 3 Start H Main Program H Main Program g ajeng 290 p OG DRIVE AT 15T AXIS 0 5s Sampling Relay bB000010 bB000011 HighScan HalfSecond VAR_VIA B000014 DBO00000 gt agj Forced ON OFF DB000010 DB000011 gt _ 0000 i l il NL cleared DB000010 DB000011 DB000010 DB000O0O11 e To clear the forced ON or forced OFF select Debug Clear Forced ON OFF from the main menu 3 55 3 56 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 5 6 Forcing Coils ON OFF 2 Changing ON OFF Status of Forced Coil The ON OFF status of the forced coil in all ladder programs can be displayed in a list In the Forced Coil List Subwindow the ON or OFF status of forced coils in all programs can be changed or cleared The search results are displayed in the Forced Coil List Subwindow The componen
21. 3 12 Engineering Manager 2 2 entering and changing register addresses 3 31 entering and changing variables 3 31 entering and editing expressions for EXPRESSION instructions 3 34 Environment Setting Dialog Box 1 39 environment settings 1 39 error codes 11 4 ethernet connection settings 1 14 exiting MPE720 version 6 1 23 exporting global variables I O variables and comments 5 41 motion parameters rrr rr rrr 2 6 user Structures 5 56 VAlIADICS Sais SF oS eS S SSeS 2 Sie Se eee n 5 41 expression editor 3 34 Index 2 F file pages 7 22 Find Dialog Box 7 25 floating 1 29 Font Tab 3 17 force OFF 3 55 force ON 3 55 forcing coils ON OFF changing ON OFF status of forced coil 3 56 search in forced coil list subwindow 3 57 setting coils to forced ON OFF in the ladder program 3 55 function external variables 5 24 deleting
22. 4 Set the physical port of the newly added port name in the Serial Port Setting Dialog Box opened from the Communication Manager Window Ethernet Connection Settings This setting is needed for engineering using a 10BASE Ethernet connection via a CP 218 communications port Ether net on the 218IF 01 Module For an Ethernet connection a general purpose Ethernet board or PCMCIA Ethernet card must be installed in the personal computer connected to the Machine Controller Also the IP address of the personal computer must be properly set Installing an Ethernet Card Connect a general purpose Ethernet board or PCMCA Ethernet card to the specified connector on the personal com puter When using a PCMCA Ethernet card the driver provided with the card must be installed in the personal com puter Setting the IP Address The IP address of the personal computer must be set before setting the Ethernet connection Set the IP address in the following manner Set the IP address with a LAN cable connected to the personal computer 1 Click the Start Button and then select Settings Control Panel from the start menu Click the Inter net Options Icon in Control Panel The Internet Properties Dialog Box will open 1 3 Installing and Uninstalling MPE720 Version 6 2 Select the Connections Tab and then click the LAN Settings Button Internet Properties General Security Privacy Content zi To set up an Internet con
23. H01 01 FUNCO2 Function FUNCO2 L FUNC03 Function FUNCO3 L FUNC04 Function FUNC04 Called by the FUNC05 Function FUNCO5 FUNC instructions L FUNCO06 Function FUNC06 L FUNC07 Function FUNCO7 MSEE MW00100 FUNC20 Function FUNC20 L FUNC21 Function L FUNC22 Function FUNC22 Function FUNC20 FUNC21 Function L FUNC22 Function FUNC22 I L _ FUNC20 I L FUNC20 Function FUNC20 E Printing SEE instructions By entering the name of a second level program in The SEE instruction of a first level program a program from the second level can now be displayed at the topmost level In the same way a third level program can be displayed at the second level by entering the program name in SEE instruction for a second level program 10 9 Chapter 10 Printing 10 1 5 Printing Call Program Instructions FUNC SEE MSEE E Pringing MSEE Instructions MSEE instructions are displayed together with the variables set in the main program The display of variables differ depending on whether constants or registers are assigned MPM is added to a value Register address as 1s Example MSEE MPMO01 Example MSEE DW00001 10 10 10 2 Printing Other Programs 10 2 Printing Other Programs CP ladder programs registers definitions system definition scan time definition module configuration data trace and motion programs can be printed There are two printing method
24. Interrupt Function El Ladder G Motion 3 4 2 Setting Passwords for Ladder Programs Refer to 7 12 3 Setting Passwords for Ladder Programs for details 3 41 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 4 3 Managing Ladder Program Files 3 4 3 Managing Ladder Program Files In the Ladder Subwindow ladder programs can be cut copied pasted deleted and renamed They can also be set to be enabled or disabled the ladder programs in the Machine Controller Cutting Copying and Pasting Ladder Programs An entire ladder program can be cut or copied and then pasted into either the same project file or another project file This function is valid only when not connected to the Machine Controller i e when offline Before cutting a ladder program finish editing and close the ladder program Copying or cutting and pasting is not possible between function programs and other programs Open the project file for which the ladder program is to be cut or copied and display the Ladder Subwindow Refer to 7 7 3 Opening Project Files If the paste destination is a separate project file open that project file in a separate window and display the Ladder Subwindow In the Ladder Subwindow for the project file that was opened in step 1 select the program that is to be cut or copied A folder such as the Ladder program Folder of the High speed Folder can also be selected In that case the operation will apply to all of the ladd
25. hi bil gi HE bil H o i a bil gi ba sil ior Fi onc aa ciommen it I D au Esimena y aves Ecim p ros j k A E 4 I Fig 10 1 One page Display The button operations are described below 1 Print Button 10 The Print Dialog Box is displayed by clicking the Print Button Pages can then be specified to be printed 2 Previous Page and Next Page Buttons When there are multiple pages in the print preview these buttons can be used to change the page displayed 10 3 10 4 Chapter 10 Printing 10 1 2 Print Previews 3 One Two Page Button The One Two Page Button changes the number of pages displayed in the main window Displays of pages toggles between one and two pages by clicking this button i Print p J cose r ba oi Fig 10 2 Two page Display 4 Zoom In and Zoom Out Buttons These buttons toggle the display magnification between two levels 5 Close Button The Print Preview Window will be closed by clicking the Close Button The display can be changed by clicking the tabs just as in other main windows until the Print Preview Window 10 1 Printing Ladder Programs 10 1 3 Printing 1 Printing Each Ladder Program The following two ways can be used to print the ladder program a Printing from Main Menu The specified range of the Ladder Program that is displayed in the foreground in the main window can be printed from the main menu 1 2 Ope
26. Main program MPMOO1 Privilege MPMOoZ Modified MPMONS Sub program All of the checkboxes are cleared by default For details on privileges refer to 4 2 Creating New Motion Programs To display information in the Motion Subwindow select the appropriate checkbox and then click the OK Button A column for that information will then be displayed in the Motion Subwindow Program a l 2300 MP2300 Main program MPMOO1 MPMODI MPMOoZ MPMOOZ MPMOOS MPMODS MPMOo4 MPMOD4 Sub program Program Wo Program Lines Privilege Modified RJo wW 1 2005 11 10 16 34 44 RJo wW 1 2005 11 10 16 34 44 RJO W 2005 11 10 16 34 54 RJo w 1 2005 11 10 16 35 00 oo oc of 4 7 Chapter 4 Motion Programming 4 3 4 Compiling Motion Programs 4 3 4 Compiling Motion Programs A motion program can be compiled by first selecting the program in the Motion Subwindow and then right clicking and selecting Compile from the pop up menu When an individual program is selected only that program will be compiled When a folder is selected all of the programs in that folder will be compiled Program a l 2300 MP2300 FE Motion program FS Main program Ebene fal MPMOO1 ry MEMO open E MPma0s a Cut Ctrl Sub program E3 Copy Chrl e f Paste Chey Delete Delete Rename Set the Password Cancel the Password Property The results of the compile operation will b
27. Stop user program Do you want bo continue 2 Click the Yes Button The display in the project caption bar will be changed to CPU STOP In addition the color of the caption bar and the CPU status shown on the right side of the bar will be changed 4 MPE720 Ver 6 MP2300 Start SEF At File Edit View Online Compile Debug Window Help BR E a S ta 23 Be BD Te a ve 40 AD E Ex TE Ai Os A X Online MP2300 1 Serial Cf M1 Uniti CPU STOP Programming Monitor Transfer Utility Scantime setting Module configuration Ladder rax stae O e Ladder truco i Program p Controller a l MP2300 GS Ladder program oe m B High speed Communications Setting B Low speed E Start E Interrupt Disconnection m B Function 4 in x Connection 1 Serial COM1 Unit1 History History DATA YMW 1 Serial COM1 Uniti El Ladder amp Motion Fj Ladder Instruction 5 Variable Transfer gt ax output 3 Transfer Register List 1 E watch 1 X cross Reference 1 4OForce Coil List Ready CAP NUM SCRL 1 61 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 SSS ee eee I S 1 10 1 Stopping Machine Controller CPU STOP CPU STOP can be set again even after it has been previously set by using this function This is because of the possibility that multiple users may be connected simultaneously to the same Machine Controller and that the CPU status may be changed by anothe
28. c Changing the Online Security Setting The online security setting can be changed by using the following procedure 1 With the Machine Controller Connected to the MPE720 version 6 online select Online Security Setting from the main menu The Security Setting Dialog Box will appear mf Security Setting Current Status File Reading Restricted Restriction Privilege 1 W Apply File Reading Restriction Ladder Motion ic Language Restriction Privilege 1 and higher are restricted MP2200 CPU O is used save bo CPU gt C4RD is prohibited regardless of the restriction privilege when the File reading restriction is set Security key Change the Security Key 2 Select or deselect the Apply File Reading Restriction check box or change the level in the Restriction Privilege Field as required 3 Enter the correct security key password in the Security Key Field and then click Set The following message will appear asking for confirmation MPE 20 Ver 6 Security setting has completed The security settings must be saved to Flash memory to be enabled when starting From Flash memory 4 Click OK Click the Close button in the upper right to close the Security Setting Dialog Box If saving to flash memory is required save the change to the flash memory 1 93 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 12 4 Online Security 3 Changing the Security Key Password The securi
29. e Offline Current Value Display While offline the values that are stored in registers are displayed in the ladder program For details refer to 6 2 4 Displaying Offline Current Value e System Monitor The system monitor is used to monitor Machine Controller status while a Machine Controller is connected 1 e while online For details refer to 6 2 5 System Monitor These functions are described in detail on the following pages 6 2 Detailed Descriptions of Monitoring Operations 6 2 Detailed Descriptions of Monitoring Operations 6 2 1 Register Lists With the register list function the current values of registers in consecutive areas memory map can be monitored in a Register List Subwindow 1 2 or 3 This enables realtime monitoring when a Machine Controller is connected The current data can be edited Project file data is used for the memory map display and for duplicated register searches If after opening the project file and connecting to the Controller the project file and Controller data are different and memory maps are displayed or multiple registers are searched results may be displayed that do not match the Controller 1 Displaying Memory Maps 1 Click a tab to select one of the Register List Subwindows 1 2 or 3 Select Monitor Register List from the Launcher The Register List 1 Subwindow will automatically be displayed The display of the Register List Subwindow can be switched ON and OF
30. oasis E FixPrn_ 0101 cev FY SetPrm_O101 csv w SrvPrm_0101 csv E oasis UA FixPrn_0102 cev FY SetPrm_0102 csv FY SrvPrm_0102 cay axis E FixPrn_O0103 cev SrvPrm_0103 cay coe The setting items and methods are as follows a Export Path Specify the path of the folder for saving the selected CSV file data Either directly input the path or click the browse button b to select from the Select Folder Dialog Box When the dialog box is opened either the previously set path or MyDocument MPE720 is displayed b Browse Button Click this button to display the Select Folder Dialog Box Select a folder and the selected folder will be set as export path a c Module Name Displays the module name and line number of the motion parameter setting window displayed in the foreground of Module Configuration Definition Window Module Name The module name for which a line number is assigned in the subslot SVBO1 SVA01 PO or SVR is displayed Line Number Displays the line number defined in the Module Configuration Definition Line xx xx 1 to 16 Refer to Machine Controller MP900 MP2000 series Programming Software MPE720 User s Manual manual number SIEP C880700 05 for details on subslot and line number d Axis Displays the axis assigned for the module The information given in the axis combo box in the motion parameter setting window of Engineering Manager is displayed e Fixed Parameter Displays CSV file names FixPrm_xxyy
31. 7 7 7 5 Graph Area Operations 7 8 7 5 1 Functions of Buttons in Graph Area 7 8 7 5 2 Graph Area Pop up Menu 7 9 7 5 3 Using Mouse Cursors 7 9 7 5 4 Cursor Setting Dialog Box 7 10 7 5 5 Scale Offset Adjust Dialog Box 7 11 7 5 6 Trend Graphs 7 13 7 5 7 X Y Graphs 7 14 7 6 List Area Operations 7 16 7 6 1 Changing Pages 7 16 7 6 2 List Operation Buttons 7 17 7 6 3 Pop up Menu 7 18 7 6 4 Select Monitor Setting Dialog Box 7 19 7 6 5 Monitor Pages 7 20 7 6 6 X Y Display Page 7 21 7 6 7 File Pages 7 22 7 6 8 Assigning Monitor Variables 7 23 7 6 9 Object Variable Setting Dialog Box
32. Data Trace Definitions graphs and lists can be printed using the following procedure Select File Print Object Setting from the Main Menu The Print Object Setting Dialog Box will be displayed Check the items to be printed and click the OK Button Print Object Setting Scope Setting Graph List All Data Select ms ELLIO GK CELLIIIIIIIII Items which are set in the Print Tab Page of the Option Dialog Box to not be printed become inactive in the display For details refer to 7 7 3 5 Setting the Print Tab Page Select File Print from the Main Menu to execute printing according to the settings in the Print Object Setting Dialog Box 1 21 1 28 Chapter 7 Data Tracing 7 7 3 Optional Settings 7 7 3 Optional Settings Optional settings can be made related to displays and printing Select Display Option from the Main Menu The Option Dialog Box will be displayed Optional settings can be made by selecting the Set Graph XY graph List or Print Tab Page Reset Button The set values will return to their status when the dialog box was opened Set as Default Button The following message will be displayed The present option data will be set as the default Yes or No Click the OK Button The present data will be set as the default Apply Button The option data will be overwritten and the set value will be immediately reflected Setting the Set Tab Page This tab page is used to set the d
33. Fail Motion command error occurrence FAIL Motion comand execution completed Complete IBxx098 COMPLETE Command eo 4 Command CommandCode Command ResponseCode Command response code ResponseAlarmCode Response alarm code InverterAlarmCode Inverter alarm code Control Command control flag Pause Command pause Abort Command abort Direction JOG STEP direction Status Command status Busy Command executing BUSY flag Hold Command hold completed HOLD Fail Command error occurrence FAIL Complete IBxx098 Command execution completed COMPLETE MotionSubCommand Be L Motion sub command CommandCode OWxx0A Motion sub command ResponseCode TWxx0A Motion sub command response code AuxiliaryInverterAlarmCode IWxx33 Auxiliary inverter alarm code Status IWxx0B Motion sub command status Busy IBxx0BO Motion sub command executing BUSY flag Fail IBxx0B3 Motion sub command error occurrence FAIL Motion sub command execution completed Complete IBxx0B8 COMPLETE SubCommandResponseStatus TWxx31 Motion sub command response status SubCommandAlarm IBxx310 Motion sub command alarm SubCommand Warning IBxx311 Motion sub command warning SubCommandReady IBxx312 Motion sub command ready A 24 SubCommand CommandCode ResponseCode AuxiliaryInverterAlarmCode Status Busy Fail Complete SubCommandResponseStatus SubCommandAlarm SubCommand Warning SubCommandReady Position Command MoveType PhaseCompensationType Position PositionCompe
34. Programs cannot be cut copied or pasted between main programs and sub programs Motion 2 Program a l 2300 MP2300 ES Motion program EE Main program soe Bal MPMOOL Ctrl ctrl E Ctrlt Delete Delete Rename Compile Set the Password Cancel the Password Property When Paste or Delete is selected one of the following confirmation messages will be displayed Click the Yes or OK Button to execute the operation When Paste Is Selected When Delete Is Selected HP Program Number Allocation Please select the program number allocated to the destination program Source Target Program Name 41 MPMOO1 gt MPMOo4 There is 4 possibility to do the movement not anticipated For your safety please compile the program again It is nok possible to change From main program to sub program or From sub program to main program the copy origin and destination When Rename is selected the following dialog box will be displayed Enter the new program name and then click the OK Button The program number cannot be changed ut Program Property Program Mo MPMOOS is 4 6 4 3 Managing Motion Programs 4 3 3 Displaying Property Columns The Motion Display Property Dialog Box will be displayed by clicking the Motion Program Properties Button Fig mwr Motion Display Property Column Display C Program Lines 2300 MP2300 g Ta Motion program
35. The Add or Remove Programs Window will again be displayed 6 Click the Close Button X to close the Control Panel Add or Remove Programs Currently installed programs Sort by Change or i Intel R Extreme Graphics 2 Driver Remove Programs i Intel R PRO Network Adapters and Drivers A YASKAWA Communication Manager Size 0 62MB oO i G YASKAWA Electronic CamTool Size 2 80MB Add Hew Used occasionally Programs ee ae aos m To change this program or remove it From your computer click Change Remove Change Remove Add Remove Windows Components 1 10 1 3 Installing and Uninstalling MPE720 Version 6 1 3 5 Communication Process Settings The Communication Manager Communication Process which is installed along with MPE720 version 6 is used to set the communication port at the computer that is used to connect to the Machine Controller 1 Serial Port Settings a How to Set a Serial Port If the Communication Process settings have already been made for MPE720 version 5 settings will not have to be reconfigured after installing version 6 1 Start the Communication Manager Communication Process either by double clicking the Communication Manager Icon in the YE_Applications Folder on the desktop or by clicking the Start Button and selecting Programs YE_Applications Communication Manager The Communication Process Icon will be displayed in the task bar at the bottom right of the screen 2 Do
36. When the writing is complete the following message will appear Click OK MPE 20 Ver 6 l Write into Project ended normally After the transfer is complete the data transfer log and results can be confirmed in the Transfer Subwindow 1 74 1 11 Transferring Data 1 11 7 Reading from a Project File The data will be read from the selected project file and written into the currently open project file This function is enabled when the MPE720 version 6 is not connected to the Machine Controller offline The procedure is as follows 1 Select Online Transfer from the main menu and click the Read from Project Button in the Transfer Dialog Box The Read from Project Dialog Box will appear Select a project file from which a data is to be read and then click the Open Button Open Project Look in 9 2300 O amp go iy Haaa ymw Eg Ge NewFileOO1 va My Recent EE NewFile mw Documents Hae keto VM yy File name teste YM wt Files of type Project File hv w hy Network The Transfer Program Read from Project Dialog Box will appear 3 Click either the Batch or Individual Button and then click the Start Button Transter Program Read from Project Source Project File MP2300 taaa YM Th Individual The Following Files will be transferred System Configuration System Definition Scan Time Definition Program Module Configuration Data Trace O satel Ladder P
37. 1 b Creating System Structures for information on how to assign user structures 5 6 4 Transferring User Structures User structures can be transferred individually or as a batch and compared using the program transfer function Transfer Program Write into Project Target Project File MP2300 taaa YM Th Individual The Following Files will be transferred Cl System Configuration Ladder Program High speed Low speed Start Interrupt Function Motion Program Main Sub Program Table Data ariable Axis Input Output Global Constant d Seplekat User Structure Ll Comment Fig 5 1 Program Transfer Dialog Box when Write to Project is Selected Refer to 7 17 Transferring Data for details on program transfer 0 34 5 7 Comment Lists 5 7 Comment Lists Comments assigned to each register can be referenced and edited by data type from the Comment List in the Variable Subwindow and Local Variable Subwindow gt X Variable AIX Local Variable fe Register Comment List ageer e207 ia System Variable Sa Axis Variable fis 10 Variable Global Variable E Constant variable ff User structure fil Lang E Float a Address The same comment list can be referenced regardless of whether the comment list is opened from the Variable Subwindow or the Local Variable Subwindow 5 7 1 Referencing Comment Lists Comment lists can be display
38. 1 Outline I O variables global variables and I O M and C register comments can be exported to CSV files A desired file name can be set for each CSV file with a file extension CSV Ifa CSV file with the same name already exists in the export destination the data of CSV file in the export destination will be deleted and new data will be written The editing of CSV files is described below When a CSV file is opened the data is displayed from left to right Register Comment Variable and Struc s ture as shown below When nothing is set for Comment Variable and or Structure the corresponding cell is left blank B Comment 2 D Structure 4 evo eeteaion ee e oes arabe omens 1 Enter a correct register 2 Refer to the supplemental information given under step 2 of the structure assigning procedure in 5 3 1 1 b Cre ating System Structures for details on the Comment Column 3 Refer to the supplemental information given under step 2 of the structure assigning procedure in 5 3 1 1 b Cre ating System Structures for information on how to assign variable names 4 Displayed only when the register data type is ADDRESS Refer to the supplemental information given under step 2 of the structure assigning procedure in 5 6 2 Creating User Structures for information on Member Name and Member Comments 5 When only comments are set the Variable column will be
39. 2 Changing a Password 1 Right click the program for which the password is to be changed in the Ladder Subwindow and select Set Password from the pop up menu that will be displayed The Program Password Dialog Box will be displayed m Program Password Current Password New Password Password Confirm Program Password Accessing the program only when the password is correctly input becomes possible Effective From next access to programs The character which can be used For the program password is only a normal width alphanumeric character Cancel 2 Enter the current password in the Current Password Field Enter a new password of 1 to 8 characters in the New Password Field Enter the same password again in the Password Confirm Field and click the OK Button The OK Button is valid when one or more characters of text are entered in the Password Confirm Field The password will be changed and the Program Password Dialog Box will be closed 3 Cancelling the Password 1 Right click the program for which the password is to be cancelled in the Ladder Subwindow and select Cancel Password from the pop up menu that will be displayed 1 88 1 12 Security The Program Password Dialog Box will be displayed N Program Password Program Password Cancellation of program password The password set in the specified program is cancelled Effective From next access to programs The character which
40. 4 Register Address Field Address Display Mode The names will be as follows when the instruction type is RELAY 2 Comment Field Comment Display Mode 3 Variable Name Field 1 Instruction Name Field 4 Register Address Field Address Display Mode The Comment Field and Register Address Field can be displayed or hidden by toggling the icons in the Ladder Editor Toolbar Also whether the Variable Name Field which shows the variable names or addresses can be displayed or hidden by the same method For details refer to 3 3 4 2 Displaying or Hiding Addresses Variables and Comments The components are described below 1 Instruction Name Field The names of inserted instructions are displayed here For RELAY instructions the RELAY type is displayed For details on changing instructions that have been entered refer to 3 3 17 Editing Instruction Objects 2 Comment Field Comments for instruction objects can be edited and displayed here Comments cannot be edited if the registers are not set For details on entering and editing comments refer to 3 3 13 Editing Comment Fields 3 Variable Name Field Variable names for registers used for referencing instructions or storing execution results can be entered and displayed here Register addresses are displayed for registers for which no variables are assigned For details on entering and editing variables refer to 3 3 12 Entering and Changing Variables and Regi
41. 5 7 system variables S registers 5 4 variables that can be set by the user local variables for use in one variable 5 21 variables that can be referred from any program 5 12 W watch function 6 6 window operations 1 24 Window Tabs 1 24 writing into a project file 1 73 writing privilege levels 3 7 writing privileges 1 43 writing to machine controllers 1 66 X X Y display page 7 21 X Y graphs 7 14 Revision History The revision dates and numbers of the revised manuals are given on the bottom of the back cover MANUAL NO SIEP C880700 30A Printed in Japan June 2006 06 6 Date of printing Date of original publication Date of Printing Rev WEB Section Revised Content No Rev No Jane 2006 __ Fasten December 2006 Upgraded to Version 6 03 from Version 6 01 Modification Communication Process Settings Modification Connection to Machine Controllers Project Link Connection Direct Connec Addition Transferring Data 1 12 4 Addition Online Security Chapter 2 Addition Configuration Module Configuration Definition Export Import of Motion Param eters Addition Displayi
42. A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details Comments Servo Network servo MonitorALMNo ALMCode Status OWxx4F IWxx2D IWxx2C ALM IBxx2C0 WARNING IBxx2Cl CMDRDY IBxx2C2 SVON IBxx2C3 PON IBxx2C4 MLOCK IBxx2C5 ZPOINT IBxx2C6 PSET IBxx2C7 DEN IBxx2C8 T LIM IBxx2C9 L_CMP IBxx2CA NEAR IBxx2CB P SOT IBxx2CC N_ SOT IBxx2CD TWxx2E Servo alarm monitor number Servo alarm code Network servo status Alarm occurred ALM Warning occurred WARNING Command ready CMDRDY Servo ON SVON Main power ON PON Machine lock MLOCK Zero point ZPOINT Positioning completed PSET Distribution completed DEN Torque being limited T_LIM Latch completed L_CMP Position proximity NEAR Positive soft limit P_SOT Negative soft limit N_SOT Network servo I O monitor O FowardSideLimitSwitchIn IBxx2E0 Forward side limit switch input ReverseSideLimitSwitchl nput IBxx2E1 Reverse side limit switch input Sc DecelerationDogSwitchIn IBxx2E2 Deceleration dog switch input A B C EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 Brake IBxx2E3 IBxx2E4 IBxx2E5 IBxx2E6 IBxx2E7 IBxx2E8 IBxx2E9 Encoder phase A input PA Encoder phase B input PB Encoder phase C input PC First external latch input EXT1 Second external latch input EXT2 Third external latch input EXT3 Brake output BRK Network servo monitor information Monitor 2 enabled Servo user monitor Monitor Monitor2Enable MonitorCode Monit
43. Attached file Project file Only one project file can be opened at a time for a single MPE720 Ver 6 Window In addition the same project file cannot be opened in multiple MPE720 Ver 6 Windows If an attempt is made to open a project file that is already open the MPE720 Ver 6 Window for which the project file is open will be displayed in front 1 31 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 7 2 Creating New Project Files 1 7 2 Creating New Project Files Use the following procedure to create a new project file 1 Start the operation in either of the following two ways e Click New under Project in the Start Window e Select File Create New Project from the main menu In either case the Create New Project Dialog Box will be displayed If there is an edited file a message will be displayed asking whether the file is to be compiled and saved The results of clicking each of the buttons are described below Yes Compile overwrite and exit No Exit without compiling or saving Cancel Cancel the new project creation and continue editing For details on closing a project file refer to 7 7 6 Closing Project Files 2 Open the save destination folder input the file name and select the file type and the Machine Controller to be used Create New Project Save in ProjectFile Data 0O F gt m Ena 28 Mp2300 YM 3 1000 ymw 3 TESTOOL YW My Recent 1024 01 ymw TesToo2 ymw Doc
44. Chapter 7 Data Tracing 7 6 9 Object Variable Setting Dialog Box 7 6 9 Object Variable Setting Dialog Box The Object Variable Setting Dialog Box shown below is displayed by clicking the Object Variable Setting Button With this dialog box variables displayed on a File Page can be assigned to a Monitor Page as Monitor Variables Object Variable Setting Refer to the File variable v 1 Object Variable Setting Setting Format i1 Reference variable selection Set value Explanation 4 variable on the File n page will be referenced on the Monitor page fa Select a variable to be referenced in the list and click 1 Select reference variable 6 Click Set 5 in the variable field on the Monitor page to set the selected variable fc The selected variable will be added to the Monitor page Use the following procedure to set a reference variable 1 With the above dialog box displayed select the variable to be referenced from the list and click the 1 Object Variable Setting Button The selected variable name will be displayed in the Set value area 2 Select the variable field on the Monitor Page that is to be set from the list and click the Setting Button in the Object Variable Setting Dialog Box The selected reference variable will be added to the selected variable field Not only file variable but reference variable difference or sum can be selected as the reference variable type W
45. Conversion into TES TOOS Y MW was completed 1 36 1 7 Project Files 1 7 5 Saving Project Files A project file can be overwritten or save as a new file 1 Overwriting Project Files 1 Select File Save Project from the Main Menu The edited project file will be overwritten after the message notifying that The project file is being saved Please wait for a minute 2 Saving as Project File Y If a saving error occurs while overwriting a project file When overwriting a project file by executing the Save Project command a saving error may occur If an error occurs the project file can be restored by renaming the following files with the extension YMW YMW Backup Backup of the project file before overwriting YMW MW Backup of the project file after overwriting 1 Select File Save as a new Project from the main menu The Save as a new Project Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Enter a project file name and then click the Save Button An existing project file can be opened if it is not opened by another computer running MPE720 version 6 Save as a new project Save in ENG E 2100S5MPL_E MW 23 2200SMPL_E MW My Recent 2300 Mw Documents 3 2300SMPL_E VMW 23 20060802 MW G8 DATA YMW EEE wy YM My Computer File name D O e Save as type Q Project File MW v D My Apert 6 If a project file with the same name already exists in
46. Count Preset Request PI Latch Detection Request Coincidence Detection Request POSMAX Turns Preset Request Multipurpose Output Function Selection Count Preset Value Coincidence Detection Value POSMAX Turns Preset Value Minimum Value of Range of Zone Output Maximum Value of Range of Zone Output Speed Coincidence Detection Setting Speed Coincidence Detection Width Frequency Coincidence Detection Setting Frequency Coincidence Detection Width Averaging Count Setting System Monitor A 31 A Variable Tables A 3 1O Variables 9 MECHATROLINK Distributed I O Module Variables E 24 VDC 64 point I O Module IN1 ILxx00 Input Signal Connector 1 INO1 IBxx000 Input 1 IN32 IBxx01F Input 32 ILxx02 Input Signal Connector 2 IBxx020 Input 33 IBxx03F Input 64 OLxx00 Output Signal Connector 1 OUTO1 OBxx000 Output OUT32 OBxx01F Output 32 OLXX02 Output Signal Connector 2 OUT33 OBxx020 Output 33 OUT64 OBxx03F Output 64 E 24 VDC 128 point I O Module INI IWxx00 Input Signal Connector 1 INO1 IBxx000 Input 1 IN64 IBxx03F Input 64 TWxx04 Input Signal Connector 2 IN65 IBxx040 Input 65 IN128 IBxx07F Input 128 OWxx00 Output Signal Connector 1 OUTO1 OBxx000 Output 1 OUT64 OBxx03F Output 64 OBxx04 Output Signal Connector 2 OUT65 OBxx040 Output 65 OUT128 OBxx07F Output 128 A 32 A Variable Tables A 3 1O Variables E Reversible Counter 2 channel Module Variable Register Comments IAxx00 IWxx00 IWxx01 I
47. S008 2 Mode setting 2 i Eg Motion command control flag ow g00g 3 Hexadecimal 3 Function setting 1 OO17 HF Motion subcommand OMS 004 Tonque T hrust reference setting OLeo00C 4 Function setting 2 0033 H 2 Speed limit setting at the torque thrust reference ow B00E 5 Function setting 3 OOOO H speed reference setting OLS010 amp Motion command 0l aalis a Lank Era TUS setting at the speed refer OLBO14 4 Motion command control 10000 H _ 10 Motion subcormmand 0 12 Torque Thrust reference si UO fa 14 Speed limit setting at the 150 E Parameters Selected from Combo Box Combo Type Save the parameter window displayed in the foreground of the Engineering Manager Window and then export to a CSV file If the CSV file is opened after exporting the input data are displayed in decimal notation Fixed Parameters Setup Parameters SERVOPACK Monitor r Name REG Input Data Run command setting ow so00 0000 0000 0000 0001 000 Mode setting 1 ow8001 0000 0000 0000 COO 000 Mode setting 2 owso02 0000 0000 0000 aooo ooo Function setting 1 ow8003 0000 0000 0001 0001 001 4 Function setting 2 owso04 0000 0000 0011 0011 003 Export then Displayed in dec imal Input Value 1 Positioning 9 Motion command control flag 0000 H 10 Motion subcornmand 0 5 Function setting 3 ows005 0000 0000 0000 aooo ooo 6 Option Setting Ow S006 0000 0000 0000 0000 000 8 Motion command OWS8008 Eea l
48. The following table shows the computer system requirements for the computer in which MPE720 version 6 is to be installed and used Pentium 800 MHz min or equivalent 1 GHz min is recommended Memory Capacity 128 MB min 256 MB min is recommended One CD drive Required only for installation Communications Ports Serial Ethernet MP2100 bus or USB Operating System Windows 2000 service pack 1 or later Windows XP Adobe Reader version 6 00 or later Required for help displays Other i Internet Explorer version 5 5 or later Required for displaying online help for ladder instructions 1 3 2 Compatibility with MPE720 Version 5 If MPE720 version 5 is already installed removal is not required before installing MPE720 version 6 Moreover MPE720 version 5 will not be overwritten when MPE720 version 6 is installed After MPE720 version 6 has been installed version 5 and version 6 can both be used Display Resolution 1 024 x 768 min 16 bit High Color AEN DO era 1 4 1 3 Installing and Uninstalling MPE720 Version 6 1 3 3 Installing MPE 20 Version 6 If MPE720 version 5 is already installed uninstall it before installing MPE720 version 6 is not required Moreover MPE720 version 5 will not be overwritten when MPE720 version 6 is installed After MPE720 version 6 has been installed version 5 and version 6 can both be used If MPE720 version 6 has been previously installed the new installation of MPE720 v
49. When selected a character string that was entered as a search object is converted to the correct register notation when it is recognized as a register Output log at Search 2 If Output log at Search 2 is selected the search results will be output in the Search 2 Subwindow and the output contents of the Search 1 Subwindow will not be changed If Output log at Search 2 is not selected the search results will be output in the Search 1 Subwindow Select range When selected the search range can be set by specifying the start rung and end rung Start the search If the Search Button is clicked the relevant instruction object will be searched and selected If the Search All Button is clicked the search results will be displayed in the Search 1 or Search 2 Subwindow Begin searching for NOC ServoO0r H Rung OO00 Step 0002 NOC Instruction Type NOC ServoOn H Rung 0001 Step 00DE NOC Instruction Type NOC ServoOn H Rung 0002 Step 0010 NOC Instruction Type NOC ServoOn Search complete 3 found End the search by clicking the Cancel Button or the Close Button X 2 Replacing 1 Display the program that is to be searched and replaced in the foreground of the Ladder Edit Window and select Edit Replace from the Main Menu The Replace Dialog Box will be displayed Select the Register or Comment Tab Page and specify the search object and the replace object Replace Register Comment Search Regis
50. and pasting Deleting Changing names Compiling Refer to 3 3 17 Ladder Program Compiling and Compile fay Low speed L Main Program Options Ey Start Interrupt e Enabling or disabling Function e Displaying properties Ell Ladder Motion Fig 3 3 Ladder Subwindow Setting and cancelling passwords This section describes how to change the display and manage ladder programs in the Ladder Subwindow 3 4 1 Changing Ladder Subwindow Displays The Ladder Subwindow display can be changed by the two buttons at the top of the subwindow 1 Hierarchical or Non hierarchical Display Ladder programs are displayed in a hierarchical structure by default in the Ladder Subwindow To change to a non hierarchical structure click the Hierarchical Structure Display Button The display is toggled each time the buttons are clicked Ladder PE Pr aI pA Abc mP2300 fe Ladder program fe Ladder program f High speed f High speed H Main Program E f H01 E Ho1 01 E HO1 01 HO1 02 lt gt IN Ho2 02 W Hos E H04 IN Hog fe Low speed fe Low speed L Main Program L Main Program Start Start E Interrupt E Interrupt E Function E Function Ell Ladder Motion El Ladder Motion Hierarchical Display Non hierarchical Display 3 4 Managing Programs in the Ladder Subwindow 2 Displaying Properties The Ladder
51. and that user will no longer be able to open the project file 1 Setting a Password 1 Right click the program for which a password is to be set in the Ladder Subwindow and select Set Password from the pop up menu that will appear The Program Password Dialog Box will appear EY Program Password Current Password New Password Password Confirm Program Password Accessing the program only when the password is correctly input becomes possible Effective From next access to programs The character which can be used For the program password is only a normal width alphanumeric character Cancel 1 87 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 12 3 Setting Passwords for Ladder Programs 2 Enter a password of one to eight characters in the New Password Field Enter the same password again in the Password Confirm Field and click the OK Button The OK Button is valid when one or more characters of the text are entered in the Password Confirm Field No distinction is made between uppercase and lowercase The Program Password Dialog Box will be closed and a lock mark will be displayed next to the icon for the ladder program selected in step 1 If the applicable program is displayed in the Main Window the program will be closed Program BAR ABC M2300 fae Ladder program iaddligh speed Main Program 12 Hoi Hoz Ho4 HO6 H Low speed H Start
52. cdt The converted data can then be transferred from the Cam Data Tool to the Controller 8 2 Starting and Operating the Electronic Cam Data Tool The Cam Tool Window is opened by selecting Utility Electronic Cam Tool in the Launcher 4 Cam Tool File View Help D tm bed G ibn 2 Ele ka For details on operating the Electronic Cam Data Tool refer to the Machine Controller MP900 MP2000 Series Electronic Cam Data Preparation Tool Operation Manual SIEP C880700 18 Chapter 9 Data Table Programs This chapter describes how to start data table programs 9 1 Overview of Data Table Programs 9 2 9 2 Starting and Using Data Table Programs 9 2 9 1 Chapter 9 Data Table Programs 9 1 Overview of Data Table Programs In data table programs data used in the main ladder program can be prepared in table format 9 2 Starting and Using Data Table Programs Use the following procedure to start the Data Table Program Window 1 Select Utility Engineering builder in the Launcher The Engineering Manager will be started 2 Select File Open Define Data Table Data Table Map from the Main Menu ae Engineering Builder mia view Definition Program Print Ctrl F o _ Tool Exit Define Data Table Data Table Map Motion Program File Edit View Window O ted SB Bs Wey RP PEF es Ea Ee SR Wi Table Data St
53. o o o o o o o o o o o o E Number of Registers Displayed in One Row The number of registers displayed in one row can be changed between 1 and 16 by entering a number directly or by selecting from a list always 16 for BIT type When Automatic is selected the number of registers displayed will automatically be set to match the display size of the Register List Subwindow E Monitor Button ON B amp B OFF IE monitor This button is valid only while online It toggles between ON and OFF each time it is clicked When monitoring is set to ON register data is continually refreshed and displayed When monitoring is set to OFF the data is not refreshed m Memory Map Display Button Display ON Display OFF This button toggles the display between ON and OFF each time it is clicked When the display is ON registers used in the ladder program are displayed with a green background and registers used for more than one data type are displayed with a red background When the display is OFF all registers are displayed with a white background E Memory Map Refresh Button Click this button to refresh the register map display The Memory Map Refresh Button is invalid when the display is turned OFF by the Memory Map Display Button 6 2 Detailed Descriptions of Monitoring Operations m Duplicated Register Search Up Down Buttons 7 These buttons are used to find and display registers that are used for more than one data type The buttons wit
54. the detailed comparison of programs is not possible You can go to the corresponding program by double clicking the output comparison result The detailed comparison for programs is applicable only for ladder programs motion programs and registers Use the following procedure to compare programs 1 Select Online Transfer from the main menu and select a program to be compared in the Transfer Dialog Box Compare with Controller Compare Flash to RAM Output a result after data of the controller and Output a result after data of the controller s data of the project file are compared RAM and data of the flash memory are compared Compare with CF card Compare with Project File Output 4 result after data of the opened project file and data of the other project file are i compared Output a result after compared with the CF card and controller or CF card and the project file The Open Project Dialog Box will appear 2 Select a data of project file CF card or Machine Controller to be compared and then click the Open Button This explanation will use the selection of Compare with Project File as an example Open Project Look in 2300 A ree aaa YM 3 HE NewFileo01 MW My Recent 2 NewFile ymw Documents NPE test MW tested ymw My Documents Pr My Computer File name test2 YMW amp Files of type Project File C YMW E My Network The Compare
55. 001 Step Number 10 8 10 1 Printing Ladder Programs 10 1 5 Printing Call Program Instructions FUNC SEE MSEE The programs that are called by the FUNC instructions SEE instructions and MSEE instructions can be displayed as a tree diagram and printed out The hierarchy of levels of call instructions for function programs consists of a maximum of seven levels For motion programs there is no limitation of levels 7 levels lt Example gt o eee H DWG H01 H01 01 FUNC01 FUNC02 FUNC03 FUNC04 FUNC05 FUNC06 FUNC07 Call Instruction refers to the instruction to call and reference an instruction object in another program such as FUNC MSEE and SEE Use the following procedure to print out the program call instructions 1 Select Utility Print Manager from the Launcher and select the Program Tab in the Print Manager Window Click Details on the DWG List in the Program Tab The Print Object Setting Dialog Box will appear 2 Select the Drawing Tree check box and then execute printing The program call instructions will be printed out E Printing FUNC Instructions The following illustration shows the FUNC instructions that are displayed in a tree diagram when printed PDATA1 962401 P00015 Drawing Tree High Scan Drawings Called by the SEE instructions Main Program High Scan H01 High Scan H01 01 MSEE MPMO0 1 Motion Program MPM001 FUNCO 1 Function FUNCO1 H01
56. 1 9 Connecting to and Disconnecting from Machine Controllers 1 9 Connecting to and Disconnecting from Machine Controllers This section describes how to connect and disconnect communications between a computer running MPE720 version 6 and a Machine Controller 1 9 1 Connecting to Machine Controllers The MPE720 version 6 operations when connecting to a Machine Controller with connection data Refer to 7 9 1 Connecting to Machine Controllers for details on the settings in the Communications Setting Dialog Box are different from when opening a project file and other situations There are two ways to connect MPE720 version 6 and a Machine Controller Project Link Connection Connects a Machine Controller to MPE720 version 6 with an open project file Direct Connection Connects a Machine Controller to MPE720 version 6 without an open project file The following diagrams illustrate data transfer images Connecting to the Machine Controller When a connection is made to a Machine Controller MPE720 Ver 6 with a project file open the application data in the Application data in Machine Controller RAM is displayed in MPE720 Machine Controller Machine Controller i RAM version 6 Project file aug ale Vonne ee WEN Compie When a program is compiled while connected to a MPE720 Ver 6 Machine Controller or when the connection is closed and the program is compiled the edited data is written Edited data Machine Controller to both the
57. 2 Inthe Logical Port Setting Dialog Box select CP 218 for Port Kind and then click Detail Logical Port Setting Logical Port 2 Fort Kind CP 218 a TimeOut i aoad mg Dual i Off C On Cancel The CP 218 Port Setting Dialog Box will open 3 Enter the IP address of the personal computer for IP Address First and select the OFF option for Default Leave the other items at their default settings and then click OK to close the dialog box CP 218 Port Setting IF Addres First 192 168 1 2 r IP ddres 5econd Default on oFF gt Engineering Port 10000 256 65535 Message Received TCP Port Count 10 0 16 TCP Top Pot 20000 20000 65535 UDF Port Count P10 O 16 UDP Top Pot 20000 20000 65535 Cancel 1 3 Installing and Uninstalling MPE720 Version 6 4 When OK is clicked in the Logical Port Setting Dialog Box you will be returned to the Communication Manager Window CP 218 will be displayed for the logical port selected in step 1 Communication Manager File View Tool Control Modem Help alz gt lalalal 5 Select File Save and then click Yes in the dialog box displayed for confirmation The setting will be saved Communication Manager mie View Tool Control Modem Help The Information will be Saved 4re You Ready 2 CP 216 1 6 Select File Exit and then click Yes in the dialog box displayed for confirmation The setting
58. 2 2 Creating Ladder Programs in the CP Form 3 8 3 2 3 Opening Ladder Programs 3 10 3 2 4 Opening CP Ladder Programs 3 10 3 2 5 Displaying and Editing MPE720 Version 6 Ladder Programs on MPE720 Version 5 3 11 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs 3 12 3 3 1 Ladder Program Edit Window 3 12 3 3 2 Main Functions Used in Editing Ladder Programs 3 13 3 3 3 Updating Subwindow Displays 3 14 3 3 4 Changing Edit Window Displays 3 14 3 3 5 Editing Program Comments 3 21 3 3 6 Inserting and Editing New Rung Comments 3 22 3 3 7 Inserting and Editing New Rungs 3 23 3 3 8 Inserting Branches 3 24 3 3 9 Editing Branches 3 26 3 3 10 Inserting Instruction Objects 3 28 3 3 11 Editing Instruction Objects 3 30 3 3 12 Entering and Changing Variables and Register Addresses 3 31 3 3 13 Editing Comment Fields 3 33 3 3 14 Entering and
59. 6 or vice versa Symbols used in MPE720 version 5 are different from Comments used in MPE720 version 6 The comments that can be displayed and edited on the Comment bar or Comment list of MPE720 version 5 correspond to the comments used in MPE720 version 6 Y During direct connection if a comment of the S register is edited in the comment bar or comment list of the Engineering Manager the comment will be invalid and not saved 5 27 5 28 Chapter 5 Variables 5 6 1 What is User Structure 5 6 User Structures 5 6 1 What is User Structure A user structure is used to manage a set of variables registers and comments that are entered by the user The registers assigned to a user structure can easily be viewed on screen Registers assigned to a user structure are called Structure Members and up to 100 structure members can be assigned to one user structure User structures are used by assigning them to ADDRESS type global or local variables Zi fee Register Comment List fe Variable ia System Variable aa Axis Variable fis 10 Variable Global Variable E Constant variable fi User structure 5 6 User Structures 5 6 2 Creating User Structures A user structure can be created by assigning specified variables registers comments etc in the Registration Struc ture Dialog Box Use the following procedure to create a user structure 1 Right click the User structure Folder in t
60. 7 10 Chapter 7 Data Tracing 7 5 4 Cursor Setting Dialog Box 7 5 4 Cursor Setting Dialog Box When the Cursor Setting Button _ in the Graph Area is clicked the Cursor Setting Dialog Box will be displayed as shown below Cursor Setting Cursor Display Type Vertical Color Display Position sal oo E The cross cursor is displayed when a Vertical Monitor Variable is activated in the Select __ Used to select either Vertical or se Teas Field of the list display The center of the vErLICA Cross cursor shape i cross cursor will move over the selected ace Monitor Variable A B Color Used to select the cursor A and B col When the icon is clicked the Color Set ors ting Window will be displayed Used to toggle between displaying and The cursors are displayed by selecting Diapiay hiding the A and B cursors their respective checkboxes Used to adjust the cursor display posi Position tion Enter a value directly or use the spin buttons When a number is entered directly it is adjusted to the nearest grid position 7 5 Graph Area Operations 7 5 5 Scale Offset Adjust Dialog Box When the Adjust Scale Offset Button in the Graph Area is clicked the Scale Offset Adjust Dialog Box will be displayed as shown below This dialog box can be used to adjust the scale maximum value for each axis of the graph and to adjust the offset deviation from the center Scale Offset Adjust S
61. A 1 Variables that are Automatically Assigned by System The following table provides details on Variables that are Automatically Assigned by System provided by MPE720 version 6 eon M i C a e SC dSC d Pers SSCS C C a T SS i EY OnAfter2s SB000019 ON 2 0s after high speed scan start OnAfter5s SB00001 A ON 5 0s after high speed scan start Fricker500ms SB000011 0 5s flicker relay en speed la a SB000014 0 5s ae relay Oey speed A Variable Tables A 1 Variables that are Automatically Assigned by System Variable Name Registor Comments LowScan Low speed scan relay FirstScan SB000003 Flicker After low speed scan starts only the first scan ON Flicker relay SB000030 SB000031 SB000032 SB000033 FlickerScan Flicker500ms Flickerls Flicker2s 1 scan flicker relay low speed 0 5s flicker relay low speed 1 0s flicker relay low speed 2 0s flicker relay low speed Sampling Sampling relay SB000034 SB000035 SB000036 SB000037 Sampling500ms 0 5s sampling relay low speed Sampling 1s 1 0s scampling relay low speed Sampling2s 2 0s sampling relay low speed Sampling60s 60 0s sampling relay low speed OnAfter Relay after low speed scan start OnAfterls OnAfter2s OnAfter5s SB000038 SB000039 SB00003A ON 1 0s after low speed scan start ON 2 0s after low speed scan start ON 5 0s after low speed scan start ErrorHigh High speed program error SW00084 SW00085 SW00154 Count Code Program
62. Address and bit Bit of one structure member overlaps with those of another member the lines of the overlapped structure members are displayed in pink as follows HY Registration Structure structure Mame ser Structure comment Structure Member1 Word T Member 1 Member Member3 Bit 3 E MEMBER 0 TEST DATA Bit 3 E DATA Memberz Lang Member4 Add 11 Cancel i If you click OK the following error message will appear Change either of the overlapped registers as one regis ter can only be assigned once in one user structure E Error Generating Information T Error code 0400506FE The address of structure member is overlapped CAUSE 1 The address of structure member is overlapped SOLUTION 1 Please specify the addres which no overlap to address of structure member 5 32 5 6 User Structures Click OK in the Registration Structure Dialog Box The Registration Structure Dialog Box will close The new user structure is displayed in the Variable Subwin dow FR fe Register Comment List fe Variable ita System Variable faa Axis Variable fi 10 Variable E Global Variable E Constant Variable Se User structure of Se User_Structure Structure Member Member 1 wWooo00 i Member Member2 LO0001 p MEMBER Member3 B00003E aJ TEST Member4 40001 1 EJ i h E Structure TESTER If a user structure has alre
63. Clear Check the displayed alarm information and correct the error Click the Reset Button 11 1 Troubleshooting and Pop up Displays The display in the System Monitor Subwindow will change back to the normal display System Monitor Normal Operating 4 x J The controller is operation normally Run Status E wO Onn am er T ea Scan time Setting Current Max High 10 0ms C 0ms 0 0ms Low 200 0 ms 0 0 ms 0 0 ms 4 Clear E Setting 11 3 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 11 2 Error Codes The following table lists the error codes that can be detected by the System Monitor 0x31 Real number operation Exponential 0x32 Real number operation Exponential overflow 0x34 Real number storage Exponential underflow 0x35 11 2 Error Codes cont d 11 5 Appendices PA MGI ONG AO GS eee E E E A 2 A 1 Variables that are Automatically Assigned by System cccccccscececeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeeaaees A 2 A2 AXi Variable Detalls ee ccsertiae eccentric ue odete subte tence araia aiin ae ira aE Esae a A 5 Ao Va DIE o E E ES A 27 A 4 System Structures 0 0 ceccccceecceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeeseaseeeseaeeesesaaesees A 38 B Resolved VV OOS ostcocassectasccuuccnesiaceste cise niweisdedececeeshasnedoacuencaeereestescedenseeaieesict A 46 A Variable Tables A 1 Variables that are Automatically Assigned by System A Variable Tables
64. Controller RAM are saved to flash memory when the Machine Controller is disconnected CPU Control Check before Write into Controller This function is valid when Individual is selected in the Transfer Program Write into Controller Dialog Box Refer to 7 11 2 Writing to Machine Controllers When Yes is selected a message is displayed for confirmation before data is transferred to the Machine Controller Message of Transfer Result Display when Transfer Compare Ends When Yes is selected a message is displayed for confirmation when a data transfer or comparison is completed Processing After Transfer Processing of Invalid High Low Main Program When Disable is selected the main program high speed or low speed in the Machine Controller RAM is invalid when an error occurs during a batch data transfer to the Machine Controller and the program is not executed even when the CPU is changed to RUN mode Transferring C language programs Locate again and transfer A support contract with Yaskawa is required to use this function 1 51 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 8 15 Transfer MPLoader 1 8 15 Transfer MPLoader Detailed settings can be made for data transfers with the Machine Controller As with MPE720 version 5 you can make detailed settings for data transfer to the Machine Controller using MPLoader By setting the items described below programs can be in the same MAL file format o
65. Controller as described below 1 Any of the following operations can be used e Select Online Connection from the Main Menu e Click Connection under Project in the Start Window The connection to the Machine Controller will be started When the connection has been made the Machine Controller name and a ladder program tree will be displayed in the Ladder Subwindow 1 9 Connecting to and Disconnecting from Machine Controllers When Disconnection is displayed by selecting Online from the Main Menu the connection with the Machine Controller has been completed B MPE720 Ver 6 DATA MP2300 Start SEE ot File Edit view Online Compile Debug Window Help X HL Far IL m E je gt i gt aA A F las r LJ B TT mo eee aes ve oo AD e j Co gt Ex Online MP2300 J Documents and Settings MPE Desktop ENG DATA YMW 1 Serial COM1 Uniti CPU RUN gt Programming Monitor Transfer Utility Scantime setting Module configuration ader 5 e Lar narucio Progam A Pi i DATA MP2300 E GS Ladder program High speed New Communications Setting Low speed B Start Interrupt Disconnection Function 4 gz x Connection 1 Serial COM1 Uniti History DATA YMW FbaLedir Instruction variabie EEl Ladder E Motion fj Ladder Instruction 3 Variable Transfer gt ax Register List 1 F Jwatch 1 AX cross Reference 1 OForce Coil List _CAP NUM SCRL Th
66. Display Property Dialog Box will be displayed by clicking the Ladder Program Properties Button Ladder Display Property fx Column Display f Ladder program Poo Se High speed i H Main Program C Privilege E Hoi Modified H01 01 Hz rl ons od All of the check boxes are not selected by default For details on the Disable setting refer to 3 4 3 4 Enabling or Disabling Ladder Programs For details on the No of Steps and Modified settings refer to 3 4 3 5 Ladder Program Properties For details on the Privilege setting refer to 3 2 1 Creating New Ladder Programs If information that is to be displayed in the Ladder Subwindow is selected 1 e if the check box is selected and the OK Button is clicked that information will be displayed in the Ladder Subwindow 3 Disable No of Steps Privilege Modified f Ladder program fa High speed H Main Program 25 RJO W 1 2005 11 15 16 07 38 E Ho 1 R O W 1 2005 11 10 10 10 18 HO1 01 5 RJO w 1 2005 11 15 16 16 18 H01 02 v 1 RJO W 1 2005 11 10 10 09 50 H02 22 RJo w 1 2005 11 11 15 56 02 HO2 01 1 RJO W 1 2005 11 10 10 10 08 N Ho02 02 v 1 R O W 1 2005 11 10 16 18 54 N Hos 7 1 RJo w 1 2005 11 10 10 10 00 HO4 a 1 RJO W 1 2005 11 10 16 18 56 N Hos 7 1 R Jo w 1 2005 11 15 16 16 32 fp Low speed L Main Program v 1 RJO W 1 2005 11 15 16 16 28 Ey Start
67. E Se Internal variable T E are assigned that can be Fiz Bit E 10 Variable g Laca variae set by the Word E Global Variable automatically Subaind user Local Long an by system upaindow i H Float ial Wor variables Address Sh lee Variables that E Float A Address can be set by E Constant Yariable the user fo User structure Local Variable Tab Ladder Instruction Variable The display for each variable in the folders in the variable tree provides the following information lt Example gt Always ON On coil SBO00004 t t t Comment Variable name Register address When a variable is entered for an instruction object the variable name and comment are displayed as follows After High Scan Star Comment t Only 1 Scan OH aai uni nning Register address SBO000004 Register addresses are displayed when the address indicator icon on the ladder editor toolbar is ON Refer to 3 3 4 2 Displaying or Hiding Addresses Variables and Comments for details on selecting the display for addresses variables and comments The variables are described in more detail on the following pages 5 3 5 4 Chapter 5 Variables 5 2 1 System Variables S Registers 5 2 Variables that Are Automatically Assigned by System Among the variables displayed in the Variable Subwindow the following three types cannot be assigned by the user e System variables e Axis variables e I O variables The user ca
68. Ee A Er IRA GF tt e MB H01 LADDER ABC MP2300 Offline Local Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 2 3 Opening Ladder Programs 3 2 3 Opening Ladder Programs A ladder program can be opened by executing any of the following operations with the project file open e In the Ladder Subwindow double click the program to be opened e In the Ladder Subwindow right click the program to be opened and then select Open from the pop up menu that will be displayed The only programs that can be opened however are programs for which the reading privilege level is no higher than the current user privilege level A selected program cannot be opened if the reading privilege level is higher than the user privilege level For details on user reading and writing privilege levels refer to WUser Privilege Levels and Reading Writing Privilege Levels If an attempt is made to open a ladder program for which a password 1s set 1 e a ladder program indicated by a lock at the icon the Program Password Dialog Box will be displayed Program uo Program Password BAR ABS MP2300 fae Ladder program Main Program al HO1 Program Password Holz ee The password is set in the specified program Ik is necessary to H 4 input the password to open the program The character which can be used For the program password is Ho6 only a normal width alphanumeric character Ei Low speed Ey Start Ey Interrupt When
69. Engineering Builder Ad Over Write OK 7 Saving the Motion Program with a New Name Select File Save As The MP File List Dialog Box will be displayed Select the Group Check Box to select a group folder MP File List i Summa Detail File Hame Almam Display Classified By Group Group Tea el Cancel Enter the file name and then click the OK Button The following confirmation message will be displayed when a file name has been entered with the same name as a file already saved and the OK Button has been clicked Click the Yes Button to perform an overwrite operation and save the file Chapter 4 Motion Programming 4 3 2 Editing Motion Program Files 4 3 2 Editing Motion Program Files While the Machine Controller is disconnected 1 e while offline motion programs can be cut copied pasted deleted or renamed in the Motion Subwindow When the Save As command is used in the Engineering Manager the operation may not be reflected in the Motion Subwindow display Before performing operations be sure to update the Motion Subwindow information by selecting Display Update from the Main Menu or by right clicking in the Motion Subwindow and selecting Update 1 Inthe Motion Subwindow select the motion program that is to be edited and then select Edit Cut or Copy Paste or Delete from the Main Menu Alternatively right click and then select Cut Copy Paste or Delete from the pop up menu
70. Fig 6 2 Display Example of Offline Current Value 6 9 Chapter 6 Monitoring 6 2 5 System Monitor 6 2 5 System Monitor The system monitor function is valid while connected to a Machine Controller while online Machine Controller status LED indicators CPU status scan time values can be monitored in the System Monitor Subwindow The CPU can be toggled between STOP and RUN the memory cleared and errors reset The System Monitor Subwindow is automatically displayed as a pop up when an error is detected 1 Using the System Monitor Subwindow 1 Select Monitor System Monitor from the Launcher The System Monitor Subwindow title bar will be displayed 2 Move the mouse pointer to the title bar to display the System Monitor Subwindow System Monitor Normal Operating ax 1 The controller is operation normally Run Status RYO O run ALM er eat Scan time j Setting Current Max E Setting High 10 0ms 5 9ms 6 0 ms Low 200 0ms 1 9ms 2 7 ms Clear The default setting is Automatically Hide Mode Click the Automatically Hide Button in the title bar to convert to a floating window that will not be hidden RUN Status Display This display shows the status of the LED indicators for the Machine Controller Green Normal ee Machine Controller operating status ON Normal Red Error OFF Error SB000401 ON Operating OFF Stopped SB000402 ALM Alarm status Kod hens ON Alarm st EE OF
71. GeneralPurposeAI General purpose AI All IWxx59 AI2 IWxx5A GeneralPurposeAO AOI OWxxlA AO2 OWxx1B General purpose AI monitor 1 General purpose AI monitor 2 General purpose AO General purpose AOI General purpose AO2 A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details GeneralPurposeDIMonitor General purpose DI monitor DI 0 General purpose DI 0 DI 1 General purpose DI 1 DI 2 General purpose DI 2 DI 3 General purpose DI 3 DI 4 General purpose DI 4 DI 5 General purpose DI 5 PGDisconnectedStatus IBxx587 PG wire breaking down status GeneralPurposeDO OWxx5D General purpose DO OWx5D General purpose DO 0 DO 1 General purpose DO 1 DO 2 General purpose DO 2 DO 3 General purpose DO 3 DO 4 General purpose DO 4 A 23 A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details O z O Q c D lt Q Q ex D 5 Variable Comments ServoOn Servo ON MLOCK Machine lock AlarmClear Alarm clear Ready Motion controller operation ready Running Running MLKL Machine lock ON MLKL UnitsSelection Function 1 MotionCommand e Motion command CommandCode OWxx08 Motion command ResponseCode Motion command response code ResponseAlarmCode Motion command response alarm code InverterAlarmCode Inverter alarm code Control Motion command control flag Pause Command pause Abort Command abort Direction JOG STEP direction Status Motion command status Busy Motion command executing BUSY flag Hold Motion command hold completed HOLD
72. Line 1 Click to select the rung comment line and either select Program Edit Rung Comment from the Main Menu or press the F2 Key Alternatively right click the rung comment line and select Edit Rung Comment from the pop up menu that will be displayed The mode will be changed to the Rung Comment Edit Mode If any text has already been entered it will be selected 2 Edit the text e Characters can be entered e Main Toolbar icons short cut keys and the rung comment pop up menu can be used for Cut Copy Paste Undo and Redo operations e Use the Ctrl Enter Keys to start a new line 3 Press the Enter Key to exit the edited rung comment and also press the Esc Key to cancel the editing operation 3 22 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs 3 3 7 Inserting and Editing New Rungs Click to select the rung number block for the new rung that is to be ete inserted or edited Chl Chrlt Delete Delete rung editing operations listed Right click the rung number block to display a pop up menu with the Insert Rung need If multiple rungs are selected only Cut Copy and Delete will be Add Rungs valid in the pop up menu Insert Rung Comment Shift Insert Rung Number Block Pop up Menu 1 Inserting Adding New Rungs 1 Click to select the rung number block at the insertion position 2 Any of the following operations can be used e Select Program Insert Rung or Add Rungs from the Main Menu e Right click
73. M Variable Registration Register MBooooo4 SETURL etme fe PI W PI Control finteger ty comment PEF PD Control real number PID Ws PID Control integer ty PID_F PID Control real numbe LAG Wi First Order LAG integ LOG _F First Order LAG freal ri LLAS Wo Phase LEQD LAG finte LL4G_F Phase LEAD LAS freal LAU We Linear Accelerator 1 ir LOU F Linear Accelerator 1 fre SLALU W Linear Accelerator 2 i SLALU F Linear Accelerator 2 it PWM Pulse Width Modulation M56 SND_IN Send Message Ir M56 SND PARAM Send Messe M56 SND OUT Send Message MSG _RCV_IN Receive Messagi MSG RCV_PARAM Receive Me MSG RCY_OUT Receive Messe TELER Block Read TBLBW Block Write TBLSRL Row Search TBLSRC Column Search TELEL Block Clear TBLMY Block Move OTBLR Queue Table Read OTBLRI Queue Table Read pc Queue Table Write k The variables included in that system structure will be displayed in a list For details on the variables in each system structure refer to 5 3 1 c Editing I O Module Names and Com ments 2 Enter the variable name in the Variable Name Field and comment in the Comment Field specify the address type MA in the Register Field and click the OK Button Variable Registration Variable Mame Lau System Structure User Structure Register MBOOOO01 w Structure Mame PTW PI Control in
74. ML 00000 to 65533 MF 00000 to 65533 When the OK Button is clicked and there is an input error in the Register Field the Register Field will return to the state it was in before the input Register addresses that are already being used cannot be entered Click the Structure Button A list of data structures will be displayed By giving a variable name folder name to the structure the variables that are included in that structure can be assigned together Variable Registration Variable Mame Register comment Ce Ce For details on structures refer to 5 3 1 1 b Creating System Structures on the next page 5 3 Variables that Can Be Set by the User 3 Enter the variable name in the Variable Name Field and comment in the Comment Field and click the OK Button _ Variable Registration m Variable Mame pated Register MM OO000 Comment Relay 1 0 Structure gt gt Lox Inthe Variable Name Field enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters starting with a letter of the alphabet An error will occur if the leading character in the name is a number An error will occur if a name identical to a register such as MB mb0 or IW00000 iw00000 is used at the beginning of the variable A variable name that is already assigned cannot be used again Reserved words such as motion instructions cannot be used For a list of reserved words refer to Appendix B Reserved Words The same a
75. Machine Controller RAM and the open RAM project file Project file Before connecting a MPE720 version 6 to a Machine Controller the settings for the communication processing refer to 1 3 5 Communication Process Settings and the settings for communications must be completed The following sec tion describes how to make the settings for communications 1 55 1 56 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 9 1 Connecting to Machine Controllers 1 Communications Settings Configure the communications settings for the Machine Controller 1 Select Online Communications Setting from the Main Menu Alternatively click Communications Setting under Controller or Project in the Start Window The Communications Setting Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Select the logical port number to be used for connecting to the Machine Controller and click the Setting Button For details on the logical port numbers that are set refer to 1 3 5 Communication Process Settings N Communications Setting x Set the communication setting Logical port No SEA v Setting The communications settings will be completed and the dialog box will be closed e The Connection Button and the Setting Button are invalid while connected to the Machine Controller and communications cannot be set 2 Project Link Connection a Connecting from MPE720 Version 6 with an Open Project File Connect to the Machine
76. Main Window 2 Inthe Local Variable Subwindow right click the variable to be edited or deleted and select Edit or Delete from the pop up menu that will be displayed Edit The Edit Variable Dialog Box will be displayed The same procedure can be used for editing as is used for assignment Delete A dialog box asking for confirmation will be displayed Click the Yes Button to delete the variable Variables can also be edited by double clicking in the Local Variable Subwindow Variables can also be deleted by selecting a variable in the Local Variable Subwindow and then pressing the Delete Key 9 25 9 26 Chapter 5 Variables 5 4 1 Using Variables 5 4 Using Variables and Comments 5 4 1 Using Variables Variables can be entered for use in instruction objects and subwindows Variables can be used in the following opera tions For details on entering variables refer to the following items Entering ladder objects gt 3 3 12 Entering and Changing Variables and Register Addresses Entering in the Search Dialog Box gt 3 5 2 1 Searching Entering in the Replace Dialog Box gt 3 5 2 2 Replacing Entering in the Search in Project Dialog Box gt 3 5 3 Searching and Replacing within Projects 1 Searching in Projects Entering in the Replace in Project Dialog Box gt 3 5 3 Searching and Replacing within Projects 2 Replacing in Projects Entering in the Cross reference Subwindow gt 3 5
77. No Differences Found Differences Found After the comparison is complete the data comparison log and results can be confirmed in the Transfer Sub window 1 81 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 11 12 Comparing Project Files 1 11 12 Comparing Project Files This function compares the data in an open project file with the data in another project file and outputs the results to the Transfer Subwindow The function is valid only when not connected to the Machine Controller 1 e when offline The procedures 1s as follows 1 Select Online Transfer from the main menu and click the Compare with Project File Button in the Transfer Dialog Box The Open Project Dialog Box will appear 2 Select the project file to be compared and click the Open Button Open Project Look in C3 ProjectFile Data v a gt file Eng old My Recent TOO Mw Documents Gila 2300 vw 25 Mp2 100 MW 3 Mp2 100M Yea PEJ mp2200 Yow PEJ Mp2300 MW 23 TESTOOS yaw Sl test vw Files of type Project File 5M w Cancel hy Network Help The Compare Program Compare with Project File Dialog Box will appear 3 Select Batch or Individual and then click the Start Button Compare Program Compare with Project File Destination of comapre project File MP2100 MP2500 222 YM 070 The Following Files are compared Ladder Program High speed Low speed Start Interrupt Function Mot
78. OBxx0F4 OBxx0F5 OBxx0F6 OBxx0F7 OBxx0F9 OBxx0FA OBxx0FB OBxx0FC IWxx0F IBxx0F0 IBxx0F1 IBxx0F2 IBxx0F3 IBxx0F4 IBxx0F5 IBxx0F6 IBxx0F7 IBxx0F9 IBxx0FA IBxx0FB IBxx0FC OWxx10 OBxx100 OBxx101 OBxx102 OBxx103 OBxx104 OBxx105 OBxx106 OBxx107 OBxx108 OBxx109 OBxx10A OBxx10B OBxx10C OBxx10D OBxx10E OBxx10F A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details Comments Auxiliary input data option selection Motor speed Torque reference U1 09 Encoder counter Frequency reference U1 01 Multi function analog input A2 Main bus voltage Alarm code Warning code Multi function analog input A3 Multi function input terminal Multi function analog input A1 Encoder counter CH2 Auxiliary input data option selection monitor Motor speed Torque reference U1 09 Encoder counter Frequency reference U1 01 Multi function analog input A2 Main bus voltage Alarm code Warning code Multi function analog input A3 Multi function input terminal Multi function analog input A1 Encoder counter CH2 Input command Forward RUN Reverse RUN Multi function input command S3 Multi function input command S4 Multi function input command S5 Multi function input command S6 Multi function input command S7 Multi function input command S8 External fault input EFO Fault reset Multi function input command S9 Multi function input command S10 Multi function input command S11 Multi function input command 12 Fault trace dlear command External
79. Phase lag time constant Input value storage RLY IRST xBxxx000 LLAG reset Phase LEAD LAG real number T2 ype T LAG _F First Order LAG real number type LLAG _W Phase LEAD LAG integer type x a lt al g lt ree V Linear Accelerator 1 integer type Quick stop time Vann PCumentspeed A Variable Tables A 4 System Structures cont d cae nine Seki ope DVDT operation non execution wooo i wo oo oe A LV 7 BT Linear Accelerator 2 integer type QT Quick stop time AT BBT V DVDT1 Current acceleration deceleration 1 RESERVE1 Reserve ABMD Speed increase upon holding REMI E Previous speed instruction A 41 A 42 A Variable Tables A 4 System Structures cont d SLAU_F Linear Accelerator 2 real number type PWM Pulse Width Modulation MSG_SND_IN Send Message Input RY Ws RTO Reston tine BET xFbwwxi2 Sue deseleatonine A Variable Tables A 4 System Structures cont d Send Message Parameter MSG _SND_ OUT COMPLETE xBxxx001 The sending of the message has been com Send Message Output pleted Revolve Massage Parameter Receive Massage Output A 43 A 44 A Variable Tables A 4 System Structures cont d ROW 1 Beginning row number COL1 Beginning column number TBLBR Block Read RLEN Number of row elements CLEN Number of column elements ROW 1 Beginning row number l COL1 Beginning column number TBLBW Block Write
80. Program Compare with Project File Dialog Box will appear 3 Click either the Batch or Individual Button and then click the Start Button Compare Program Compare with Project File Destination of comapre project file MP2300 f test2 YMW The Following Files are compared System Configuration System Definition Scan Time Definition Program Module Configuration When selecting the Batch or Individual Button the types of data to be compared System Configuration Pro gram Register and Comment can be selected 1 85 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 11 14 Detailed Comparison of Programs and Registers When selecting the Individual Button the particular data to be compared can also be designated For details on the data of the System Configuration Program Register and Comment that is transferred refer to 1 11 1 Overview of Data Transfers After clicking Start the data will begin comparison When the comparison is complete the following message will appear Click OK to end the comparison opera tion MPE720 Ver 6 MPE720 Ver 6 Jl Compare with Project File ended normally Compare with Project File were difference Please confirm the content displayed in the output window No difference Found Differences Found After the comparison is complete the data comparison log and results can be confirmed in the Transfer Sub window 1 Jump Function from
81. Program Instructions FUNC SEE MSEE 10 9 10 2 Printing Other Programs 10 11 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 11 1 11 1 Troubleshooting and Pop up Displays 11 2 11 2 Error Codes 11 4 Appendices A Variable Tables A 2 A 1 Variables that are Automatically Assigned by System A 2 A 2 Axis Variable Details A 5 A 3 I O Variables A 27 A 4 System Structures A 38 B Reserved Words A 46 INDEX Revision History Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE 20 Version 6 This chapter provides an overview of MPE720 version 6 and describes basic MPE720 operations 1 1 What Ils MPE720 Version 6 1 3 1 2 Basic Engineering Procedure Using MPE 20 Version 6 1 3 1 3 Installing and Uninstalling MPE720 Version 6 1 4 1 3 1 MPE720 Version 6 System Requirements 1 4 1 3 2 Compatibility with MPE720 Version5 1 4 1 3 3 Installing MPE720 Version 6
82. RLEN Number of row elements CLEN Number of column elements ROW ROW COLUMN Table element column number FIND COLUMN 1 Head column number TBLSRC Column Search FIND COLUMN Head column number RLEN Number of row elements CLEN Number of column elements ROW COLUMNT1 Head column number RLEN Number of row elements Number of row elements QTBLR Queue Table Read QTBLR Serre E E EE QTBLW Queue Table Write TBLSRL Row Search TBLCL Block Clear TBLMV Block Move A Variable Tables A 4 System Structures cont d aTBLW Seer evel enn Status SingleBlockPause Motion program control signals Morr eal Mote Program Control Skip 1 xBxxx018 Skip1 information Control Skip2 xBxxx019 Skip2 information ee E MLINK_SVW HSE ORAS Siecle A 45 A 46 B Reserved Words A 4 System Structures B Reserved Words The following words cannot be used for variable names regardless of case ABS ACC ACCMODE ACOS ACS ARCTAN ASIN ASN ATAN ATN AUTO BCD BIN BLK BREAK CASE CHAR CLR CONST CONTINUE COS DCC DEFAULT DO DOUBLE ELSE END ENUM EOX EXM EXP EXTERN FALSE FEND FLOAT FMX FOR GOTO IAC IDC IEND IF IFP INC INP INT IOW JOINTO KCC KCW LCC LCW LOG LOG10 LONG MCC MCW MOD MOV MSEE MUFC MVM MVS MVT NON OFF ON PFN PFORK PJOINT PLD PLN PON POS REGISTER RET RETURN R SCC SFL SFORK SFR SHORT SIGNED SIN SIZEOF SJOINT SKP SNGD SNGE SPH SPL SQRT SQ
83. Specifies the name of the condition set that is set in the dialog A maximum of 32 characters box The user can name the scope event can be used on High speed scan Sampling Specifies the data sampling condition Samples will be taken in Low Speed scai line with the selected program Specification by program Sampling Interval Specifies the data sampling interval 0 to 32 767 When set to 0 tracing is executed each time i Specifies the time in ms The value set here is used for the time Scope Interval of i a oe 0 1 to 999 9 Program This setting is valid only when the sampling condition is for specification by program Specifies the number of data traces No specification Scope No of Times When Auto is selected data tracing continues until the stop trig Max data 100 1000 ger condition is met or until the Stop Button is clicked 1 to 999 999 Specifies the register number logical operator and number to serve as the trigger for initiating the trace operation If nothing is specified tracing will start at the same time as sam pling starts Register number Initiate Trigger Condition gt lt lt gt gt lt Number Specifies the register number logical operator and number to Terminate Trigger a i Condtons tnd serve as the trigger for terminating the trace operation One or Register number two terminate triggers can be set gt lt lt gt gt lt If nothing is specified tracing will b
84. The edit mark 43 will be displayed For details on objects of edit marks refer to 1 Cutting Copying and Pasting Branches Drag the edit mark to display the input guide at the destination position and release the mouse button Rungs with other ladder programs displayed in the Ladder Subwindow can also be used 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs 3 Changing Branch Positions 1 Select the branch position to be changed The edit mark 4 will be displayed For details on applica ble objects of edit marks refer to 7 Cutting Copying and Pasting Branches 2 Click the Branch Edit Mode Icon T5 in the Ladder Editor Toolbar Alternatively select Program Branch Edit Mode from the Main Menu The cursor will be changed for editing branches 3 Move the cursor to display the Up or Down Arrow at either the input or output side of the branch whichever side is to be changed and click the edit mark Running Daoooo 10 DBOOOdd 4 Sewon Deaoooood ggg ML 4 TWLF Sro amp F TWLF SrcB F The branch point will then move with the cursor 4 Move the cursor to display the replacement position V Running DaOoooo 10 DBOOOdd 4 Semon i a WLF Sro amp F WLF Srce F DeOoooooo ggg ML 4 5 Click the V to change the branch point Running Daoooo 10 DBOOOOd 4 SenoOn Deaoooood ggg ML 4 p MWLF ErmA F MWLF ErBb F The change of branch positions can be cancell
85. Values are displayed in 2 red bold characters as shown below Alarm Message Engineering Builder The current value does not match the setting value There is a possibility to adjust the parameter of the SERYOPACK as SigmaWin or a digital operator There is a possibility to malfunction when the SERVOPACK has adjusted because the setting value is written in the SERVOPACK when you Save Please reflect the current value in the setting value according to the following procedure when the SERYOPACK has adjusted procedure 1 Edit menu 2 Select the Servopack current value gt Setting value SERVOPACK Parameter Setting Window 3 Engineering Manager SVB Definition MP2300 Online Local DER File Edit View Window x Ce Ree Cor Eh Gat EE A eS Input Data Current Value PT 1 CPU 1 RACK 01 Slot 00 CIR 01 8000 87FF EL 8 RVOPACK SGDS 1 Version Servo Type Ej 1881 H 5851 H Fixed Parameters Setup Parameters SERVOPACK Monitor ABA H ABBE H 0456 Sweep Torque Force Reference Amplitude 15 15 1 J 3 3 Et 1 J 3 3 0501_ Zero Clamp Level 10 min 1 10 40 0 Hz 40 0 Zero Speed Level 20 min 1 20 Speed Coincidence Signal Output Width 10 min 1 10 0506 Brake Reference Servo OFF Delay Time 0 10 ms 0 Brake output speed level 100 min 1 100 0508 0503 Unmatched Parameters Displayed in Red Timing for brake reference during motor operati
86. Variable Displays the variable name that is to be found Selects one of the following as the find object Maximum value Minimum value Local maximum value Local minimum value and Time axis When time axis is selected the dialog box will appear as shown below Target variable M 1 MWOOO01 Find Target E Minimum Pi Find Target Local maximum value Local minimum value ms Time axis T Display Example When Time Axis is Selected Find Area Gall Scope Data Selects either All Scope Data or Between A and B as the find area Find Area Between A and B cannot be selected when cursors A and B are O Between and B hidden Find From Top Find from Top Searches from the top of the find area Zind to Backward Feto Searches backward from the present position Backward Find to Forward D Searches forward from the present position Forward Close Closes the Find Dialog Box o iea Sets the search time in units of ms ime Settin a ms j Displayed only when time axis is set as the find target oa Jumps to the data for the set time proximity o To a l Displayed only when time axis is set as the find target 7 25 1 26 Chapter 7 Data Tracing 7 6 11 Calculate Dialog Box 7 6 11 Calculate Dialog Box With a Monitor Variable selected in the list click the Calculate Button The Calculate Dialog Box will be displayed and the area average and absolute average calculation results for the selected variable can
87. Write the ladder program into the Machine Controller and save Start MPE720 version 5 and read the data of the ladder program from the Machine Controller 3 11 3 12 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 3 1 Ladder Program Edit Window 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs This section describes the operations in the Ladder Program Edit Window 3 3 1 Ladder Program Edit Window The overview and the components of the Ladder Program Edit Window are shown in the following illustration and described below Start H Main Program gt xX H Main Program 1 Program comment OG DRIVE AT 1ST AXIS 0 5s Sampling Relay bB000010 DBo00011 HighScan HalfSecond VAR_VIA 2 Rung comment aiqepes e 0000 l NL 1 DB000010 DB000011 3 Rung m 4 Branch Integration reset VAR_VIA DB000050 LAU_F IRST MBooo000 0006 ay nes E 5 Input guide VAR_VIA DB000051 MBoo0004 J CY mait NL 1 VAR_VIA Relay VO poos 2 H C STORE 2 0013 DATA l NL giii ee 6 Instruction object N poa di C ee END instruction i S Raine uniber a block 1 Program Comments A comment about the program The program name is displayed as the program comment when the program is created For details on editing program comments refer to 3 3 5 Editing Program Comments 2 Rung Comments A comment about the next rung or rung block Multiple rung comments can be set for a single rung For details on creating and editing rung comments refer to
88. a Machine Controller with option SVB modules versions earlier than 1 13 the following error message will appear if an attempt is made to import files Example When connected to Machine Controller with SVB built in CPU Engineering Builder The import cannot be done In the import at online the controller version should be Yer2 35 or more Please operation according to the Following procedure to do the parameter data to this controller importing Procedure 1 Switches to off line and the import does the parameter data Procedure 2 The parameter data which does the import is transferred to the controller Procedure 3 The transferring SERVOPACK parameter is saved from the SERVOPACK parameter display and writes in the SERVOPACK The following sections describe how to import CSV files individually or in a batch a Batch Import 1 Select File Import on the main menu Then in the Import box click the Batch Import button The Batch import Dialog Box will appear 2 11 Chapter 2 Configuration 2 2 5 Exporting Importing Motion Parameters 2 Setthe required items Batch import port path of Documents and Settings Ownernshy Documents MPE 720 SWB cincuitHo j specified i fle name no select dy OS g is E FixPrm 0101 cev E SetPrm_O101 csv W SPm 0101 cew Ej asis E FixPr_0102 cev E SetPrm_0102 cew E SrvPrm_0102 cay Ej axis E FixPrrn_O0103 cev E SetPrm_0103 cev SPm 0103 cay cose The settin
89. and Unit Conversion xN are not displayed by default If they do not appear in the List Area when they are displayed from the Main Menu then display them by reducing the cell widths 7 6 List Area Operations 7 6 6 X Y Display Page In the X Y Display Page the Monitor Variables used for displaying an X Y graph as the graph can be assigned deleted edited and displayed The List Area appears as shown below when the X Y Display Page is displayed n Monitori RD x Graph _ Fiei L File 2 al cd w aay 1 Normal A NMA Find El catcutate O 1 Fixed display IMTEMWO0001 IM e Swoo001 N Fixed display G M 2 Mi00002 M 5 S W0001 7 Cal none Fixed display NNN M 3iMw00003 M 4 SWO0016 Cal 1 Fixed display B M 4 5w 0001 6 Cal gt M 3 MW 00003 Fixed display E 51 5 0001 7 Cal M 2 ha 0002 6 Fixed display M 6 5W 0000 M1 cM WO0001 The following table shows the items in the X Y Display Page Selects the object to be activated Select Once the object is activated then the object can be adjusted and the cross cursor can be dis played Selects one of the following as the method for display the graph hidden fixed display or playback Display Hidden Data is not displayed on a graph Fixed display Data is displayed on a graph when tracing is executed Playback data is displayed on a graph when playback is executed Color Selects the color for a graph The Select Color
90. as overlapping registers cannot be imported Example Register range specified in the import source CW00000 to CW00099 Register range specified in the import destination CW00098 to CW00197 E Error Generating Information IX Error code 0x40050E47 Overlap of the range of the register of the constant variable CAUSE 1 The overlap to the range of the register of the constant variable which has already been registered SOLUTION 1 Please change the range of the register of import the constant variable or change the range of the register of the constant variable which has already been registered m When the Register Ranges in the Import Source and Destination Overlap and the Same Constant Variables Exist in the Import Destination When the register range of the constant group variable overlaps with that of the import destination and the same constant variables exist in the import destination the following Error Generating Information Dialog box will appear Constant variables as identical to those in the import destination cannot be imported Ifthe register range is not overlapping with that in the import destination the Error Generating Information Dialog box will not appear even if the constant variables are the same as those in the import destination E Error Generating Information AX Error code 0x40050E48 Cannot import because the same constant variable which has already been registered is not corresponding to the r
91. at each project file The password can be used to protect the programs in the project file Ibis valid since the project opens next time 1 Registering and Changing Passwords Select the When the project is opened the password is input option in the Project Password Area and then click the Modified project password Button The Modified the project password Dialog Box will be displayed as shown below Set each item and then click the OK Button Modified the project password Password Project Password The character which can be used by the project password is only numerical value to 0 9 and normal width capital letter alphabet to i 2 Cancel Password Enter a new password using from 1 to 16 alphanumeric characters No distinction is made between upper and lower case Password confirm Enter the same password again for confirmation and then press the OK Button The OK Button is valid when one or more characters of text are entered in the Password Confirm Field 2 Deleting Passwords To clear the password that has been set clear the When the project is opened the password is input option in the Project Password Area 1 44 1 8 Environment Settings 3 Opening a Project File for Which a Password Has Been Set When an attempt is made to open a project file for which a password has been set the Security Dialog Box will be displayed as shown below W Security Project Password Logon Password Us
92. be imported to MPE720 version 6 using the following proce dure 1 Select File Import Global variables and comments from the main menu The Open Dialog Box will appear 2 Select a CSV file to be imported and then click Open Look in 9 CSV file A 4 Bh Book2 csv My Recent S HO1 csv Documents BL Ho2 csv amp HO3 03 cs BL H CS Bh MP2300 csv ALI TEST csv My Documents ys My Computer File name e Files of type Variable comment file cs Cancel D My Network Help The Import Dialog Box will appear 3 All the check boxes of variables and comments in the CSV file specified in step 2 will be selected Clear the check boxes of the items not to be imported and then click Import If you wish to reselect the CSV file to be imported click Browse uE Import Variable comment 3M e Variable i 10 Variable E Global Variable v Bit fiw word v Long E Float vV Address M E Comment I Input Register v Bit fiw Word Long E Float fa Address Output Register Bit fiw Word An lana i K K K lt lt lt lt Import file settings K Documents and Settings Owner Desktop CS File Book1 csv 9 45 Chapter 5 Variables 5 8 1 Exporting Importing Global Variables I O Variables and Comments The following message will appear asking for confirmation MPE 20 Ver 6 Do vou want
93. be overwritten in both the Machine Controller RAM and the selected project file on the computer When the Not connect Button Is Clicked The selected project file will be opened in the MPE720 Ver 6 Window Ifa password has been set for the selected project file the following Security Dialog Box will be displayed W Security Project Password Password Logon Password Password Enter the password that has been set and then click the OK Button For details on project file passwords refer to 1 8 5 Security Project Password 1 34 1 7 Project Files 2 Starting a New MPE720 version 6 Window to Open a Project File The following methods can be used to start a new MPE720 Ver 6 Window and open a project file e Double click the project file icon e Select the project file icon right click and select Open from the pop up menu that will be displayed e Drag and drop the project file Icon into the MPE720 Ver 6 Icon Ifthe contents of Communications Setting are saved in the selected project file the following dialog box will be displayed Refer to 1 9 1 Connecting to Machine Controllers MPE 20 Ver 6 Controller connection information is preserved in the project File wf Do you connect with the controller Connection 1 Serial COM1 Uniti i Connect Nok connect When the Connect Button Is Clicked The port set in the Communications Setting will be used to connect to the Machine Controller set in the
94. be referenced Calculate Target Variable M 2 Execution Scan Current Value 0 1msi SW00014 Calculate Result Find Data All Scope Data _ Calculate Close The following operations can be executed in the Calculate Dialog Box E Target Variable Displays the variable name for which a calculation is to be performed Area ol re Selects one of the following as the calculation type Area Average or area Calculation Type Average Absolute average Absolute average Find Daka Gals ae Selects either All Scope Data or Between A and B as the find area Cope Vala 3 P Find Area Between A and B cannot be selected when cursors A and B Between 4 and B are hidden Executes the calculation The result is displayed in the Result area 7 7 Other Functions 7 1 Other Functions This section describes other functions including saving and deleting trace definition data setting defaults printing and making optional settings 7 1 Saving and Deleting Trace Definition Data and Setting Defaults Operations such as saving and deleting Trace Definitions can be executed from the File Menu Default Setting File gt Returns the Trace Definitions to the All Monitor Variables that have Set to Default F default status been assigned will be deleted Save Settings POEA B Saves the Trace Definitions Save Settings S l File F gt dod Delete Settings Delete setings D eens a 1 1 2 Print Settings
95. be transferred to the Machine Controller and the program cannot be edited of compiled while connected online to the Machine Controller PCI Reset Signal MP2100 2500 Only Select from Enable or Disable whether PCI reset signals of the MP2100 MP2500 are to be valid or invalid D Register Clear when Start Select from Enable or Disable whether or not the D registers are to be cleared when the Machine Controller is started If Disable is selected the contents of the D registers in flash memory will be read to RAM Keep Latest Value Set a number from 1 to 255 to specify the number of previous input values to be stored for both the high speed and low speed scan when an I O error occurs 1 8 Environment Settings 1 8 8 Setup Scan Time Setting The high speed and low speed scan times can be set Select System Scan Time Setting from the tree in the Environment Setting Dialog Box or select Setup Scan Time Setting from the Launcher to bring up that window and then make the settings Refer to 7 8 1 Environment Setting Dialog Box Environment Setting PS System PS Security High speed Scan ES Setup Setting Value me 1 Orns 32 0m System Setting ee ocan Tine Setting Fz Ladder Maxinnurn Value ms PC language Fo Variable Low speed Scan F Monitor Setting Value 100 0 me 0me 300 0m J Transfer Current Value 0 0 mg Ez Print Current Y alue m Maximum Value 0 0 m A 1 The operation of the application which depen
96. bo continue P Import the selected variable comment 4 Click Yes The selected data will start importing and the results will be displayed in the Output Subwin dow Output gt E While reading the data M Data register Comment Long While reading the data M Data register Comment Float While reading the data M D ata register Comment Address While reading the data C Constant register Comment Bit While reading the data C Constant register Comment Word While reading the data C Constant register Comment Long While reading the data C Constant register Comment Float While reading the data C Constant register Comment Address Complete End of import Yariable comment of global End of import Error Caution0 lt An error code OXAxxxxxxx may be displayed in the Output Subwindow as follows M WO0000 aaa M W00001 Member MWO0008 TEST2 While check the data Register While check the data Variable gt While reading the data 1 0 variable While reading the data I Input register Comment Bit While reading the data I Input register Comment Word While reading the data I Input register Comment Long While reading the data I Input register Comment Float Sathile ea andina Ham Ante Ihin painter IT arent Adee nn Select the error code OxAxxxxxxx and then press the F1 Key The Error Generating Information Dialog Box
97. button to convert the current program and all lower level programs to new ladder pro grams Select Click this button to display the Conversion of CP ladder Dialog Box See step 2 for details on setting Cancel Click this button to cancel program conversion 3 59 3 60 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 6 1 Converting CP Ladder Programs as a Batch 2 Click Select The Conversion of CP ladder Dialog Box will appear The check box of the CP ladder program specified in step 1 or the check boxes the CP ladder programs that are displayed under the ladder program specified in step 1 will be selected When a program from the second hierarchical level is specified in step 1 the check box of the programs of first hierarchical level will also be selected After deselecting the check boxes of the CP ladder programs not to be converted in step 3 the check boxes of the project file ladder program folder High speed Low speed Start Interrupt or Function folder to which non selected CP ladder programs belong will be shaded This is because some of CP ladder programs in the file or folder are selected and the rest are not selected m Conversion of CP ladder Program 7E TEST MP2300 EA fe Ladder program Se High speed B lt q First hierarchical level Second hierarchical level Conversion Cancel 3 Clear the check boxes of CP ladder programs not to be converted Ordinary Ladder programs are shaded and canno
98. can be used For the program password is only a normal width alphanumeric character Cancel 2 Enter the current password in the Program Password Field and click the OK Button The OK Button is valid when one or more characters of text are entered in the Program Password Field The lock mark will be removed from icon for the ladder program selected in step 1 and the Program Password Dialog Box will be closed 4 Opening a Ladder Program for which a Password Is Set 1 When an attempt is made to open a ladder program for which a password is set i e a ladder program indicated by a lock at the icon the Program Password Dialog Box is displayed N Program Password Program Password Program Password The password is set in the specified program Ik is necessary ta input the password to open the program The character which can be used For the program password is only a normal width alphanumeric character Cancel 2 Enter the current password in the Program Password Field and click the OK Button The OK Button is valid when one or more characters of text are entered in the Program Password Field The selected ladder program will be opened in the Main Window Y When opening a CP ladder program or motion program the password must be cancelled If a password is required a new password can be created after the operation is completed 1 89 1 90 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version
99. click the cell to enter the input mode The variable name register address can either be directly entered or it can be entered by dragging and dropping from the Variable Subwindow JL pema Fli Find El calculate T Monitor E xv Graph LJ Fie1 miez Decimal BL ormai ig E caute E EEEn Difference M3 4 i Auto 10240 10240 oy swoon Calendar Month Auto 36 SOOO 7 Calendar Hours Auto 3001 mee Auto 1800 System Program Auto Ia ef Ef Ef Ef m Assigning Variables from the Ladder Program Edit Window Right click a variable object in the Ladder Program Edit Window and select Add to Scope from the pop up menu The variable will be assigned as a trace data variable E Deleting Variables from the List 1 In a Monitor Page or X Y Display Page right click the variable to be deleted and select Delete from the pop up menu Alternatively select Edit Delete from the Main Menu The selected variable will be deleted from the list and that row will be left empty E Deleting Variables from the List 2 In the Monitor Page select the variable to be deleted and then select Edit Delete Record from the Main Menu The selected variable row will be deleted l E Inserting an Empty Row In the Monitor Page select the variable above which the row is to be inserted and then select Edit Insert Record from the Main Menu The empty row will be inserted above the selected variable 1 23 1 24
100. clicked the previously set number will be restored Style Use the B J and U Buttons to set the font styles to be displayed in the Edit Window Each of these buttons can be set independently The setting 1s toggled between ON and OFF each time a button is clicked B Bold T Italic U Underline 3 17 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 3 4 Changing Edit Window Displays c Ladder Tab Page Editor Option Color Font Ladder Key Allocation Variable Register Comment Variable Maximum lines No limit Limit 1 5 Single line strings 10 259 Allocate Canker oR Maximum lines 3 C Line wrapping Rung Comment Reduce Maximum lines No limit O Limit 1 5 5 Display Register Allocate Flush left Comment Single line strings 10 255 2 Rung Rung wrapping Maximum lines 3 v Insert rung no Allocate Flush left The following items can be set Program Comment Check Box When the check box is selected program comments are displayed in the Edit Window The maximum number of lines for entering comments can be set When the check box is unchecked program comments are not displayed and the maximum number of lines cannot be set Even when the check box is not cleared the program comment information is retained without being deleted Maximum Number of Lines If a Limit is set click inside the box to display the text cursor and then enter the maximum number of lines from l
101. complete 1 69 1 70 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 11 4 Saving to Flash Memory 1 11 4 Saving to Flash Memory This section describes how to save data in the Machine Controller RAM to the Machine Controller flash memory This function is valid only while connected online to the Machine Controller The procedure is as follows 1 Select Online Transfer from the main menu and click the Save to Flash Button in the Transfer Dialog Box Alternatively select Online Save to Flash from the main menu A third method is to select Transfer Save to Flash from the Launcher The Transfer Program Save to Flash Dialog Box will appear Click the Start Button Transfer Program Save to Flash Writing target controller MP2300 Serial Unit1 070 If the CPU is in RUN status the following message will appear Click either the Yes Button or the CPU STOP Button to start saving the data to flash memory Ifthe Yes Button is clicked the operation will take more time MPE 20 Ver 6 Controller is running D There is a possibility to cause the Following problems when save to Flash during RUN 1 It will take more time while to complete to save to Flash Do you want bo continue save to Flash l Save to Flash ended normally Click the OK Button If the data was saved to flash memory with the CPU in RUN status the operation will be finished If the data was saved to
102. creating ladder programs are called objects 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs 3 3 2 Main Functions Used in Editing Ladder Programs The following toolbars and subwindows can be used when editing ladder programs e Ladder Editor Toolbar e Ladder Instruction Toolbar e Ladder Instruction Subwindow e Variable Subwindow 1 Ladder Editor Toolbar SUG BWR YA ET The Ladder Editor Toolbar is used for editing ladder program objects 2 Ladder Instruction Toolbar d uUsto lt Ss 2 hs The Ladder Instruction Toolbar is used for entering instruction objects into ladder programs Instruction objects can be entered by simply clicking the icons 2 For details on entering instruction objects refer to 3 3 10 Inserting Instruction Objects 3 Ladder Instruction Subwindow The Ladder Instruction Subwindow is used for entering instruction objects into RELAY ladder programs Instructions can be entered by dragging and dropping them in ite edit subwindows Click the Expand Button to enlarge the ladder instruction stored in the Ladder MOVE Instruction Subwindow and click the Contract Button to shrink the instruction For details on entering instruction objects refer to 3 3 10 Inserting Instruction SYSTEM Objects MOTION 4 Variable Subwindow The Variable Subwindow is used for entering comments and variables for instruction objects A variable tree is displayed Variables and comments are expanded to dis
103. csv for fixed parameters of CSV file data xx indicates a line number and yy indicates an axis number f Setup Parameter Displays CSV file names SetPrm_xxyy csv for setting parameters of CSV file data xx indicates a line number and yy indicates an axis number 2 9 Chapter 2 Configuration 2 2 5 Exporting Importing Motion Parameters g SERVOPACK Parameter Displays CSV file names SrvPrm_xxyy csv for SERVOPACK parameters of CSV file data xx indicates a line number and yy indicates an axis number h Export Button Click this button to export the files selected with check marks i Close Button Click this button to close the dialog box Export will not be executed j Specifying the File Name Add an unique character string at the beginning of the motion parameter file name to specify the file name Example Fixed parameter file name when MPE is specified MPE FixPrm_xxyy csv k Check Box Click the box to select the file to be exported 3 Click the export Button Exporting of the selected files will start and the progress indicator will display the percentage of the process that has been completed run status exporting SrvPrm_O103 csv If a duplicate file name exists in the export destination folder the following message will appear Select one of the options shown in the following image and then click OK Export The CS file exists in the target folder Please select from the following
104. cursor with the Local Variable Tab Page to display the Local Variable Subwindow Ladder x B Program Start H Main Program H hdain Program Local Variable After High Sean Star agenes e207 b a l ABC MP2300 t Only 1 Scan ON fee Register ES Ladder program HighScan FirstScanRu Ely Comment List fa High speed DEO0OO10 DE00OO11 nning m E variable ae El H i Main Program i E Vere Internal Variable E Bit fia Word Deoooo1d DBOOOD11 E Long d E Float fis Low speed a Address Start Integration reset Interrupt DEOOOOOO DEOOO0BO LAU F RST H Function _ DBOooooo DBOOOKE 4 rn Ell Ladder Motion 2 Right click the Internal Variable Folder and select Add The Variable Registration Dialog Box will be displayed In the Register Field the lowest address used for each data type among the D registers for which variables can currently be assigned will be displayed 3 Input the register address in the Register Field Click the Structure Button A list of structures will be displayed By giving a variable name folder name to the structure the variables that are included in that structure can be assigned together HP Variable Registration H Variable Name Register DBOOOO00 DBOoOO00 Comment For details on system structures refer to 5 3 1 7 b Creatin
105. flash memory with the CPU stopped the following message will appear MPE720 Ver 6 _ RUN the controller If the Yes Button is clicked the CPU will be restarted RUN and the save operation will be completed If the No Button is clicked the save operation will complete with the CPU stopped 1 11 Transferring Data 1 11 5 Reading from Machine Controllers The procedure differs as described below depending on whether a project file is currently open e When a project file is open Data in the Machine Controller RAM is transferred to the project file that is currently open When offline first connect to the Machine Controller before the transfer e When the connection is made without an open project file After a project file is selected as the transfer destination the data is then transferred from the Machine Controller These methods are described in detail below 1 Offline with an Open Project File 1 Select Online Transfer from the Main Menu and click the Read from Controller Button in the Transfer Dialog Box that will be displayed Alternatively select Online Read from Controller from the Main Menu If the project file does not contain connection information or if the Read from Controller Button is clicked in the Transfer Dialog Box the Communications Setting Dialog Box will be displayed In all other cases the Transfer Program Read from Controller Dialog Box shown in step 3 will be displayed 2 Sel
106. forget it If a password that has been set is forgotten there is no way to undo it and that user will no longer be able to open the project file 1 42 1 8 Environment Settings mM Reading and Writing Privileges Reading and writing privilege levels are established to maintain program security To open a particular program the user must have a privilege level at least as high as the program s reading privilege level Similarly to edit and save a program the user must have a privilege level at least as high as the program s writing privilege level 2 Changing Registration Information In the User Registration Window of the Environment Setting Dialog Box select the user whose information is to be changed and click the Modified Button Set the required items in the User Registration Dialog Box that will be dis played and click the OK Button The user information will be changed gE User Registration User Mame Password User Privilege Reading 1 w Writing Default Privilege Reading O Writing 1 w User Privilege Specified the privilege of the user who adds and deletes Higher privilege than the user privilege logged on cannot be set Default File Privilege Specified the default value of the program File privilege when the user newly makes the program who adds and deletes L ox cae For details on the registration contents refer to Overwriting Project Files on the previous page Ifthe default us
107. i i DATA MP2300 i Ladder program l High speed New Communications Setting 4 i x i Connection 1 Serial COM1 Unit1 ar fy Interrupt Disconnection B Function AAA ww History DATA YMW El Ladder E motion Ladder Instruction 3 Variable Transfer gt ax E output MBi transfer EajReaister List 1 Jwatch 1 X cross Reference 1 4OForce Coil List Ready CAP NUM SCRL Ifthe Not connect Button is clicked the project file will be opened without connecting to the Machine Controller The program displayed when a ladder program is opened after connecting is the program in the Machine Controller RAM If the displayed ladder program is edited and saved compiled the changes will be overwrit ten in both the Machine Controller RAM and the open project file on the computer For details on writing data while connected refer to 1 11 1 Overview of Data Transfers 1 58 1 9 Connecting to and Disconnecting from Machine Controllers 3 Direct Connection Connect to the Machine Controller as described below 1 Any of the following operations can be used e Select Online Connection from the Main Menu e Click Connection under Controller in the Start Window e Select from the connection histories displayed under Controller History in the Start Window The connection to the Machine Controller will be started When the connection has been made the Machine Controller name a
108. in Trl the illustration to the left are shown as active Ctrl 2 Ctrl e Use the Enter Key to start a new line Click the OK Button to complete the comment entering and editing Pop up Menu 2 Editing Comments Directly in the Program Comment Field 1 Click a program comment to select it and then select Program Edit Program Comment from the Main Menu Alternatively right click the program comment and select Edit Program Comment from the pop up menu that will be displayed The mode will be changed to the Program Comment Edit Mode and the entered text will be selected 2 Edit the text e Characters can be entered e Main Toolbar icons short cut keys and pop up menus accessed by right clicking on selected character strings can be used for Cut Copy Paste Undo and Redo operations e Use the Ctrl Enter Keys to start a new line 3 Press the Enter Key to exit the edited program comment 3 21 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 3 6 Inserting and Editing New Rung Comments 3 3 6 Inserting and Editing New Rung Comments 1 Inserting New Rung Comments A comment regarding a selected rung can be inserted before that rung A separate new rung comment can be inserted for a rung that already has a comment inserted 1 Click to select the rung number block for the rung where the rung comment is to be inserted 2 Select Program Insert Rung Comment from the Main Menu Alternatively right click
109. in which the search is to be executed click the icon forced coil search condition setting to display the Forced Coil Condition Setting Dialog Box u Force Coil Condition Setting x Please input the program which search the force coil Search Program Search Program Select the program for which the search for forced status coils is to be executed Type the program name or select the program from the drop down list box Search Click this button to start search for forced status coils in the selected program and to display the forced status coils ina list Cancel Click this button to cancel the search operation 3 The search results will be displayed in the Forced Coil List Subwindow Force Coil List All program Search Result 6 fn t Li B ZL O oF oF me Forcing State Coil Program Variable Comment Execution Step i ON H MB000100 RunSwitch 1 i 5 ON H MB000100 Run Switch 5 I R OFF H MB000100 Run Switch 7 5 ON HO1 MBO00200 Alarm Clear 1 R OFF HO1 MB000200 Alarm Clear 3 Right click in the list field of the Forced Coil List Subwindow and select Check All or Uncheck All from the pop up menu that appears All the check boxes of forced status coils will be selected or cleared at once In the list in the Forced Coil List Subwindow select or double click a row to jump to the corresponing coil in the lad der program Alternatively select a row
110. information on printing CP ladder programs Y With project link connection and direct connection to a Machine Controller the project file will appear on screen However the ladder program saved in the Machine Controller RAM will be printed out Refer to 1 9 1 Connecting to Machine Controllers for details on project link connection and direct connection 10 1 1 Page Setup Use the following procedure to display the Page Setup Dialog Box and make the page settings 1 Open the program to be printed in the main window and display it in the foreground of the window 2 Select File Page Setup from the Main Menu The Page Setup Dialog Box will appear 3 Set each item and then click OK Page Setup Paper Size Source Auto Selection w Orientation Margins millimeters O Landscape Top Bottorn 10 1 Printing Ladder Programs 10 1 2 Print Previews 1 Displaying Print Previews The following procedure can be used to display a print preview 1 Open the ladder program for which the print preview is to be displayed in the main window and display the program in the foreground of the window 2 Select File Print Preview from the Main Menu A print preview for will be displayed for the selected ladder program 2 Print Preview Window Operations 1 Print Button 2 Previous Page and Next Page Buttons 3 One Two Page Button 4 Zoom In and Zoom Out Buttons 5 Close Button KS A H Mai Print f ile A
111. items El Client for Microsoft Networks imi File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks Jl Gos Packet Scheduler Internet Protocol T CPYIP Install Description eS Transmission Contral Protocallnternet Protocal The default The Internet Properties TCP IP Dialog Box will open 1 16 1 3 Installing and Uninstalling MPE720 Version 6 T Select Use the following IP address and then enter 192 169 1 2 for the IP address and 255 255 255 0 for the Subnet mask Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties EEE General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports thie capability Othenvise You need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings ee Obtain an IP address automatically ze the following IF address IF address 192 768 1 2 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Los 3 AG Alternate DNS server fo Y Ceres 8 Click OK to close the dialog box 1 17 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 3 5 Communication Process Settings c CP 218 Communications Port Settings 1 Double click No 2 under Logical PT in the Communication Manager Window to open the Logical Port Setting Dialog Box Communication Manager File View Tool Control Modem Help el P Ec a Serial on F i
112. ladder programs refer to 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs For details on compiling ladder programs refer to 3 3 77 Ladder Program Compiling and Compile Options For details on transferring Machine Controller programs refer to 1 11 Transferring Data 3 3 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 1 2 Overview of Ladder Program Functions 3 1 2 Overview of Ladder Program Functions 1 2 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Ladder Program Types and Priorities The various types of ladder programs are shown below and are executed in order of priority e High speed Scan Processing Programs H Programs Priority 3 These are operation control programs that are executed in each high speed scan e Low speed Scan Processing Programs L Programs Priority 4 These are operation control programs that are executed in each low speed scan e Startup Processing Programs A Programs Priority 1 These programs are executed only once after the power is turned ON to the Machine Controller and perform the initial settings at startup Interrupt Processing Programs I Programs Priority 2 These programs are launched when an interrupt signal is received and are executed only once per interrupt Processing Error Processing Programs X00 Programs X A I H L Priority 2 These programs are started automatically by the system program when a processing error occurs in a program 1 e when an error interrupt signal is received Only one error program can be creat
113. left blank 6 When only variables are set the Comment column will be left blank 5 41 Chapter 5 Variables 5 8 1 Exporting Importing Global Variables I O Variables and Comments The edited CSV file can be imported to the MPE720 version 6 The data in the import destination file will be overwritten with the data in the import source Axis variables can be neither exported nor imported Exporting importing only a specified register range is not possible Right click the corresponding folder in the Variable Subwindow and select Export or Import from the pop up menu to execute export or import An example of importing a CSV file is described below A Register B Comments C Variable D Structure Example The CSV file A is imported to the data B in the Variable Subwindow of the opened project file A Import source Data saved in the CSV file p a y o y o y o A0020 wow O o o y Yo vwooroo Ronse SS B Import destination Data in the Variable Subwindow of the project file o a T e J oo y oo e woo O teste S o O e wooo fmen OOOO O SS a wwo O o SSS Data after A was imported to B Data in the Variable Subwindow of the project file C Pater LW 3 E a E Mwooroo RUN ore Oooo Y Ifthe Comment column for the register of the CSV file that is the import source is blank but a comment exists for the same register at the destination the comment at the destination will be deleted Ifthe V
114. name and product serial number and then click the Next Button to continue YASKAWA MPE 20 Ver 6 InstallShield Wizard Customer Information Please enter your information Please enter your name the name of the company for which you work and the product serial number User Name Company Name Serial Number InstallShield lt Back New gt cancel A window to set the destination folder for the installation will be displayed 1 3 Installing and Uninstalling MPE720 Version 6 4 To install the program in the destination folder that is displayed click the Next Button To install it in a different folder click the Browse Button specify the destination folder and then click the Next Button YASKAWA MPE720 Ver 6 InstallShield Wizard 1x Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup will install files Setup will install YASKAWA MPE 720 Ver 6 in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder Destination Folder cree Files YASKAWA MPE 7205 InstallShield A window to begin the installation will be displayed 5 Click the Install Button YASKAWA MPE720 Ver 6 InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation Click Install to begin the installation If you want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to
115. needs to be saved in a CF card is transferred to the CF card mounted on the Machine Controller MP2200 CPU 02 The transferred data will be written into the Machine Controller as well Use the following procedure to save data in the CF card 1 Select Online Transfer from the main menu and click the Write into CF Card Button in the Transfer Dialog Box The Select Drive Dialog Box will appear 2 Select a drive to be used and then click OK Select Drive The Transfer Program Write into CF Card Dialog Box will appear 3 Click the Start Button Transfer Program Write into CF card Destination of transfer card pass Rs MP_BEUPBACKUP Removable disk 070 Writing to the CF card will begin When the writing is complete the following message will appear Click OK to end the transfer operation MPE 20 Ver 6 P t 5 l write into CF card ended normally After the transfer is complete the data transfer log and results can be confirmed in the Transfer Subwindow 1 77 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 11 9 Reading from CF Card 1 11 9 Reading from CF Card The data can be read from the CF card The operation of this function differs depending on whether a project file 1s open or not e When a project file is open Data will be transferred from the CF card to the open project file When offline a connection is made to the Machine Controller MP2200 CPU 02 be
116. network number must be speci fied by setting the 215AIF 01 Module parameters 1 20 1 4 Starting and Exiting MPE720 Version 6 1 4 Starting and Exiting MPE 20 Version 6 1 4 1 Starting MPE720 Version 6 Use any of the following methods to start MPE720 version 6 1 Starting from a Desktop Icon Double click the icon shown in the illustration that was created on the desktop when MPE720 version 6 was installed MPE720 version 6 will start and the MPE720 Ver 6 Window will be displayed as shown below 2 Starting from the Windows Start Menu Click the Start Button and select All Programs YE_Applications MPE720 Ver 6 WW MPE720 Ver 6 Start Sel At File Edit Yiew Online Compile Debug Window Help on iT tS Ge MP 35 Be HANES m gt SUS wos YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION i Programming Monitor Transfer Utility Scantime setting Module configuration Ladder 7 ax i gt X Ladder Instruction A Controlle E Communications Setting Connection Disconnection History History v El Ladder E motion mM gt jtadder Instruction B variable Transfer gt ax Output Transfer Register List 1 E Wwatch 1 MK cross Reference 1 OForce Coil List Ready CAP NUM SCRL_ MPE720 version 6 will start and the MPE720 Ver 6 Window will appear as shown above For details on the Start Window refer to 1 5 2 Start Window For details on opening project files refer to 1 7 2 Creating New Project Files an
117. programs They are created in the Function Folder in the Ladder Subwindow They are also sometimes called user functions Functions are created by setting the number of input registers output registers or address registers In ladder programs they can be called using FUNC instructions For details on creating functions refer to 3 3 15 Creating Functions For details on entering and defining functions in a ladder program refer to 3 3 16 Calling Functions E Motion Programs A motion program is a program written in a textual language called motion language In addition to main programs it can create sub programs that is called from the main programs For details on motion programs refer to Chapter 4 Motion Programming 3 2 Beginning Ladder Programming 3 2 Beginning Ladder Programming Ladder programs can be edited by displaying the Ladder Program Edit Window in the Main Window Start H Main Program gt X Ladder Instruction ax H Main Program A RELAY Ai Program OG DRIVE AT 1ST AXIS Q MENEN M ABc MP2300 j SeSama Raliy LOGIC Ladder program DB000010 DB000011 HighScan HalfSecond VAR_VIA gt ae CONTROL i High speed T FUNCTION T S amp Sl H Main Program MOVE HO1 DDC ee DB000010 DB000O011 TABLE Loe SYSTEM HO6 7 Low speed MOTION Integration reset E Start VAR_VIA DBOOOO50 LAU_F IRST MiBOOOOOO Interrupt B Fu
118. range will be deleted 5 7 5 8 Chapter 5 Variables 5 2 3 I O Variables I O Registers 1 I O Variable Tables For more information on each of the I O variables refer to 4 3 I O Variables The following example shows a display with 16 point local I O variables FIR fe Register Comment List fe Variable ita System Variable faa Axis Variable i Sar 10 Variable i Local IO 1 digital IC _002 A0000 fie Local 1 1 digital Input IO _IMNEIADODOO E Inputa DI_ooBooo00 E Inputi DI_o1 1B00001 E Inputz DI_o2 1BO0002 E Input3 DI_O3 1B00003 E Input4 DI_o4 1B00004 E Inputs D1_oS re00005 E Input DI_o6 1BO0006 E Input DI_07 I600007 E Inputs D1_os re00008 E Inputs D1_o9 re00009 gt I O Module name Leading input address Input variables E Inputio E Input11 E Inputi2 E Input13 E Input14 E Input15 jel Qutpuro E Outputt lel Qutpuke lel Mutpurs jel Outputs lel Qutpucs lel Qutpuce lel Output lel Outputs jel Output E Outputio E Outputit E Outputi2 E Outputi3 E Outputid E Outputis ff MECHATROLINK MECHATROLINK_1 aco02 E Global Variable fis Constant Variable DI_10 1BOOOOA DI_11 1BOOOOB DI 12 1BOO00C DI_13 1BOOOOD DI_14 1BOOO0E DI_1S IB0000F DO _O0OB00010 DO OWOBO001 1 DO o2 OB00012 DO O
119. request completed ZoneEnable Latch zone enable ZoneLowerLimit Latch zone lower limit setting ZoneUpperLimit Latch zone upper limit setting LCOMP Latch completed LCOMP Coordinate ie Coordinate MachineOffset Zero point offset WorkOffset Work coordinate system offset PresetRequest POSMAX preset PresetTurns Preset data of POSMAX turns POSMAX turn number presetting completed PresetComplete IBxx0C9 TPRSE J T Z A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details AbsEncoder AbsDataRestore AbsDataRestored SetEncoderPositionL SetEncoderPositionH SetPulsePositionL SetPulsePositionH GetEncoderPositionL GetEncoderPositionH GetPulsePositionL GetPulsePositionH Speed TorqueLimit SecondlySpeedCompensation Override Acceleration Deceleration S_CurveTime SpeedMonitor FeedbackSpeed Torque SpeedLimit TorqueMonitor ZeroPointReturn Method ApproachSpeed CreepSpeed Direction Offset OBxx007 IBxx0C8 OLxx5E OLxx60 OLxx62 OLxx64 ILxxS5E ILxx60 ILxx62 ILxx64 OLxx10 OLxx14 OLxx16 OWxx18 OLxx36 OLxx38 OWxx3A ILxx20 ILxx40 OLxx0C OWxx0E ILxx42 OWxx3C OLxx3E OLxx40 OBxx093 OLxx42 ABS encoder Infinite length axis position information LOAD request ABS system infinite length position control infor mation ABSLDE Absolute position at power OFF Lower 2 words Absolute position at power OFF Upper 2 words Modularized position at power OFF Lower 2 w
120. system errors or I O errors If an error occurs in a function and a program element other than the one containing the faulty function refers to that function the program that was called up is opened and the function in which the error occurred is displayed Select REFER from the pop up menu to open the relevant function Start H Main Program ageng e207 ooo WLF SroA MWNOOOOO MLF Eest KiMWooood HL 1 32768 32768 TWLF SreB 00001 1 Illl Execution Scan Curre nt Value 0 1 mz Ww best ScanTime ExecutionCu 0004 HL 4 rentyalue 104 If an error occurs in a function called from a function the program in which the error occurred will not be opened Follow the procedure shown below when the System Monitor Subwindow appears as a pop up display 1 Click the area displayed in red where the following message is displayed An alarm has occurred Troubleshooting is started by clicking here The troubleshooting operation will begin When the location of the error is identified the relevant program will be opened in the Main Window The information on the alarm display will also be changed in the System Monitor Subwindow system Monitor alarm occur yx x Runt Skala poy O run E FUN A stor amO err Reri xO uai ces Scan tne H gt Main Program Ps ari irnileyer uperaliui E Setting Current Max E Settng Hgh lo0o7s Dzmm O rs Lav 200 0 me 0 12 moe O 1 rre E
121. that number of axes will be displayed For the Logical Axis Name double click the cell to display the text cursor Then enter the name and press the Enter Key Inthe Logical Axis Name Field enter up to eight alphanumeric characters starting with a letter of the alphabet Do not use a number for the leading character When the OK Button is clicked the contents that have been set will be displayed under Axis Variable in the Variable Subwindow 2 Axis Variable Set Details Refer to 4 2 Axis Variable Details for details on axis variable sets 5 2 Variables that Are Automatically Assigned by System 5 2 3 VO Variables I O Registers I O variables are automatically assigned by the system for I register and O register addresses and displayed for vari ables of I O points for the I O Modules set in the Module Configuration For information in setting the Module Configuration refer to 2 7 Module Configuration The following table lists the I O register functions and the I O Modules that support them Note that executing any of the following operations will delete the set registers 1 If the LIO Module that is assigned in the Module Configuration is saved by setting to UNDEFINE the I O Y variables that are assigned will be deleted 2 Ifthe register range leading I O register numbers and end input register number that is assigned for the subslot in the Module Configuration Window is changed The I O variables that were out of the
122. the specified folder a message asking for confirmation to overwrite the existing file will appear Save as a new project DADAT A A MM already exists Bo vou wank to replace it Yes The existing file is overwritten with the new project file and the selected name No The project file is not saved and the Save as a new Project Dialog Box will be displayed 1 37 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 7 6 Closing Project Files If the project file to be overwritten is opened by another MPE720 version 6 the following error message will appear and the file cannot be saved MPE 20 Ver 6 A It is not possible to select because the program is opened Please name a different name to the sawed project File name Click OK to return to the Save as a new Project Dialog Box Change the name of the project file or close the project file on the other computer and then save the project file 1 7 6 Closing Project Files To close an edited project file either select File Close Project from the main menu or click Close under Project in the Start Window The project file will be saved and then the display will be disappeared from the subwindow In addition the attached file displayed while the project file is open will be deleted If MPE720 version 6 is closed without first closing a project file the opened project file will be saved and closed If MPE720 version 6 is closed without first compiling an
123. variable formats above Example The format reflecting the settings for the above three items is displayed Data Processing of Copy Drag Store the Variable on the Clipboard When this option is selected variables are stored on the clipboard when copied or dragged from the Variable Subwindow to objects Store the Register on the Clipboard When this option is selected registers are stored on the clipboard when copied or dragged from the Variable Subwindow to objects Differences in the above processing result in display differences e g when copying and pasting variables from the Variable Subwindow to the Watch Subwindow With variables the variable name is pasted and with registers the register number is pasted In addition when copying and pasting to external applications such as memo pads the same differences will occur 1 49 1 50 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 8 13 Monitor System Monitor 1 8 13 Monitor System Monitor This option can be used to set the display method for the System Monitor Subwindow Refer to 6 2 5 System Monitor Select Monitor System Monitor from the tree in the Environment Setting Dialog Box to bring up that window and then make the settings Refer to 7 8 1 Environment Setting Dialog Box Environment Setting Po system Alarm Notification PS Security Automatically notified when the alarm occurs Notify F Setup Automatically notified when the bat
124. variables M I O and C comments are saved in two different files One for BIT type data and one for other data types WORD LONG FLOAT and ADDRESS For local registers D X Y Z and A comments are saved in a file for each program regardless of data type BIT WORD LONG FLOAT and ADDRESS Before transferring data Write into Controller or Read from Controller the data in the reading source and in the saving destination must be matched so that the data in the Machine Controller will not be lost 5 16 5 3 Variables that Can Be Set by the User e Deleting Global Variables Variables can be deleted In a program where a deleted variable is used the variable will be replaced with the register address the next time it is displayed 1 Inthe Variable Subwindow select the variable to be deleted and press the Delete Key Alternatively right click the variable to be deleted and select Delete from the pop up menu that appears A dialog box will be displayed for confirmation that The variable is to be deleted Yes or No 2 Click the Yes Button The selected variable will be deleted from the Variable Subwindow Another dialog box will appear asking whether or not to delete the comment along with the variable This dialog box will appear if a comment is set for the variable Variable Delete the SwitchOn of variable The comment is set in the variable SyitchOn Without deleting the comment which onl
125. will be displayed Alternatively select Program Insert Branch from the Main Menu Another method is to press the Ctrl B Keys A branch with that instruction will be inserted in parallel to the selected instruction object Running Bo00010 DBOOO0d 4 Semon Daoooood D Eyl 0000 ML 4 Only one instruction can be arranged on a branch using this operation Items such as variable names and addresses will not be copied for the instruction arranged in parallel For details on entering comments and registers for the inserted instruction refer to 3 3 73 Editing Comment Fields and 3 3 12 Entering and Changing Variables and Register Addresses For information on the meanings and uses of ladder instructions refer to the Machine Controller MP900 MP2000 Series New Ladder Editor User s Manual SIEZ C887 13 2 4 Arranging Any Instructions in Parallel A branch with any instruction can be inserted in parallel to the selected instruction object 1 Click to select the instruction object at the branch insertion position Running Daoooo 10 DBOOOOd 4 Semon DaOoooood ML 4 If more than one instruction object is selected the last one selected will be taken as the selected object 2 From the Ladder Instruction Toolbar click the object to be arranged on the branch w uUFsto 96 lt S 42 gt h Alternatively right click the selected instruction object and select Add Parallel Instruction Instruction Type Instructio
126. will be started 2 Whenonline select Order Self Configure All Modules from the main menu The data for all electrical devices connected to the Machine Controller will be written to the Machine Controller ro Engineering Manager akt Eie view IER Window Self Configure All Modules 100 Online Local S e PT 1 CPU 1 Controller E Oy Module Type MP2300 28F0M we LID 02 v UNDEFINED ControllerNumber j o ooo o e e CireuitNumber o ooo o e e D PO StatRegister J S a dOEndRegster G a e ef E Disable Output o d o o Motion Stat Aegster S Motion End Register S C ek OOOO e T J Statws Punning Running Rumina When offline Self configuration cannot be executed Make the settings manually for each Module 2 1 Module Configuration 3 Double click Module detail fields as required to display Configuration Data Area and change the settings Module Details MP2300 SLOT O0 Stn 0 a ee ae ModuleType CPU IO SVB SVR ControllerNumber eT CirouitNumber fe Eo o e WO Start Register fT e OEndReaister joom m0 Je DisableInput_ Enable Enable vl Disable Output Enable Enable v Motion Start Register f fe feo fem Motion End Register f ee eF eE D Deas MECHATROLINK O CPU CPU module CPU operation such as y E Local O MP2300 Online Local Sle PT 1 CPU 1 PRACK 01 Slot 00 0000 0001 Eo For Help press F1 No Item DY PEG wod S
127. zi NL 1 eeeeRAH EY Alarm Reset H eee HH R RH axis 1 alarm reset Alarm reset PB Clear serwo alarms MB300001 X Clear Dooa i a 0010 a NL 1 axis 2 alarm reset Alarm reset PB Clear serwo alarms MB300001 Y Clear gt SS 0012 sl NL 1 eeeeHH HHH Speed Unit and Acceleration Deceleration Unit Selection Heeeee Bit to 3 Speed Unit Selection O Reference unit s 1 Reference unit min 2 percentage Bit4 to 7 Acceleration Deceleration Unit Selection O Reference unit sec 2 1 ms Axis 1 Function Settings unit Axis 1 Function Settings 1 wok ae eee 0014 WL StcA X UnitsWord wWLJDest DWO0010 NL 1 WLJSreB HOFOO BITS O 3 Set speedunits O Refis 1 10 nrefimin 2 BITS 4 0015 WLJSreA Dw00010 WLJDest X UnitsWWord NL 1 WL SreB H0011 Axis 2 Function Settings 1 unit Axis 2 Function Settings 1 work 0046 WLIJStcA Y UnitsiWord WL Dest DW00012 NL 4 WL SreB HOFOO BITS 0 3 Set speedunits O0 Ref s 1 10 nrefimin 2 BITS 4 0017 WLJSrcA DWO0012 WL Dest Y Units Word NL 1 WLJSreB H0011 eeeeRAH EY Linear Acceleration Decelerarion Settings PRRRRRRREE Axis 1 2 linear acceleration deceleration setting MPM running linear acceleration MB300020 deceleration settings poio d j EXPRESSION A 0018 X Acceleration 100 NL 1 X Deceleration 100 Y Acceleration 100 Y Deceleration 100 For details on displaying the Ladder Program Edit Window refer to 3 2 Beginning Ladder Programming For details on editing
128. 0 Right 5 50 canci 3 Select an object to be printed and set the page margins and then click Execute The Print Dialog Box will appear When printing is executed from the Print Manager for the first time the Printers Dialog Box will appear Set the printer type and then click OK 4 Set each item and then click OK Printing will start Select File Print cancel from the menu to hold or cancel the printing operation The List Manager will open at the same time as the Print Manager and indicate the progress of printing operation 10 12 2 Executing Printing from Engineering Manager Execute printing from Engineering Manager 1 Select File Print from the Engineering Manager main menu The Print Manager Window will open F Print Manager File Edit Print View Help 2u S 0 User E DWG No PSMPL 962401 Used at a Draw 0 Equipment San Date 2006 08 08 Usage as Program Register Definition Motion Drawing List Drawing Program Function List Function Program Constant T able C REG List Constant Table C REG Table Data Store Target Table Data Definition 2 Select Print Execute print from the main menu The Execute print Dialog Box will appear Execute print Register Definition Motion 5 50 5 50 5 50 5 50 rea 10 2 Printing Other Programs 10 13 Chapter 10 Printing 3 Select an object to be printed and set the page margins the
129. 00 fae Ladder program Ei High speed H Low speed B Start H Interrupt H Function After the project file has been created project file operations can be performed in the Ladder and Motion Subwindows Refer to 1 8 Environment Settings and 1 9 1 1 Communications Settings to make the required settings for the new project file After a project file has been created configure the following settings e Communications settings Refer to 7 9 7 Connecting to Machine Controllers e Module configuration settings Refer to 2 1 Module Configuration e System settings Refer to 7 8 7 Setup System Setting e Scan settings Refer to 7 8 8 Setup Scan Time Setting In addition configure the following settings as needed e User registration settings Refer to 1 8 4 Security User Registration e Default user settings Refer to 5 6 Security Default User Setting 1 33 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 7 3 Opening Project Files 1 7 3 Opening Project Files A project file can be opened using either of the following two methods e Open the project file in an MPE720 Ver 6 Window that is already started e Start anew MPE720 Ver 6 Window to open the project file These two methods are described in detail on the following pages 1 Opening the Project File in an MPE720 Version 6 Window That Is Already Started Execute any of the following operations to open a project fi
130. 08 16 Speed Reference f HO ist 2004 08 16 el roa jriable H10 2004 06 02 Name H01 El ble Foy Start z re Glover variable E Constant Variable Speed Reference 2004 06 02 7 Subwindows Subwindows are windows for supplementing the operations in the main windows Multiple subwindows can be displayed by selecting from the View Menu Refer to 6 Subwindow Operations 1 24 1 5 MPE720 Version 6 Window Operations 1 5 2 Start Window The appearance of the Start Window depends on whether or not a project file is open _ Start a ee oe z Communications Setting Connection Disconnection When a Project File Is Not Opened _ Start Communications Setting Connection Disconnection History MP2300_ MW TEST YHW 1000 YH BOND_12 7HW 2300 7 MW When a Project File Is Opened The following items are displayed in the Start Window Project New Display the Create New Project Dialog Box A new project file can then be created Refer to 7 2 Creating New Project Files Open Display the Open Project Dialog Box A Project File can then be selected and opened Refer to 7 7 3 Opening Project Files Close Automatically save and close the project file Refer to 7 7 6 Closing Project Files History File Name The names of the five project files most recently created or edited using MPE720 version 6 can be displayed in order beginning with the most recent If a file na
131. 12 PRM13 MOVI1 Channel 1 Parameter Set Monitor Selector Channel 1 Parameter Number 0 Channel 1 Parameter Number 1 Channel 1 Parameter Number 2 Channel 1 Parameter Number 3 Channel 1 Positioning Channel 1 JOG Operation Channel 1 Zero Point Return Channel 1 JOG Zero Point Return Direction Channel 1 Output Current OFF Channel 1 Electromagnetic Brake Release Channel 1 General purpose Output Channel 2 Output Coils Channel 2 Alarm Reset Channel 2 Cancel Channel 2 Monitor Selector OutputCoil2 ARST2 CAN2 MONSEL2 PSET2 PRM20 PRM21 PRM22 PRM23 MOV2 Channel 2 Parameter Set Monitor Selector Channel 2 Parameter Number 0 Channel 2 Parameter Number 1 Channel 2 Parameter Number 2 Channel 2 Parameter Number 3 Channel 2 Positioning Channel 2 JOG Operation Channel 2 Zero Point Return Channel 2 JOG Zero Point Return Direction Channel 2 Output Current OFF Channel 2 Electromagnetic Brake Release Channel 2 General purpose Output Output Register Word Output Register Word2 Output Register Word3 Output Register Word4 Output Register Long1 Output Register Long2 A 35 A Variable Tables A 3 1O Variables WE Analog Input Module WE Analog Output Module fReenel M 100 200 VAC 8 point Output Module Variable Comment Owsx00 M 100 VAC 8 point Input Module TWO A 36 A Variable Tables A 3 1O Variables E 24 VDC 16 point Input Module Wand INO1 IBxx000 Input 1 IN16 IBxx00F In
132. 2 Select the Hardware Tab and then click Device Manager Device Manager File Action view Help Hes a Display adapters A DYDICD ROM drives Floppy disk controllers A Flopp disk drives IDE ATAJATAPI controllers e keyboards F Mice and other pointing devices eS e see eseoe Seo e see e seo Jee eee see Monitors Other devices Ethernet Controller Multimedia Audio Controller Other PCI Bridge Device SM Bus Controller Universal Serial Bus USB Controller Ports COM amp LPT ol Processors Sound video and game controllers See Storage volumes a System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers The Device Manager Window will open 1 13 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 3 5 Communication Process Settings 2 a b 3 Click on Ports COM amp LPT to display the tree E Device Manager BHA File Action view Help Hes 2 OKO DELL 4 Computer Se Disk drives a Display adapters 4 DYDICD ROM drives Floppy disk controllers A Floppy disk drives IDE ATASATAPI controllers Keyboards 1 Mice and other pointing devices ey Monitors Other devices ef Ethernet Controller ef Multimedia Audio Controller ef Other PCI Bridge Device ef SM Bus Controller ef Universal Serial Bus USB Controller Spee Forts COM amp LPT fF Communications Port COM1 jf ECP Printer Port LPT1 a Processors m
133. 20 Version 6 1 9 1 3 5 Communication Process Settings 1 11 1 4 Starting and Exiting MPE 20 Version 6 1 21 1 4 1 Starting MPE720 Version 6 1 21 1 4 2 Exiting MPE 720 Version 6 1 23 1 5 MPE720 Version 6 Window Operations 1 24 1 5 1 Names and Descriptions of Window Components 1 24 1 5 2 Start Window 1 25 1 6 Subwindow Operations 1 27 1 6 1 Descriptions of Subwindow Components 1 27 1 6 2 Displaying and Hiding Subwindows 1 28 1 6 3 Updating Subwindow Data 1 29 1 6 4 Types of Subwindow Displays 1 29 1 6 5 Changing the Subwindow Display Type 1 30 1 7 Project Files 1 31 1 7 1 What Is a Project File 1 31 1 7 2 Creating New Project Files 1 32 1 7 3 Opening Project Files 1 34 1 7 4 Opening an M
134. 3 3 6 Inserting and Editing New Rung Comments 3 Rungs A basic line for placing objects such as instructions and branches For details on inserting and editing rungs refer to 3 3 7 Inserting and Editing New Rungs 4 Branches Lines used for arranging instructions in parallel Further branches can also be created from the original branches For details on inserting and editing branches refer to 3 3 8 Inserting Branches and 3 3 9 Editing Branches 5 Input Guide Displays the object entry position 6 Instruction Objects The instruction name comment variable name and register address are displayed for each instruction object Different instruction types are distinguished by color The register address can be displayed or hidden The default is for the register address to be hidden as in the above window For details on displaying or hiding addresses refer to 3 3 4 Changing Edit Window Displays For details on inserting and editing instructions refer to 3 3 10 Inserting Instruction Objects and 3 3 11 Editing Instruction Objects 7 END Instruction Entered when a program is created and indicates the end of the program Cannot be edited 8 Rung Number Blocks Displays Rung information Rung information cannot be edited Line 1 rung number The rung number is displayed Line 2 step number The total number of steps up until that rung is displayed Line 3 nesting number The nesting level is displayed Objects All components used in
135. 4 Enabling or Disabling Ladder Programs A ladder program can be toggled between enabling and disabling A disabled program cannot be executed even if it is transferred to the Machine Controller This operation can be used even for edited ladder programs 1 Select the program or program folder that is to be enabled or disabled in the Ladder Subwindow If a program folder is selected the operation will apply to the main program in that folder 2 Right click the selected program or folder and select Enable Disable from the pop up menu that will be displayed If a folder is selected select Enable Main Program or Disable Main Program A message asking for confirmation will be displayed MPE 20 Ver 6 A H Main Program will be disabled OK 3 Click the Yes Button in the message box Disable or Enable will be set The icon will be displayed for disabled programs Program a l 2300 MP2300 fe Ladder program fe High speed LE H Main Program HO1 2004 08 16 HDZ HOZ E Hi0 2004 06 02 3 43 3 44 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 4 3 Managing Ladder Program Files 5 Ladder Program Properties The properties configuration detail definitions and modified history of ladder programs can be confirmed 1 Select the ladder program file for which the properties are to be displayed in the Ladder Subwindow 2 Right click the selected program and select Property from the pop up menu that will b
136. 4 Cross Reference Searching Entering in the Watch Subwindow gt 6 2 2 Watch Function 5 5 Using Comments 5 5 Using Comments 5 5 1 Saving Comments The comments that were edited on MPE720 version 6 can be saved by selecting File Save from the main menu The comments set for variables can also be saved in the same way The following table shows the destination where the comments can be read and written online or offline for each resister Y When online by project link connection if the registers saved in the project file from which data is to be read are unmatched with those saved in the project file and Machine Controller to which data is to be written the data in the writing destination may be overwritten by the read data and some data may be deleted Connection Status Comments to be Written Into Project Link Project file and Machine Controller Connection Machine Controller Machine Controller Online Each program of a Machine Each program of a Machine Control D X Y Z A Controller ler S Motion I O Fixed by the system Direct Connection Machine Controller Machine Controller Online C Machine Controller Machine Controller D X Y Z A Each program of a Machine Each program ofa Machine Control Controller ler 5 5 2 Linking with CP Ladder Programs As comments on CP ladder programs are linked with those on MPE720 version 6 it is possible to display the CP ladder program comments on MPE720 version
137. 5 3 38 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs 3 3 18 Compiling when Exiting Ladder programs are saved when project files are compiled If any program has not yet been compiled when MPE720 version 6 is exited or if an edited program is closed without having been compiled the following message will be displayed MPE 20 Ver 6 AH Main Program has been changed Compile the program to sawe it Click Yes to compile and close the program Click Mo to cancel the changes and close the program Do you want to compile the program Yes Button The applicable program will be compiled and saved No Button The applicable edited contents will not be saved Cancel Button The program will not be compiled and saved and the Edit Window will be displayed again For details on saving program files refer to 7 7 5 Saving Project Files 3 39 3 40 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 4 1 Changing Ladder Subwindow Displays 3 4 Managing Programs in the Ladder Subwindow The Ladder Subwindow is used for managing ladder programs The contents of the Ladder program Folder in a project file are displayed in a tree hierarchy The following operations can be executed for ladder programs in the Ladder Subwindow Creating programs Refer to 3 2 1 Creating New Ladder Programs se Ladder program ian Opening edit windows for ladder programs Refer to 3 2 3 Opening EJ Hot Ladder Programs Cutting copying
138. 5 7 2 Search Replace Delete in Comment List 3 Deleting All Comments All the comment data in the comment column will be deleted 1 Right click the Comment column in the Comment List Tab of the Variable Subwindow and select Comments All Clear from the pop up menu The following message will appear asking whether or not to delete all comments MPE 20 Ver 6 Clear all comments Do you want bo continue Click Yes to delete all the comments in the Comment column 5 8 Exporting Importing Variables 5 8 Exporting Importing Variables Variables can be exported from an open project file on the MPE720 version 6 to a CSV CTF or YST file or imported from a CSV CTF or YST file to the MPE720 version 6 Export means to save variables comments and structures in a CSV CTF or YST file Only CSV files can be edited in Microsoft Excel Import means to save the CSV CTF or YST file in MPE720 version 6 again The variable data exported from a project file can be imported for use in another project file Data in a CSV file can be edited in Excel as required and the edited CSV file data can be imported to a project file The results of export and import are output to the Output Subwindow Import can be executed regardless of Machine Controller model Refer to 2 2 5 Exporting Importing Motion Parameters for information on exporting importing motion parameters 5 8 1 Exporting Importing Global Variables I O Variables and Comments
139. 6 1 12 4 Online Security 1 12 4 Online Security 1 What is Online Security Online security is a function that prevents data in the Machine Controller from being read The security key password and privilege level for the programs both set in the Security Setting Dialog Box enable the MPE720 version 6 to pre vent unprivileged logged on users from reading data from the Machine Controller and opening the programs This function helps protect the specified programs in the Machine Controller against undesired copying Online security can be set cleared or changed only when online Machine Controller in project link connection or direct connection with the MPE720 version 6 The logged on user who is allowed to carry out operations related to security must have writing privilege level 7 The logged on user with writing privilege level 0 to 6 cannot use the online security function The Security Setting com mand will be deactivated Refer to 1 9 1 Connecting to Machine Controllers for online and offline connection to a Machine Controller Refer to 1 8 4 Security User Registration for information on file privilege and user privilege mf Security Setting Current Status File Reading Restricted Restriction Privilege 4 W Apply File Reading Restriction Ladder Motion C Language Restriction Privilege 4 r and higher are restricted MP2200 CPU O is used save to CPU gt CARD is prohibited regardless of the restriction pri
140. 6 1 Types OF MONONA mee e a eee teeta eke eee 6 2 6 2 Detailed Descriptions of Monitoring Operations 6 3 6 24 Redistel oe Sesan een RER E ders con coe ee eeee eee EE 6 3 6 22 Watch Function 2242656225 ecc cee cee ceeeeeetete see a 6 6 6 2 3 Displaying Online Current Value 6 8 6 2 4 Displaying Offline Current Value 6 9 6 2 5 System Monitor 22 5 eee e a 6 10 6 2 Chapter 6 Monitoring 6 1 Types of Monitoring The following six monitoring functions are supported by MPE720 version 6 e Trace Monitoring Trace monitoring is used to monitor and trace the values of specified variables registers at specific time intervals in a graphical or chart format For details refer to Chapter 7 Data Tracing e Register Lists A register list displays the values memory map of registers in consecutive areas This enables real time monitoring when a Machine Controller is connected The values can be edited For details refer to 6 2 1 Register Lists e Watch The watch function displays the values of specified registers in a list This enables realtime monitoring when a Machine Controller is connected The values can be edited For details refer to 6 2 2 Watch Function e Online Current Value Display While online the values are displayed in the ladder program For details refer to 6 2 3 Displaying Online Current Value
141. 6 2 List Operation Buttons era E or E 10880 A Ee Auto Auto 10240 Auto E 500016 Calendar Month Auto B 00017 Calendar Hours Auto Auto No of monitored data 00020 Latest monitor time 00 00 24 23 06 21 Scoping Edi 7 6 1 Changing Pages Click the Change Page Tab to change the page The following three types of pages are displayed in the List Area e Monitor Pages Refer to 7 6 5 Monitor Pages e X Y Display Pages Refer to 7 6 6 X Y Display Page e File Pages Refer to 7 6 7 File Pages 7 6 List Area Operations 7 6 2 List Operation Buttons The following table provides details on the list operation buttons Displays the Select Monitor Setting Dialog Box so that the number of Data E Monitor Setting Trace Windows can be set Refer to 7 6 4 Select Monitor Setting Dialog Box Displays the Object Variable Setting Dialog Box so that the variables used Object Variable by imported files can be registered as Monitor Page variables monitor vari Setting ables Refer to 7 6 9 Object Variable Setting Dialog Box Changes the data display type for variables selected from the list Decimal aa ea unsigned decimal hexadecimal or binary can be selected asians Data Display l seo ae l Unsigned Decima The data display selection is invalid when no variables are Hexadecimal Binar selected Selects Cursor A B Cursor A Cursor B and Normal for the cursors linked to data d
142. 7 1 11 9 Reading from CF Card 1 78 1 11 10 Comparison with the Machine Controller 1 79 1 11 11 Comparing Flash Memory and RAM 1 81 1 11 12 Comparing Project Files 1 82 1 11 13 Comparing with CF Card Data 1 84 1 11 14 Detailed Comparison of Programs and Registers 1 85 1 12 Security 1 87 1 12 1 Security for User 1 87 1 12 2 Security for Project Files 1 87 1 12 3 Setting Passwords for Ladder Programs 1 87 1 12 4 Online Security 1 90 1 1 What Is MPE720 Version 6 1 1 What Is MPE720 Version 6 MPE720 version 6 CPMC MPE770 is an engineering tool for MP2000 series Machine Controllers Installing MPE720 version 6 on a computer and connecting to a Machine Controller via a Communications Module enables programming control and monitoring operations from the computer Note A Communications Module is not required for the MP2100 or the MP2100M MP2000 series Machine Controller MP2300 svear ziaro L004 A
143. 9 EJ START ConstLong O mm iCLoo0d 1 E Speedi Float ar 0 mm iCFO0045 jw CONST VARI YARIABLE O mm CWOD TEST C_WAITEC OO200 C 00299 jw TEA LEMON O deg cwooz00 L RUN RUN OLinch cLooz01 fia User structure Constant Variable Folder after A is imported to B FR fee Register Comment List fe Variable fia System Variable fa Axis Variable fe 10 Variable i Global Variable fi Fa Constant Variable i CONST DATA C_DATACC OO000 c O0099 EJ START ConstLong O mm iCLoo001 E Speedi Float ar 0 mm c F00045 W CONST YARI YARIABLE 0 mm ji w00 my OOQ C_Ooatc o1000 C 01099 jw O01 QQQ1 0 pulse kc wo0r000 oe We OO er jw TEA LEMON 0 deg cwonz200 EJ RUN RUN O inch cL00201 fi User structure Right click a folder in the Variable Subwindow and select Export or Import from the pop up menu to export or import 5 51 Chapter 5 Variables 5 8 3 Exporting Importing Constant Variables The following diagram outlines the export and import operation flow CTF file for each constant variable DATA CTF C registers MPE720 Comments version 6 Units Values E When the Register Ranges in Import Source and Destination Overlap When some registers to be imported overlap with those in the import destination the following error message will appear Change the register range either in the import source or in the destination
144. ALCAABO00 et aes le Acceleration value units selected by UnitsWword OWsx03 Acceleration oLa036 a jw Servopack command options CommandMaskiowedog le Deceleration value units selected by UnitsWord OWsx03 Deceleration oLa038 jw Various Serve bits packed into a word mask ModeMaskiow e001 E jw Drive skatus mask MonitorMaskiTweo00 ve wfo rotary 1 linear MotorTypeiIwa03F e jw Softens acceleration or deceleration 5 CurveTimefoweo3a ben E Set bit to energize servo ServoOn OBB0000 en jw Various Serve bits packed into a word mask SettingsMaskiOw e000 ve jw Select latch input signal amp offset input signal SignalSelectionwWordioweo04 ben lel In simulation mode servo will nok move SimulabefOBS0001 ben jel Simulation active or machine locked MLEL SimulationActivel IBB00CH es B Servo status MLOCK SimulationdctiveN IBS02C5 ow Jw Status mask StatusMask TWe00C e jw Servo status mask StatusMaskNilweao2c ws JW BITS 0 3 Set speed units O Ref s 1 10 n refimin 2 BITS 47 Set acc de oF EG Alarm Alarm EG Command Command FE Command Command2 iF EG Encoder Encoder i ES Gain Gain E E Home Home w 23 Variable Ely Ladder Instruction Axis variable set 5 The contents of the variable set is the same for each axis It consists of Monitor Parameters and Setting Parameters Group names and logical axis names can be set option
145. Bar ne Mi Mm Mm Offset Adjust The variable name for the offset ment Variable adjustment object is displayed Vertical Offset Used to set the vertical offset position Position Set Enter a value directly or use the spin Input range 100 00 to 100 00 Value buttons Used to adjust the horizontal scale Drag up and down using the mouse Used to adjust the vertical offset posi tion Drag up and down using the mouse Vertical Offset Adjustment Bar 1 11 1 12 Chapter 7 Data Tracing 7 5 5 Scale Offset Adjust Dialog Box cont d Horizontal Off set Position Set Value Horizontal Off E set Adjustment di Bar Input range When the object sampling time is Used to set the horizontal offset posi selected at a Monitor Page or File Page tion Enter a value directly or use the 99 to 99 spin buttons When the object variable value is selected at an X Y Display Page 100 00 to 100 00 Used to adjust the horizontal offset position Drag up and down using the mouse Used to return the scale or offset to their default values 100 The default value for the horizontal offset is 0 00 when an object is selected at an X Y Display Page Vertical scale Horizontal scale 100 Vertical offset 0 00 Horizontal offset 0 Used to close the Scale Offset Adjust Window 7 5 Graph Area Operations 7 5 6 Trend Graphs When the Trend Graph Button in the operation panel is clicked the Graph A
146. Box 1 82 opening an MPE720 version 5 MAL file 1 36 opening ladder programs 3 10 opening project files 1 34 operation panel 7 6 operation panel area 7 4 Operation Panel Button 7 6 optional settings 7 28 overwriting project files 1 37 P Page Setup Dialog Box 10 2 parameters fixed parameters 2 4 monitoring parameters 2 4 Index motion parameters 2 4 SERVOPACK parameters 2 4 setting parameters 2 4 pop up menu 7 18 Print Dialog Box 10 5 print previews 10 3 print settings 7 27 printing 10 5 call program instructions FUNC SEE MSEE 10 9 CP Ladder Programs Registers Definitions and Motion Programs 10 11 eross referenice information lt lt s 5 lt s 655 10 8 each ladder programs 10 5 ladder programis Ss SSS Se SSS SSeS See 10 2 other programs
147. Button is clicked the Engineering Manager will start and the Motion Editor Window will be dis played The motion program can then be edited Fa Engineering Manager File Edit View Debuq Window De amp amp Ga gee cor E Ee A E Motion Editor 2300 MP2300 Offline Local MPM001 PT CPU BOND_STAGE co lel J us 00001 00000 END For details on motion program instructions refer to the Machine Controller MP900 MP2000 Series User s Manual Motion Programming SIEZ C887 1 3 E File Privilege Levels and Read Write Privilege Levels Program read and write privilege levels are established to maintain program security To open a particular program the user must have a privilege level at least as high as the program s read privilege level Similarly in order to edit a particular program the user must have a privilege level at least as high as the program s write privilege level For details on setting and checking user privilege levels refer to 1 8 4 Security User Registration 4 4 4 3 Managing Motion Programs 4 3 Managing Motion Programs 4 3 1 Saving Motion Programs Motion programs that have been edited using the Motion Editor are saved using the Engineering Manager Motion programs are also saved automatically when the project file is saved and closed Overwriting the Motion Program Select File Save A confirmation message will be displayed Click the Yes Button to overwrite the program
148. CAN CunentWalue HEX woog 1 HIGH 0000 0000 o000 oong H000 2 2 Local Output E own 1 HIGH 0000 0000 o000 ooog H000 Module Configuration Definition Example For details on Configuration refer to the relevant Machine Controller or Option Module operation manual 4 Select File Save amp FLASH Save from the main menu The Module Configuration will be saved in the Machine Controller flash memory and RAM When offline execute the save operation by selecting File Save Chapter 2 Configuration 2 2 1 Fixed Parameters 2 2 Motion Parameters 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 4 Motion parameters include fixed parameters setting parameters monitoring parameters and SERVOPACK parameters With MPE720 version 6 the variables comments and structures that are assigned to each motion parameter can be exported to a CSV file or imported from the CSV file to the MPE720 version 6 Fixed Parameters Fixed parameters are used to define the specifications of the motor and machine to be used For details on fixed parameters refer to 4 2 1 List of Fixed Parameters of Machine Controller MP2200 MP2300 User 5 Manual Motion Module manual number SIEP C880700 16 Setting Parameters Each axis of a servo controller is operated by the setting parameters for the application For details on setting parameters refer to 4 2 2 List of Setting Parameters of Machine Controller MP2200 MP2300 User s Manual Motion Modules manual numb
149. Comment List 1 Search in Comment List The comments in the registers displayed in the Comment column can be searched 1 2 Double click the Comment List Tab in the Variable Subwindow and then select the Comment column Select Edit Find from the main menu or right click the Comment column and select Find from the pop up menu The Find Dialog Box will appear Find whole items only Direction Match case Up Down Enter a character string to search for and then click Find Next The cursor will move to the corre sponding character string When the search completes the following message will appear MPE 20 Ver 6 2 Replace in Comment List The comments in the registers displayed in the Comment column can be replaced with another character string 1 4 Double click the Comment List Tab in the Variable Subwindow and then select the Comment col umn Select Edit Replace from the main menu or right click the Comment column and select Replace from the pop up menu The Replace Dialog Box will appear Enter a character string to search for and a character string to replace it with and then click Replace Replace x Find what Replace with 888888 eh Find whole items only Match case The character string that is input in the Find what text box will be searched for and replaced with the character string entered in the Replace with text box 5 39 5 40 Chapter 5 Variables
150. Destination MBE 000020 Success H Aung 0001 Step 0006 NOC Operand 00 Source MBOO0100 gt Destination MBE 000020 Success H Aung 000Z Step 0010 NOC Operand 00 Source MBOO0100 gt Destination MB 000020 Replace complete 3 replacements made Success 3 Failure 0 4 End the replace operation by clicking the Cancel Button or the Close Button X 3 49 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 5 3 Searching and Replacing within Projects 3 5 3 Searching and Replacing within Projects All ladder programs and motion programs or in specified programs within a project can be searched for variables Registers and addresses can be searched and replaced This function is enabled only when not connected to a Machine Controller i e when offline CP ladder programs cannot be the objects of search and replace operations in projects The procedures for searching and replacing within projects are described below 1 Searching in Projects 1 Display the program that is to be selected in the foreground of the Ladder Edit Window and select Edit Search in Project from the main menu The Search in Project Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Set the variable or address to be searched and the name of the target program Search in project Variable Search Variable SSR Search All C Output log at Search 2 Variables can also be entered by dragging dropping copying and pasting from the Variable Subwindow Multip
151. Dialog Box is displayed by double clicking a cell The color can then be selected and set Variable X Axis Specifies the name of a variable to be traced on the X axis the horizontal axis The variable name can be selected from the variables set on the Monitor Page Variable Y Axis Specifies the name of a variable to be traced on the Y axis the vertical axis The variable name can be selected from the variables set on the Monitor Page Gonnection Point Sets the number in the model display to which to connect Either Nothing or the Select number set for the X Y page can be selected Cursor A Displayed by selecting List Cursor Position from the Main Menu Values for cursor A are See note displayed display only Cursor B Displayed by selecting List Cursor Position from the Main Menu Values for cursor B are See note displayed display only Difference A B Displayed by selecting List Cursor Position from the Main Menu The difference between See note the values for cursors A and B is displayed display only Note The Cursor A Cursor B and Difference A B are not displayed by default If they do not appear in the List Area then display them by reducing the cell widths 1 21 Chapter 7 Data Tracing 7 6 7 File Pages 1 6 7 File Pages Monitor Variable data imported from specified files CSV files can be displayed in File Pages Use the following procedure to import the data 1 Click the File Tab in the
152. Distributed I O I O 1 Built in the CPU of the Machine Controller MP2100 MP2500 MP2100M MP2500M and MP2300 2 Counter function of LIO 01 LIO 02 Module 22 24 VDC 64 point I O JEPMC 10350 JEPMC 102310 30 Register address IW IB IL IF IA xx00 indicates the leading input register address 00 Register address OW OB OL OF OA xx00 indicates the leading output register address 00 The variables for the I O Modules listed above are described below 1 I O Module Variables IO_IN TAxx00 Local I O 16 inputs DL 15 IBxx00F Input 15 IO OUT OAxx01 Local I O 16 outputs DO 15 OBxx01F Output 15 A 27 A Variable Tables A 3 1O Variables 2 LIO 01 Module Variables LIO_IN IAxx00 Local I O 16 inputs DI 00 IBxx000 Input 0 DI 15 IBxx00F Input 15 LIO OUT OAxx01 Local I O 16 outputs DO_00 OBxx010 Output 0 DO_15 OBxx01F Output 15 3 CNTR Module Variables Variable Register Comments IAxx00 IWxx00 IBxx000 IBxx001 IBxx002 IBxx003 IBxx004 IBxx005 IBxx006 IBxx007 IBxx009 IBxx00A CNTR_IN Counter Input RUNSTS Status DataError Data Setting Error FixedParameterError Fixed Parameter Error Count Value Preset Completed PI Latch Completed Pulse A B 0 Coincidence Detection Phase A Status Phase B Status Writing Fixed Parameter PresetCompleted PILatchCompleted PulseABO CoincidenceSignal PulseAStatus PulseBStatus WritingFixedParameter Disconnect Alarm POSMAX T
153. Editing Expressions for EXPRESSION Instructions 3 34 3 3 15 Creating Functions 3 35 3 3 16 Calling Functions 3 37 3 3 17 Ladder Program Compiling and Compile Options 3 38 3 3 18 Compiling when Exiting 3 39 3 4 Managing Programs in the Ladder Subwindow 3 40 3 4 1 Changing Ladder Subwindow Displays 3 40 3 4 2 Setting Passwords for Ladder Programs 3 41 3 4 3 Managing Ladder Program Files 3 42 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 5 Debugging Ladder Programs 3 46 3 5 1 Monitoring Ladder Program Execution 3 46 3 5 2 Searching and Replacing 3 47 3 5 3 Searching and Replacing within Projects 3 50 3 5 4 Cross Reference Searching 3 53 3 5 5 Searching for Duplicate Coils 3 54 3 5 6 Forcing Coils ON OFF 3 55 3 5 7 Referencing Called Programs 3 58 3 6 Converting CP Ladder Programs to Ordinary Ladder Programs 3 59 3 6 1 Converting CP Lad
154. Engineering Tool for MP2000 Series Machine Controller MPE 720 Version 6 USER S MANUAL TYPE CPMC MPE770 Transfer UDI programinn a vah 79 setup preka wi Servopack comman wus a Ef Deceleration values Various Servo bits Drive status mask Iwi 0 rotary 1 line mMB300018 Softens acceleratio Set bit to energize Various Servo bits 5 Select latch input si aus oai In simulation mode Simulation active or Sewo OH Commant sPereeeede Servo status MLOC Status mask Stat w or c shaller re Sat bit to energize w Servo status mask Je Proatntecbie ee setvo0n lw BITS 0 3 Set spe H O ER Alarm Alarm RI Command Command RI Command2 Comm Fator coshrlier ie ERI Encoder Encoder ay Set bit to energize E Gain Gain seme i Home Home variable 7 l ET Ladder Instruction D paus sie coja D nlir ommard 0 sedin v 806 sa ICONE sng 000 OFF OF YASKAWA MANUAL NO SIEP C880700 30B Copyright 2006 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Yaskawa Graphic Symbols Used in this Manual The graphic symbols used in this manual indicate the following type of information Y Th
155. F Normal Green Operating Machine Controller RUN status Gray Stopped Red Error SB000403 Error status as aE OFF Normal MECHATROLINK I MECHATROLINK II data transmission status Always gray Always not communicating SB000487 ON Alarm OFF Normal Red Battery alarm Battery alarm status Gray Normal RUN and STOP Buttons These buttons change the Machine Controller s CPU status Their functions are the same as CPU RUN and CPU STOP in the Online Menu Refer to 1 10 Stopping STOP and Restarting RUN the Machine Controller CPU Reset Button Click the Reset Button to clear the Machine Controller error log 6 10 6 2 Detailed Descriptions of Monitoring Operations Clear Button This button clears the contents of the Machine Controller s RAM When it is clicked the following message will be displayed for confirmation MPE 20 Ver 6 Initialize an program memory Do you wank bo continue If program write protection is set to Write Disable in the Setup Folder of the Environment Setting Dialog Box connection may not be possible the next time it is attempted If this occurs turn the power supply to the Machine Controller OFF and then back ON Scan Time Display The scan time values are displayed here If a Scan Time Over occurs it will be displayed in red showing an error The Scan Time Over occurs if the current value or maximum value exceeds the setting value Setting Value Current V
156. F Sra 7 WLF Sreh 7 3 30 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs 2 Enter an instruction name and instruction key allocation and press the Enter Key or select an instruction name and instruction key allocation from the list The instruction object selected in step 1 will be replaced by the instruction object entered in step 2 Insertion of the instruction can be cancelled by pressing the Esc Key or clicking outside of the list or field in the Ladder Edit Window before pressing the Enter Key or clicking in the list If an item is selected highlighted in the list however the name and key allocation will be saved even if attempts to cancel the operation are made 3 3 12 Entering and Changing Variables and Register Addresses When a variable is entered for an instruction object a register address and comment can be entered at the same time Variables can be entered in the following ways e Directly entering the address or variable name e Copying and pasting the variable e Dragging and dropping the variable Variables that have already been entered can be changed to other variables Variables are assigned in a database with names called variable names given to combinations of comments register types and register addresses Six types of variables can be referenced from any project file system variables axis variables I O variables global variables and local variables assigned for individual programs For details on variables refer to Chap
157. F by selecting Display Register List Register List 1 or 2 or 3 from the Main Menu 2 Inthe Register Field Enter the register address to be displayed in the memory map To display a D register list also enter the program number as shown below Register List 1 Register DB000010 gt Ho2 02 i Monitor EE 3 Press the Enter Key A memory map will be displayed with the specified register address in the top row Number of registers displayed in one row Register List 1 Register DBOOOO10 HO2 02 T Monitor FEE ee ee DBOOOO1O OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Is 6 7 ja a a B c D E F pea n OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF DB000020 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF DB000030 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF eee FF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF DBOO0050 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF DBOO0060 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF DBOO0070 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF l anm I I l Memory Map Example for D Registers and Balloon Display Example Buttons DBOOOO40 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF e 3 4 IE 6 7 8 9 o Oo Oo o 0 o oO 0 Oo 0 o T T T T o Oo T o T T o T T T o o o Oo T Oo T Oo T o T o T T T T o T o T o o Memory Map Example for M Registers The scroll bar can be moved to change the register range tha
158. L000 714 MiL304 12 0L00016 ML304 14 3000000 Always ON OnCoil MSEE wf ogor M Frogram No Dwaogzs ML 4 A Data DADDOZO bDeooo200 MBOSO020 gjg ML 4 4 4 iiij Ww For details refer to 6 2 3 Displaying Online Current Value Register status during execution can be monitored in a register list For details refer to 6 2 1 Register Lists The display color for execution monitoring can be changed by selecting View Editor Option from the Main Menu and then selecting Color Focus The default setting is blue For details refer to 3 3 4 3 Changing Edit Window Displays Editor Options 3 5 Debugging Ladder Programs 3 5 2 Searching and Replacing It is possible to search for variables instructions and comments used in the program Registers and comments can be searched and replaced The procedures for searching and replacing are described below 1 Searching 1 Display the program that is to be searched in the foreground of the Ladder Edit Window and select Edit Search from the main menu The Search Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Click the Variable Instruction or Comment Tab Page and specify the content of the search Search Variable Instruction Comment Search Variable ServoOn Search All C Output log at Search 2 Search Direction O Up Down C Select Range Start Rung End Rung The Variable Tab Page is used to search for variables and register addresses
159. List Area to display a File Page 2 Select File Import from the Main Menu The Open File Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Select the file csv from which to import data and click the Open Button The data in the selected file will be displayed The items displayed on a File Page are the same as those on a Monitor Page Variables programs and comments depend on data imported from files so they cannot be edited The default setting for the number of File Pages displayed is two but the number can be set for a maximum of eight Variables displayed on a File Page can be assigned as Monitor Variables to be monitored on a Monitor Page For details refer to 7 6 9 Object Variable Setting Dialog Box For details on setting the number of File Pages displayed refer to 7 7 3 4 Setting the List Tab Page 1 22 7 6 List Area Operations 7 6 8 Assigning Monitor Variables The data trace function can be used by assigning the variables that are to be monitored 1 e the Monitor Variables in the List Area A maximum of 16 Monitor Variables can be assigned Up to 64 16 x 4 Monitor Variables can be assigned by changing the monitor setting Only 16 Monitor Variables however can be displayed at one time Refer to 7 6 4 Select Monitor Setting Dialog Box The following methods can be used to assign Monitor Variables from the Data Trace Window m Entering the Variable Name Register to the Variable Cell in a Monitor Page Double
160. Number Program error count high speed program Program error code high speed program Error program number high speed program Referencing called program number high speed SWO00155 program ReferProgramNumber Referencing called step number high speed pro SW00156 gram ReferStep ErrorLow Low speed program error SW00088 SW00089 SW00186 Count Code ProgramNumber Error count low speed program Error code low speed program Error program number low speed program Referencing called program number low speed SW00187 program ReferProgramNumber Referencing called step number low speed pro gram ReferStep SW00189 ErrorStart Start program error SW00080 SW00081 SW00122 Count Code ProgramNumber Error count start program Error code start program Error program number start program Referencing called program number start pro SW00123 gram ReferProgramNumber ReferStep Sw00124 Referencing called step number start program Errorinterrupt Interrupt program error SW00082 SW00083 SW00138 Count Code ProgramNumber Error count interrupt program Error coder interrupt program Error program number interrupt program Referencing called program number interrupt pro SW00139 gram ReferProgramNumber Referencing called step number interrupt pro SW00140 gram ReferStep A 3 A Variable Tables A 1 Variables that are Automatically Assig
161. OT ServoNotEnabled Communication Register OBxx00B OBxx013 OBxx014 OBxx015 OWxx2E OWxx2F OWxx30 OWxx31 OWxx32 OWxx34 IWxx04 IBxx040 IBxx041 IBxx042 IBxx043 IBxx044 IBxx045 IBxx046 IBxx047 IBxx048 IBxx049 IBxx04A IBxx04B IBxx04D IBxx04F IBxx050 IBxx051 IBxx052 IBxx053 IBxx056 IBxx05E IBxx05F ILxx02 IWxx01 IBxx020 IBxx021 IBxx022 IBxx023 IBxx024 IBxx026 IBxx027 IBxx028 IBxx029 Comments Gain Integration reset Speed loop P PI switch Gain switch Gain switch 2 Position loop gain Speed loop gain Speed feed forward compensation Speed compensation Position integration time constant Speed integration time constant Alarm Servo driver error Positive overtravel Negative overtravel Positive soft limit Negative soft limit Servo OFF Positioning time over Excessive positioning moving amount Excessive speed Excessive following error Filter type change error Filter time constant change error Zero point not set Servo driver parameter setting error Servo driver synchronization communication error Servo driver communication error Servo driver command timeout error ABS encoder count exceeded Scanning set error Motor type set error Connected encoder type error Warning Over range parameter number Excessive following error Setting parameter error Fixed parameter error Servo driver error Motion command setting error Positive overtravel Negative overtravel Servo not ON Servo driver dommunication warning
162. PE720 Version 5 MAL File 1 36 1 7 5 Saving Project Files 1 37 1 7 6 Closing Project Files 1 38 1 7 7 Moving Project Files Deleting Copying and Renaming Project Files 1 38 1 8 Environment Settings 1 39 1 8 1 Environment Setting Dialog Box 1 39 1 8 2 System Communication Setting 1 40 1 8 3 System Controller Type 1 41 1 8 4 Security User Registration 1 42 1 8 5 Security Project Password 1 44 1 8 6 Security Default User Setting 1 45 1 8 7 Setup System Setting 1 46 1 8 8 Setup Scan Time Setting 1 47 1 8 9 Ladder General 1 48 1 8 10 C Language General 1 48 1 8 11 Transferring C Language Linker 1 48 1 8 12 Variable Variable 1 49 1 8 13 Monitor System Monitor
163. PILatchRequest CoincidenceRequest POSMA XRequest MultipurposeOutPut FunctionSelections CountPresettingData AgreedDetection Value PresetDataPOSMAXTurns ZoneOutputMinimum Value ZoneOutputMaximum Value SpeedCoincidenceDetectionSetting SpeedCoincidenceDetection Width FrequencyCoincidenceDetectionSetting FrequencyCoincidenceDetection Width AveragingCountSetting SystemMonitor Register IAxx20 IWxx20 IBxx200 IBxx201 IBxx202 IBxx203 IBxx204 IBxx205 IBxx206 IBxx207 IBxx208 IBxx209 IBxx20A IBxx20C IBxx20D IBxx20F ILxx22 ILxx24 ILxx26 ILxx28 ILxx2A ILxx2C ILxx2E ILxx30 ILxx32 ILxx34 ILxx3E OAxx20 OWxx20 OBxx200 OBxx201 OBxx202 OBxx203 OBxx204 OBxx205 OWxx21 OLxx22 OLxx24 OLxx26 OLxx28 OLxx2A OLxx2C OLxx2E OLxx30 OLxx32 OLxx34 OLxx3E A Variable Tables A 3 I O Variables Comments 2 Channel Counter Input Status Data Setting Error Fixed Parameter Setting Error Count Value Preset Completed PI Latch Completed Pulse A B 0 Coincidence Detection Phase A Status Phase B Status Phase C Status Writing Fixed Parameter Disconnect Alarm POSMAX Turns Preset Completed Multipurpose Signal Module Ready Incremental Pulses Counter Value PI Latch Value Incremental Pulse After Conversion Current Counter Value After Conversion PI Latch Value After Conversion Number of POSMAX Turns Feedback Speed Detected Frequency Average Frequency System Monitor 2 Channel Counter Output Operation Mode Count Disable
164. Projects Y After a replace operation in a project has been completed compiling and saving will be executed The replace operation cannot be undone to restore the project to its previous status so be sure to back up any essential files before performing the operation Ifa motion program is opened by the Engineering Manager before a replace operation the program will not be automatically updated Close any open motion programs before executing a replace operation 1 Display the program that is to be selected in the foreground of the Ladder Edit Window and select Edit Replace in Project from the main menu The Replace in the Project Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Set the variable or address to be searched and the name of the target program Variables can also be entered by dragging dropping copying pasting from the Variable Subwindow Multiple programs can be specified in the Target Program Field by separating them with commas and spaces 3 Asterisks can also be used as wildcards in the Target Program Field as follows H L I A F all functions MPM MPS Wildcards can be used only in the above forms They cannot be used in forms such as H01 3 Click the Register or Address Tab Page and specify the search object and the replace object Replace in the project Register Address Search Register MBOO0100 w Replace All Replace Register 56000002 al Target Program w When the program is ope
165. S ea Motion command control flag ovwso09 No Command 000 Motion subcommand Ow son4 ee nore tioni j Torque T hrust reference setting OL800C Fer Paar R a Speed limit setting at the torque thrust reference OWS800E Interpolation Speed reference setting OL8010 Last interpolation m 0 Run command setting 0001 H a Positive side limiting torque thrust setting at the speedrefer OL8014 qua 1 Mode setting 1 OOOO H F Secondly Speed Compensation OL8016 3 2 Mode setting 2 0000 H l Override Ow8018 14 3 Function setting 1 0011H 4 Function setting 2 0033H 6 5 Function setting 3 0000 H O Motion command 2 Chapter 2 Configuration 2 2 5 Exporting Importing Motion Parameters E Parameters Set by Inputting Numerical Values Others Save the parameter window displayed in the foreground of Engineering Manager and then export to a CSV file If the CSV file is opened after exporting the input data are displayed as they were displayed in the Engineering Manager Window numerical values Fixed Parameters Setup Parameters SERVOPACK Monitor Speed reference setting Secondly Speed Compensation Override Position reference setting Width of positioning completion NEAR signal output width Error count alarm detection Phase correction setting Latch zone lower limit setting Latch zone upper limit setting Position loop gain Positive side limiting torque thrust setti
166. S OB0001 3 DO O4fOB0001 4 DO OS OBO0015 DO O6 OBOO016 bo OFfOBOO017 DO OsfOBO0018 bo O9fOBO01 9 DO 10fOBO0014 DO 11 OB0001B DO 12 OB0001C DO 13 OBOO01D DO 14060001E DO 1S OBOO01F ise Local 1 1 digital Output 1 _OUTMOACOOL wt Leading output address Output variables The I O Module name shown in the Module Configuration Definitions is displayed for the I O Module name by default When the Module Configuration Definitions are changed the changes are displayed by executing Update F5 Variable names and register addresses cannot be changed for I O variables but the following items can be edited I O Module name I O leading address comments I O variable comments The next section describes how to edit these items 5 2 Variables that Are Automatically Assigned by System 2 I O Modules that Can Use Variables The following table shows the I O Modules that can be used on MPE720 version 6 Type Main Slot CPU Modules MP2100 MP2200 MP2300 Option Modules LIO 01 LIO 02 LIO 04 LIO 05 DO 01 AI 01 AO 01 CNTR O1 CNTRO1I 217IF 218IF 217IF 01 217IF 2171F MPLINK 2171F 260IF 217IF 261IFS AFMP 01 ANY WIRE SVA 01 SVAO1 218IF 01 215AIF 01 260IF 01 2611F 01 SVB 01 SVB01 PO 01 PO CSIF 01 CSIF A net A Link 216AIF 01 216IF MPANLO0 0 Modules that can be allocated to the MECHATROLINK 5 9 Chapter 5 Variables 5 2 3 I O Variabl
167. SSION Aa x pos sinih r_size sy Position Expression Field pos cosh r size Position m Expression Editor szingli r_size f YPosition costI gt p_size f RPos ition gt Comments are displayed in green in the Expression Editor Reserved words are displayed in blue 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs 3 3 15 Creating Functions Functions are also sometimes called user functions These are sub programs that can be referenced from any ladder program and they are created in the Function Folder in the Ladder Subwindow Once a function has been created it can be entered into a ladder program as a FUNC instruction 1 Right click the Function Folder in the Ladder Subwindow and select Create New Program from the pop up menu that will be displayed The Create New Program Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Click I O definition on the left side of the dialog box to display Function input no Address input no and Function output no B Create New Program Program Mo FUNCOL r Configuration 0 definition Detail definition BIT B WAL BIT B WAL x Ce 3 Click these to display the respective detail definition windows and then set the details Function input no 1 rs Function output no i Type Comment Type Comment 01 a B VAL Address input no aT BYVAL Type Comment Close Function Input No Set the number of data items to be entered for FUNC instruction objects in the lad
168. Scan HalfSecond DBOOOooO au DaOoooo 10 SB000014 SB000014 Daoooooo T m All DeOoooooo DBOOooso MESO00 10 MESOO0 18 DBOOoO0 4 DeOoooooo DaOOOOso MESO00 10 MESOO018 DBOOO00 4 SS A E DeOoooooo DeaOoooooS DBOOOOS 4 DeaOooOOo2 DeOoooooo DeaOoooooS D BOOS 4 DeaOooooo2 ire 3 58 3 6 Converting CP Ladder Programs to Ordinary Ladder Programs 3 6 Converting CP Ladder Programs to Ordinary Ladder Programs The ladder programs created using CP ladder language CP ladder programs can be converted to ordinary ladder programs When converting a CP ladder program DWG properties and comments in the program will be converted at the same time An individual program or multiple programs selected from the Ladder Subwindow can be converted and the results will be output to the Output Subwindow The CP ladder program conversion function is enabled only when offline The function is disabled when a Machine Controller is connected to the MPE720 version 6 online The security setting and enable disable ladder program setting made for the CP ladder program remain valid after the CP ladder program is converted Y Once a CP ladder program has been converted to an ordinary ladder program the CP ladder program can not be opened any more If the CP ladder program is needed use either of the following methods to save the project file e Copy the project file from Windows Explorer and paste e Select Edit Save Project A
169. T STATIC STRUCT SWITCH S TAN TCN TCR TCS TIM TOF TON TPS TRUE TYPEDEF UFC UNION UNSIGNED VCR VCS VEL VOID VOLATILE WAX WCD WCE WCT WDA WDB WDC WDD WEND WHILE WPM WSA ZRN INDEX A registers variables 5 24 Address Display Icon 3 15 Adjust Scale Offset Dialog Box 7 11 assigning function external variables 5 24 assigning global constant 5 18 assigning global constant groups 5 17 assigning global variables 5 12 assigning internal variables 5 22 assigning monitor variables 7 23 automatically hidden 1 29 axis variable details A 5 axis variable set 5 6 axis variables 5 5 B basic engineering procedure 1 3 beginning ladder programming 3 5 branches 3 12 buttons in graph area 7 8 C Calculate Dialog Box 7 26 calling functions 3 37 caption bar 1 24 CF card comparing with CF card 1 84 rea
170. TRIC SHANGHAI CO LTD BEIJING OFFICE Room 1011A Tower W3 Oriental Plaza No 1 East Chang An Ave Dong Cheng District Beijing 100738 China Phone 86 10 8518 4086 Fax 86 10 8518 4082 YASKAWA ELECTRIC TAIWAN CORPORATION 9F 16 Nanking E Rd Sec 3 Taipei Taiwan Phone 886 2 2502 5003 Fax 886 2 2505 1280 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION YASKAWA In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture thereof the export will fall under the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Regulations Therefore be sure to follow all procedures and submit all relevant documentation according to any and all rules regulations and laws that may apply Specifications are subject to change without notice MANUAL NO SIEP C880700 30B for ongoing product modifications and improvements Printed in Japan December 2006 06 6 lt lt 2006 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION All rights reserved 05 70
171. Transfer Comparison Result Subwindow If unmatched data is found during comparison of program data the unmatched data will be displayed in the Transfer Subwindow as follows Double click the unmatched data and you can go to the execution step or line where the unmatched data 1s found However if unmatched data is found during comparison of CP ladder programs the corresponding CP ladder program will open If unmatched data is found during comparison with motion programs you will go to the motion program line where the unmatched data is found Source of comapre project file MP2300 testo hiw Destination of comapre project fle MP2300 teste yh Ww High Scan Programs H High Scan Programs HOT Group definition Y Multiple differences were found though only one element in the program was modified This contradiction may appear in the results because ladder programs are compared on the base of execu tion codes executable data after compilation and one instruction is converted into multiple execution codes instruction numbers This will not cause any problems in the operation Differences were found though the same data were compared a This contradiction may appear due to differences between two types of compilations normal compilation and version 5 compatible compilation For a version 5 compatible compiler the information on the ver sion 5 compatible compilation is written on 0 to 4 steps of the program Howev
172. Variable names and maximum values can be set for the horizontal and vertical axes of X Y graphs in the same way as for the vertical axes of trend graphs While an X Y graph is displayed display settings and playback operations are enabled in addition to all of the operations for a trend graph 1 X Y Graph Display Display Setting Buttons The display settings for an X Y graph can be changed Point Display Used to display coordinates as points Line Display Used to display coordinates connected by lines Used to display coordinates connected by lines according to connected point data Model Displ i j int i ica For details on connected points refer to Connection Point in 7 6 6 X Y Display Page Used to select whether or not to leave tracks Tracks Active for point display only 7 5 Graph Area Operations 2 Playback Operations The playback function reproduces displays of data captured before tracing is stopped or data captured for snapshots Operations such as playback stop forward return slow motion forward and slow motion return can be performed Playback can be executed when an X Y graph is displayed There is no time information included in an X Y graph so this function is provided to display changes in data with the elapsed time The following table shows the playback related buttons Playback Replays an X Y graph from the beginning of the traced data St The replaying of an X Y graph is stopped at the
173. Variables can be copied and pasted from the Variable Subwindow Variable Instruction Comment Instruction I i o v Variable ServoOn v Search All C Output log at Search 2 Search Direction O Up Down C Select Range Start Rung End Rung In the Instruction Tab Page enter an instruction name or instruction key allocation in the nstruc tion Field Variables can also be entered by dragging and dropping copying and pasting from the Variable Subwindow The Variable Field will be changed to Program Name depending on the search object Search Marable Instruction Comment Wii ecaidicac search Direction C Find whole items only O Up Down C Match case C Register compensation C Select Range C Output log at Search 2 Start Rung col EndAung o The Comment Tab Page is used to search for object rung and program comments and for com ments in expressions 3 47 3 48 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 5 2 Searching and Replacing 4 Use wild card When selected the wildcards and can be used in searches Search agree completely item When selected only exact matches between character strings in comments and search objects will be searched Whether distinctions are made between uppercase and lowercase however depends on the Case sensitive setting Case sensitive When selected a distinction is made between uppercase and lowercase characters Register compensation
174. When a new project file is created a list of Machine Controllers can be referenced that will be displayed in the Combo box Select System Controller Type from the tree in the Environment Setting Dialog Box to bring up the following window for reference Refer to 1 8 1 Environment Setting Dialog Box These settings cannot be changed Environment Setting Es System Communication Settir MP2100 MP 2500 La a a eae MP21 00M MP2500M PS Security Pj Setup P Ladder Ez c language Eza variable Ez Monitor Ez Transfer Ez Print This is a selectable controller in the create new 1 41 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 8 4 Security User Registration 1 8 4 Security User Registration The users are allowed to open a project file can be registered and changed These settings can be made while the project file 1s open or while connected to the Machine Controller If the settings are made while connected to the Machine Controller they become the settings for access and writing rights to the Machine Controller Select Security User Registration from the tree in the Environment Setting Dialog Box to bring up that window and then make the settings Refer to 7 8 1 Environment Setting Dialog Box Environment Setting User Name Password User Privilege Default Privilege USER A USER A Aiwa RUW USER B USER B RT Ria USER C USER C ACW O Achy Default User Setting Pj Setup PS Ladder Pj c lan
175. Window Help 1D 5 E a EE BA a i ro a Le aan aan Offline Programming Monitor Transfer Utility Scantime setting Module configuration Ladder x gt X Ladder Instruction Communications Setting Connection Disconnection El Ladder E motion FagLadder Instruction 3 Variable Transfer DX E Output M Transfer ERegister List 1 E watch 1 MK cross Reference 1 4OForce Coil List Ready E CAP NUM SCRL The project file will be automatically compressed and saved the window will close and MPE720 version 6 will close 1 23 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 5 1 Names and Descriptions of Window Components 1 5 MPE 20 Version 6 Window Operations 1 5 1 Names and Descriptions of Window Components A description of each of the MPE720 Ver 6 Window components is provided below Nt MPE720 Ver 6 Start E File Edit view Online Compile Debug Window Help 1 Main Menu LE B a 2 Toolbar a YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION l 4 Caption Bar 3 Launcher p IE Set rogramming Monitor Transfer Utility Scantime setting Module configuration Ladder gt ax ff start N gt X Ladder Instruction AX By a 6 Window Tab Pag es New Communications Setting Connection Disconnection History History 5 Main Windows 7 Subwindows v EllLadder Motion gt cp Ladder Instruction 3 Variable Transfer gt ax 7 Subwindows Output Tra
176. Wxx02 IBxx020 IBxx021 IBxx022 IBxx028 IBxx029 IBxx02A IBxx02B IBxx02C IBxx02D IBxx02E IBxx02F IWxx03 IWxx04 IWxx05 IWxx06 ILxx03 ILxx05 OAxx00 OWxx00 OWxx01 OWxx02 OBxx020 OBxx021 OBxx022 OBxx023 OBxx024 OBxx025 OBxx026 OBxx027 OBxx028 OBxx029 OBxx02A OBxx02B OBxx02C OBxx02D OBxx02E OBxx02F Input Reservel Reserved for the System Reserve2 Reserved for the System Input Relays Ready Setting Normal InputRelay Z Y E CARY 1 BORW1 N L CARY2 BORW2 N2 L2 InputRegsiterW 1 InputRegsiterW2 InputRegsiterW3 InputRegsiterW4 Error Counter Carry Counter Borrow Counter 1 Notch Output Status Counter 1 Latch Input Status Counter 2 Carry Counter 2 Borros Counter 2 Notch Output Status Counter 2 Latch Input Status Inpur Register Word1 Input Register Word2 Input Register Word3 Input Register Word4 InputRegsiterL 1 Input Register Long1 InputRegsiterL2 Input Register Long2 OUT Output ScanCounter Scan Counter Reserved for the System Output Coil 1 Counter 1 Mode Set Counter 1 Notch Point Set Reservel OutputCoill M SETI N SETI P_ SETI C ENBI N ENBI P_ RESI N RESI L RESI M_SET2 N_SET2 P_ SET2 C_ENB2 N_ENB2 P RES2 N RES2 L RES2 Counter 1 Current Value Set Counter 1 Count Enable Counter 1 Notch Output Enable Counter 1 Current Value Reset Counter 1 Notch Output Reset Counter 1 Count Value Hold Reset Counter 2 Mode Set Counter 2 Notch Point Set Counter 2 Curr
177. Zoom Out being displayed This icon is available Returns the graph to its original scale ed Reset o l This icon is available Toggles between displaying and hiding the grid Toggles between displaying and hiding cursor A one of the two cursor types A and B Toggles between displaying and hiding cursor B one of the two cursor types A and B Cursor A B with Same Interval C Sig Displays the Cursor Setting Dialog Box EREE y Refer to 7 5 4 Cursor Setting Dialog Box Adjust Scale Displays the Scale Offset Adjust Dialog Box Offset Refer to 7 5 5 Scale Offset Adjust Dialog Box Copies the graph to the clipboard Copy Graph KEA l l a Copied images of graphs can be pasted in other Windows applications Maximum Hides the list and maximizes the graph display Graph Display This icon is active only during normal graph display Normal Grap Displays the list and returns the graph to its normal display Display This icon is active only during maximum graph display Cursor settings Links cursors A and B to operate at a fixed interval This icon is active when both cursors A and B are displayed Cursor operations 7 5 Graph Area Operations 7 5 2 Graph Area Pop up Menu ere The following pop up menu is displayed by right clicking in the Graph Area z Select aT Scroll ty zoom In Time Axis Units F Al Cursor 4 B Cursor B A Tuning the Scale Offset Set the Cursor Configurati
178. a display is maximized Refer to 7 6 List Area Operations m Terminology Monitor Variables Variables registers that being monitored in graphs or data monitor displays are called Monitor Variables For a variable register to be treated as a Monitor Variable it must be assigned as one For details on assigning monitor variables refer to 7 6 8 Assigning Monitor Variables 7 4 7 3 Displaying Graphs 7 3 Displaying Graphs Use the following procedure to display a trend graph or an X Y graph using the data trace function 1 Double click the Variable Field in the List Area to display the text cursor and then enter the register address or variable name to be monitored and press the Enter Key For a D register enter the name of the program to be monitored in the Program Field Variables can be entered by dragging and dropping from the Variable Subwindow A maximum of 16 register addresses or variables can be entered If a comment has been set for a variable that is entered then the comment will be displayed by entering the variable Monitor e10 rez Ie Mb ind I EE catcate Monitori Fy wy Graph L File 1 File 2 mi Normal Elid Fina E calculate m Select i Ma Calendar Seconds Auto L Anto a Auto EE a A blue background for a setting in the Variable Field indicates that the setting has not been saved Select File Save Setting from the Main Menu A message
179. ace is clicked DeOoooo 10 DBOOOd 1 4 f DeOoooo 10 DBOOOd 1 4 i Click here to select the branch and all instruction objects Running Semon Edit mark Running Daoooo 10 DBOOOdd 4 Sermon lt gt poon s l aa ML 4 DeOoooo 10 DBOOOd 1 4 j Running SenoOn Running DaOoooo 10 DBOOO0d 4 SenoOn 0000 0000 L 1 gt ML 4 DeOoooo 10 DBOOOd 1 4 A KU DeOooo 40 DBOOOd 1 4 DeOoooo 10 DBOOOd 1 4 Click here to select the branch and all instruction objects Edit mark Select Edit Cut or Copy from the Main Menu Alternatively right click the edit mark and select Cut or Copy from the pop up menu that will be displayed Another method is to press the Ctril X Keys Cut or the Ctrl C Keys Copy After a branch has been cut it must be pasted before another cut or copy operation is executed or else the branch that was cut first will be deleted Click the insertion position to display an input guide on the rung Rungs with other ladder programs displayed in the Ladder Subwindow can also be used Select Edit Paste from the Main Menu Alternatively right click the edit mark and select Paste from the pop up menu that will be displayed Another method is to press the Ctrl V Keys When any of the above is executed the cut or copied branch will be inserted at the input guide position 2 Moving Branches by Dragging 1 2 3 26 Select the branch to be moved
180. ady been assigned to the variable the user structure will not be deleted and its name will remain unchanged However the display will be deactivated BIR fee Register 23 Comment List E Variable ia System Variable aa Axis Variable fi 10 Variable Sy Global Variable E Bit fia Word E Long E Float ae Address BM 222 NOTELTESTZ MAo0000 Constant Variable Be User structure User Structure Structure E Structure Tester When a structure member of the user structure that has already been assigned to a variable is deleted in the Registration Structure Dialog Box the structure member will also be deleted from the tree structure under the variable in the Variable Subwindow When the name of a structure member is changed the change will be written in the user structure that has already been assigned to the variable When the comments for a structure member are changed the change will not be written to the comments for the variable that has already been assigned Change the comments of the variable that has already been assigned accordingly after having assigned the structure member 9 33 Chapter 5 Variables 5 6 3 Assigning User Structures 5 6 3 Assigning User Structures When adding a global or local variable in the Variable Registration Dialog Box opened from the Variable Subwin dow a user structure can be assigned to the added global or local variable Refer to 5 3
181. ager File View Tool Control Modem Help P Ec a Logical PT PTKind DuaL Physica Device Timeout RQ Address Connec Modify Logging Status 1 Serial COMI 10000 mol eB oO ha T Select File Save and then click the Yes Button in the dialog box displayed for confirmation The settings will be saved Communication Manager ie view Tool Control Modem Help The Information will be Saved 4re You Ready 8 Select File Exit and then click the Yes Button in the dialog box displayed for confirmation The Communication Manager Communication Process will be closed Communication Manager RET view Tool Control Modem Help Setting Save 1 3 Installing and Uninstalling MPE720 Version 6 b How to Set a Serial Port with a USB Serial Conversion Adapter If the personal computer is connected to the Machine Controller using a USB serial port conversion adapter confirm the logical port in the following manner 1 Right click the My Computer Icon on the desktop and then select Properties from the pop up menu System Properties System Restore Automatic Updates Remote General Computer Mame Hardware Advanced System Microsoft Windows F Home Edition Version 2002 Registered to YE YE p527 7 33r 026r 346 21 692 Computer Intel F Pentium A 4 CPU 2 53GHz 2 52 GHz 512 MB of RAM The System Properties Dialog Box will open
182. ally but the contents of the axis variable set cannot be changed The logical axis variables set in the Group Definitions are displayed by default Refer to A 2 Axis Variable Details for details on axis variable sets 1 Registering and Editing Groups and Logical Axes Use the following procedure to define group numbers and names and the logical axes and names that are to be used with each group Groups and logical axes that are already assigned can also be edited 1 Double click the Axis Variable Folder in the Variable Subwindow The Group Definition Dialog Box will be displayed Group Definition Group List 4xis Specification Group No of Group Control amp xis Na Group Mame 0l Groupi Chapter 5 Variables 5 2 2 Axis Variables I O Registers 2 Set the items and then click the OK Button HF Group Definition Group List Axis Specification Group Mo of Group Control axis Mo 4 l roupi _ ce Group List When a number is entered for No of Group the group number and name will be displayed The group name can be changed by clicking the cell to display the text cursor and then changing the name When the group name is clicked the specified axes for that group will be displayed in the Axis Specification Field Axis Specification Group Name Set the axis specifications for the selected group When the number of controlled axes is entered in the Control Axis No Field the fields for setting
183. alue Maximum Value Blue Within the set range Black Within the set range Red Over the set value Red Over the set value Monitor register SWO0005 Monitor register SW00006 Blue Within the set range Black Within the set range Red Over the set value Red Over the set value Monitor register SW00011 Monitor register SW00012 Indicator color Black Monitor register SW00004 Indicator color Black Monitor register SW00010 Setting Button When this button is clicked the Scan Time Setting screen in the Environment Setting Dialog Box is displayed and the scan time can be changed Environment Setting PS System PS Security High speed Scan ES Setup Setting value 10 0 me 1 0ms 32 0ms System Setting em ocan Time Setting PS Ladder Masinnurn value rs Ez c language FP variable Low speed Scan P Monitor Setting Value 200 0 me 2 0me 300 0m EI Transfer Current Walue m Ez Print i Maximum Value m Curent alue m A 1 The operation of the application which depends at the scan time changes when change the setting value 2 Please do not set setting value smaller than current value The watchdog error occurs Clear Button When this button is clicked the maximum value for the high speed or low speed scan is cleared 6 11 6 12 Chapter 6 Monitoring 6 2 5 System Monitor 2 Pop up Display When an Error Is Detected When automatic notification of alarms is set in the System Monitor screen of t
184. and right click to display the pop up menu and select Jump from the pop up menu If the corresponding ladder program is not already open it will be automatically opened to jump to the corresponding coil Right click in the list field of the Forced Coil List Subwindow and select Cross Reference from the pop up menu that appears Alternatively select Debug Cross Reference from the Main Menu The registers set for the forced status coil will be searched and the search results will be displayed in the Cross Reference Subwindow Ifa ladder program is edited while the search results are displayed the coils of the program that being edited is shown in gray 3 57 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 5 7 Referencing Called Programs 3 5 Referencing Called Programs Programs called using the SEE or FUNC instructions can be opened and confirmed 1 Select the SEE or FUNC instruction object for the program to be checked and select Debug REFER from the Main Menu Start HOG HO6 01 ABC H06 02 ABCDE 5 OG DRIVE AT 1ST AXIS ageng e207 Lil 2 The referenced program will be displayed in the Edit Window Program information such as lt H06 step 0 in the diagram below will be displayed in the tab for the referenced lt HOG step 0 program Start H06 HO6 01 AB _ gt a D OG DRIVE AT 15T AXIS a 0 6 Sampling Relay 0 6 Sampling Relay at DBOOO0 AO HighScan HalfSecond High
185. anging Edit Window Displays The Ladder Program Edit Window can be used to change the magnification and either hide or display variables register addresses and comments for objects In addition various elements object colors fonts etc in the Ladder Program Edit Window can be set optionally Changing the Display Magnification The magnification of the Ladder Program Edit Window can be changed by selecting View Zoom from the Main Menu in the Ladder Magnification Dialog Box that will be displayed Ladder Magnification x Magnification Yo The display magnification can be changed to 10 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 or 200 by clicking the drop down arrow and selecting the magnification from the list The number of the display magnification is set in 1 increments by directly entering the number 10 to 500 into the Magnification Box Click the OK Button to close the dialog box and change the display magnification Click the Cancel Button to cancel the setting and close the dialog box Click the Apply Button to change the display magnification while leaving the dialog box open so that the display magnification can be changed again 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs Displaying or Hiding Addresses Variables and Comments Register addresses variables and comments for instruction objects can be either displayed or hidden by clicking their respective icons in the Ladder Editor Toolbar When variables are hidden the regis
186. appear asking for confirmation MPE 20 Ver 6 P Import the selected user structure Do vou want to continue 5 58 5 8 Exporting Importing Variables 4 Click Yes The selected structures will start importing and the results will appear in the Output Subwin dow Memberi 400000 Member Member2 LO000OT Member ME mber3 B 000D3E MEMBER Member 400011 TEST TEST 27w 0000r TESTA While reading the data User Structure Structure Complete End of import User structure End of import Eror Caution 5 59 Chapter 5 Variables 5 8 5 Importing MPE720 Version 5 CMT Files 9 8 5 Importing MPE720 Version 5 CMT Files The registers and comments used in the comment list of MPE720 version 5 can be imported to MPE720 version 6 The data of the file in the export destination will be overwritten with the data of the imported file The table below lists the comment files that can be imported CMT files cannot be edited CMT files cannot be exported from MPE720 version 6 to MPE720 version 5 pooner CMT Lowalcommens foreach progam OOOO Individual CMT File Created on MPE720 version 5 MB 00 CMT MPE720 Register version 6 Comments 5 60 5 8 Exporting Importing Variables 1 Importing Comment Data Created on MPE720 Version 5 The local comment and register data created on the MPE720 version 5 for each program can be individually imported to the MPE720 version 6 by using the f
187. archy structure 2 Printing Programs as a Batch Programs in a program folder High speed Low speed Start Interrupt and Function or a program containing lower hierarchical level programs can be selected for batch printing 1 Select a program folder High speed Low speed Start Interrupt or Function or select a program that contains programs of lower hierarchical levels from the Ladder Subwindow Then right click the selected folder or program and select Print from the pop up menu When the selected program contains programs of lower hierarchical levels the following message will appear MPE 20 Ver 6 Is the H Main Program printed Please select the printed program clicking Select button when you print the program of the subordinate at the same time etl Select Cancel When a program folder is selected the above message will not appear Proceed to step 3 2 Click one of three buttons Print Click this button to print only the selected program The rest of the operation is the same as described in b Executing Print from Ladder Subwindow of 70 1 3 1 Printing Each Ladder Program Select Click this button to print the selected program together with the lower hierarchical level programs Cancel Click this button to cancel printing When the Select Button is clicked the Print Dialog Box will appear 10 6 3 5 10 1 Printing Ladder Programs All the check boxes of the programs under th
188. ard run side limit signal OBxx05A selection ForwardLimit InputSelect OBxx05B INPUT signal for zero point return Gain Gain OBxx00B OWxx2E OWxx30 OWxx31 OWxx32 OWxx33 IWxx04 IBxx040 IBxx041 IBxx042 IBxx043 IBxx044 IBxx045 IBxx046 IBxx048 IBxx049 IBxx04D IBxx053 IBxx054 IntegralClear Integration reset PositionLoop Position loop gain PositionFeedForward Speed feed forward compensation SpeedCompensation Speed compensation PositionIntegration Position integration time constant PrimaryLagTimeConstant Primary delay time constant Alarm Alarm ServoAlarm Servo driver error P OT N OT P SOT N_SOT ServoOff POSCOMPTimeOut SpeedOutOfRange FollowingError NotZRNC ABSEncoderOverrange Positive overtravel Negative overtravel Positive soft limit Negative soft limit Servo OFF Positioning time over Excessive speed Excessively following error Zero point not set ABS encoder count exceeded PGDisconnectedError PG disconnection error Receiving error of accumulated number of IBxx055 rotations AccumlatedRotationsReceiveError IBxx024 IBxx026 IBxx027 IBxx02B MotionCommand Motion command setting error P OT N OT AnalogAdjustNotReady Warning Positive overtravel Negative overtravel Analog adjust not ready warning ServoParameter Servo parameter MotionSubCommand Motion sub command parameter OWxx5C ILxx56 FixParameterNumber Fixed parameter number FixParameter Value Fixed parameter monitor
189. ariable Column of the register in the import source CSV file is blank but a variable is set for the same register in the project file of the import destination the variable in the import destination will not be overwritten and will remain unchanged 9 42 5 8 Exporting Importing Variables The following diagram illustrates the data export and import operation flow A CSV file STEP CSV O M and C registers I O variables Global variables Comments Structures MPE720 version 6 Open and edit 2 Procedures to Export Import Data a Export The assigned global variables and comments can be exported to a CSV file by using the following procedure 1 Select File Export Global variables and comments from the main menu The Save As Dialog Box will appear 2 Select a folder as the export destination from the Save in drop down list and enter a file name in the File name field Then click Save Save in CSV file A E Book ESY 2 Bh Book2 csv My Recent S HO1 csv Documents AL Ho2 csv 8 HO3 03 cs 3 H CS Bh MP2300 csv Desktop ALI TEST csv My Documents as My Computer e Save as type Variable comment file cs The Export Dialog Box will appear s 5 43 5 44 Chapter 5 Variables 5 8 1 Exporting Importing Global Variables I O Variables and Comments 3 All the check boxes of variables and comments in the CSV file specified in st
190. ariable that variable due to address is used by the application Do vou want to continue to register Yes Assigns the register to the variable to be added No Cancels new variable assignment The following sections describe how to register each of these variables 5 11 Chapter 5 Variables 5 3 1 Variables that can be Referred from Any Program 5 3 1 Variables that can be Referred from Any Program 1 Global Variables M Registers E Variable M register addresses can be assigned as variables and they are displayed aera in folders classified by data type in the Variable Subwindow They can F iable be referenced in any project file Tosara S i Global Variable fia Word 1 Long E Float fa Address is Constant Variable fig User structure a Ladder Instruction Variable a Assigning Global Variables Use the following procedure to assign global variables 1 Inthe Variable Subwindow right click the Global Variable Folder or the folder of the data type to be registered Bit Word Long Float or Address and select Add from the pop up menu The Variable Registration Dialog Box will be displayed In the Register Field the lowest address among the M registers for which variable assignment on is currently possible will be displayed 2 Enter the register address in the Register Field Make the settings within the range for M registers MB 000000 to 65534F MW 00000 to 65534
191. asking for confirmation will be displayed A The scope definition will be saved OK Click the Yes Button The setting will be saved and the background in the Variable Field will return to white Click the Start Button in the Operation Panel to start tracing and click the Stop Button to stop Alternatively click the Snap Button to upload the current contents of the trace memory A message will be displayed while the data is being obtained and the graph will be displayed in the Graph Area The graphs can be toggled between a trend graph and an X Y graph e Detailed settings can be made in the List Area for relevant variables including not only setting the variables but setting the display colors for graphs and displaying or hiding graphs For details refer to 7 6 5 Monitor Pages The method for displaying graphs can be set in detail in the Graph Area For details refer to 7 5 Graph Area Operations e A wide range of data trace operations can be executed using the buttons in the operation panel For details refer to 7 4 Operation Panel Chapter 7 Data Tracing 7 4 1 Operation Panel Button Functions 7 4 Operation Panel 7 4 1 Operation Panel Button Functions Operation Panel Start Scopel x el SIA ee E ae LILA E 20000 20000 15000 15000 For description purposes all of the above icons are shown as active The buttons on the operation panel have the following func
192. asted 3 Moving Rungs by Dragging 1 Select and drag the number block of the rung that is to be moved An UP pointer A between the rungs will be displayed where the moved rung will be dropped 2 Release the mouse button when the A symbol is displayed at the destination position 4 Deleting Rungs 1 Select the number block of the rung to be deleted and then select Edit Delete from the Main Menu Alternatively right click the rung number block and select Delete from the pop up menu that will be displayed Another method is to press the Delete Key on the keyboard Rung comment objects can be moved and deleted using the same methods as in 3 and 4 3 23 3 24 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 3 8 Inserting Branches 3 3 8 Inserting Branches There are four ways of inserting new branches e Individually inserting an empty branch e Inserting an empty branch by using the branch cursor e Copying instructions and arranging them in parallel e Arranging any instructions in parallel Branches can only be inserted on the same rung Branches cannot be created that straddle multiple rungs Individually Inserting an Empty Branch This method individually inserts an empty branch object 1 Click the position where the branch is to be inserted to display an input guide 2 Select Program Insert Branch from the Main Menu Alternatively right click the input guide and select Insert Branch from the pop up menu th
193. at an input guide position or before a selected instruction object E Inserting at an Input Guide Position Click the entry position that the ladder instruction is inserted to display the input guide and then execute any of the following operations e Click an icon in the Ladder Instruction Toolbar e Drag and drop an instruction from the Ladder Instruction Subwindow to the input guide e Right click the input guide and select Instruction Instruction Type Instruction from the pop up menu that will be displayed e Select Program Insert Instruction Instruction Type Instruction from the Main Menu e Paste a cut or copied instruction object E Inserting before an Instruction Object Click to select the instruction object at the insertion position and then execute any of the following operations e Right click the selected object and select Insert Instruction Instruction Type Instruction from the pop up menu that will be displayed e Select Program Insert Instruction Instruction Type Instruction from the Main Menu e Paste a cut or copied instruction object 2 Entering Directly to the Input Guide This method is used to directly enter the instruction name and instruction key allocation to the input guide The instruction name and instruction key allocation can be selected from the list The instruction key allocation is the allocation of shortcut keys for instruction objects Example N O conta
194. at an instruction belonging to the RELAY MATH LOGIC excluding RCHK instructions FUNCTION MOVE or DDC category is used Even when no variable comment is being used in the Comment Field comments for SEE and FUNC instructions cannot be edited using the Comment Editor The names for the specified programs are displayed E Variable Comments Comments can be edited by double clicking the Comment Field to display the Edit variable Dialog Box For details refer to 5 3 1 d Editing I O Module Names and Comments M Edit variable H Register Comment Comment E Comments Other Than Variable Comments Editing is enabled by double clicking the Comment Field to display the Comment Editor m Comment Editor commenti lt gt When any of the following operations is performed while the Comment Field is selected the mode will be changed to Comment Edit Mode If any text has already been entered that text will be selected e Select Program Edit Comment from the Main Menu e Press the F2 Key e Right click a comment and select Edit Comment from the pop up menu that will be displayed 3 33 3 34 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 3 14 Entering and Editing Expressions for EXPRESSION Instructions 3 3 14 Entering and Editing Expressions for EXPRESSION Instructions The Expression Editor will displayed Editing can then be enabled by double clicking the Expression Field in an EXPRESSION instruction object EXPRE
195. at will be displayed Another method is to press the Ctrl B Keys An empty branch will be inserted with branch points before and after the input guide Running Daoooo 10 DBOOO0d 4 Semon DaOoooooo o000 HL 4 Inserting an Empty Branch by Using the Branch Cursor This method specifies the branch starting and ending points and inserts an empty branch 1 Click one end of the position where the branch is to be inserted to display an input guide 2 Either click the Create Branch Mode Icon TZ in the Ladder Edit Toolbar or select Program Create Branch Mode from the Main Menu Alternatively press the Ctri I Keys The cursor will be changed for creating branches 3 Click the input guide The branch will be displayed from the input guide position and the end point will be moved with the cursor 4 Move the cursor to display a V symbol for the branch end point and click the V Running DaOoooo 10 DBOOO0d 4 Semon DaOoooooo ggg ML 4 ogag ML 4 An empty branch will be inserted around the instruction objects peoooo44 Running DaOoooo 10 Semon Daoooood ggg L 41 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs 3 Copying Instructions and Arranging Them In Parallel This method can be used to copy a selected instruction object and create a parallel branch 1 Click to select an instruction object to be copied to a branch 2 Right click the selected instruction object and select Insert Branch from the pop up menu that
196. ata Tracing 7 1 Other Functions 7 27 7 7 1 Saving and Deleting Trace Definition Data and Setting Defaults 7 27 7 7 2 Print Settings 7 27 7 7 3 Optional Settings 7 28 7 1 Overview of Data Tracing 7 1 Overview of Data Tracing 7 1 1 What is Data Tracing Data tracing is one of the MPE720 version 6 monitoring functions While connected to the Machine Controller 1 e while online data tracing can be used to collect Machine Controller I O data process it and display it in graph format This function can be used for monitoring the operating status of a program or for debugging Start Scopel x 500 0 550 0 600 0 lt 7 am g o Monitor E xv Graph L Fie1 Fie2 Ll is Normal v ENAA Fre Elcatcutate E Wariable Progam Comment Yavisscale 000 1000 2m0 50 50 50 Program Calendar Secor Auto r r r r r r No of monitored data 00100 Latest monitor time 00 00 24 22 37 33 Scope stopp Fig 7 1 Example of a Graph 1 3 Chapter 7 Data Tracing 7 2 1 Starting a Data Trace Window 7 2 Data Trace Windows 7 2 1 Starting a Data Trace Window Select Monitor Scope from the Launcher A Data Trace Window will be displayed in the Main Window With MPE720 version 6 a
197. ata of POSMAX turns POSMAX turn number presetting completed TPRSE Speed PresetTurns PresetComplete IBxx0C9 Speed OLxx10 OLxx16 OLxx36 OLxx38 OWxx3A Speed Speed reference SecondlySpeedCompensation Secondary speed compensation Acceleration Linear acceleration time Deceleration Linear deceleration time S_CurveTime S curve acceleration time Bias speed for exponential acceleration decelera tion filter Feedback speed Torque BiasSpeedForExponentialAccelerationD ecelerationFilter FeedbackSpeed OWxx3B ILxx40 Torque OLxx0C ILxx42 Torque Torque reference TorqueMonitor Torque reference monitor Gain Gain OWxx31 IWxx04 IBxx045 IWxx01 IBxx021 IBxx022 IBxx024 SpeedCompensation Speed compensation Alarm Servo OFF Over range parameter number Alarm ServoOff ParameterNumber SettingParameter Setting parameter error FixedParamter Fixed parameter error MotionCommand Motion command setting error ServoParameter Servo parameter MotionSubCommand Motion sub command parameter OWxx5C ILxx56 Fixed parameter monitor FixParameterNumber Fixed parameter number FixParameter Value 4 SVA Module Variables A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details ServoOn MLOCK AlarmClear Ready Running ServoReady MLKL AbsoluteEncoderCumulativeRevolutions InitialNumberOfIncrementalPulses UnitsSelection SignalSelection MotionCommand CommandCode ResponseCode Control Pause Abort Dir
198. ayed For details on the contents of the display and the setting method refer to 7 5 7 X Y Graphs Import Button E When this button is clicked the Select File Dialog Box is displayed and trace data and data trace definitions can be read from selected files to the Data Trace Window Export Button When this button is clicked the Select File Dialog Box is displayed and trace data and data trace definitions can be written from the Data Trace Window to specified files Print Button 44 When this button is clicked the Select File Dialog Box is displayed and trace data and data trace definitions can be saved to selected files 7 6 7 4 Operation Panel 7 4 2 Trigger and Configuration Dialog Box The Trigger and Configuration Dialog Box is displayed by clicking the Trigger and Configuration Button Migrigser on the operation panel To toggle between a simple display and a detailed display click the Simple Button or the Detail Button Trigger and Configuration Sampling High speed scan O Scope Interval of Program ms Trigger and Configuration Sampling High speed scan Y Scope Interval of Program SS ms Scope Mo of Times Auto Scope Mo of Times w Auto Initiate Trigger Condition Initiate Trigger Condition Terminate Trigger Condition Simple Display ma Terminatez a Delay Detailed Display The following table shows each item in the detailed display Scope Name
199. base block command A 13 A 14 A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details Variable Status Alarm Warning CommandReady BaseBlock PowerON DuringRunning ZeroSpeed ReverseOperation DuringReset DuringSpeedCoincident InverterReady OPEError MomentaryPowerCut RemoteOperation MotorSelection SetZeroCompleted MultiFuncctionTerminalOutputOption ConstantOutputM 1M2MAMB PHC1OutputConstantP 1 PC PHC2OutputConstantP2PC PHC3OutputConstantP3PC PHC4OutputConstantP4PC DigitalInputTerminalOption Terminal 1 Status Terminal2 Status Terminal3 Status Terminal4Status Terminal5 Status Terminal6Status Terminal7Status Terminal8 Status Terminal9Status Terminal 1 0Status Terminal 11 Status Terminal12Status Inverter InverterAlarmMonitorNumber AuxiliaryInverterAlarmMonitorNumber InverterType InverterSoftware VersionCommunication Board InverterSoftware VersionMain Register IWxx10 IBxx100 IBxx101 IBxx102 IBxx103 IBxx 104 IBxx105 IBxx106 IBxx107 IBxx 108 IBxx109 IBxxl0A IBxx10B IBxx10C IBxx10D IBxx1l0E IBxx10F OWxx16 OBxx160 OBxx161 OBxx162 OBxx163 OBxx164 IWxx1D IBxx1D0 IBxx1D1 IBxx1D2 IBxx1D3 IBxx1D4 IBxx1D5 IBxx1D6 IBxx1D7 IBxx1D8 IBxx1D9 IBxx1DA IBxx1DB OWxx32 OWxx33 IWxx50 OWxx60 IWxx68 Comments Status Alarm Warning Command ready Base block Power ON During running Zero speed Reverse operation During reset During speed coincidence Inverter ready OPE error Momentary power cu
200. be enabled when starting From Flash memory Click OK Click the Close Button in the upper right to close the Security Setting Dialog Box If saving to flash memory is required save the settings to the flash memory 1 91 1 92 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 12 4 Online Security b Clearing Online Security Setting The online security setting can be cleared by using the following procedure 1 With the Machine Controller connected to the MPE720 version 6 online select Online Security Setting from the main menu The Security Setting Dialog Box will appear mf Security Setting Current Status File Reading Restricted Restriction Privilege 1 Restriction Privilege 1 r and higher are restricted MP2200 CPU O is used save to CPU gt C4RD is prohibited regardless of the restriction privilege when the File reading restriction is set Security Key Change the Security Key 2 Enter the correct security key password in the Security Key Field and then click Set to None The following message will appear asking for confirmation MPE 20 Ver 6 Security setting has been deleted The security settings must be saved to flash memory to be effective when starting From flash memory 3 Click OK Click the Close button in the upper right to close the Security Setting Dialog Box If saving to flash memory is required save the change to the flash memory 1 12 Security
201. before creating a MAL file 1 Start MPE720 version 6 For details refer to 1 4 1 Starting MPE720 Version 6 2 Select File Open Project from the Main Menu Alternatively select Open under Project in the Start Window The Open Project Dialog Box will be displayed AMAL file can be opened by dragging and dropping into an MPE720 Ver 6 Window that is already open If doing that skip to step 4 3 Selecta file with an MAL extension and click the Open Button Open Project Look in A s My Recent Documents Desktop O ProjectFile Data Eng Gold 3 1000 ymw G3 1117 01 MW G23 1117 02 YW 23 2300 MW G23 MP2100 YW 23 MP2100M YM G23 mp2200 MW 23 P2300 MW 23 TESTOOS YMW E TEST MAL Jest ymw My Documents My Computer z My Network File name v Files of type All Project Files MW MAL v A message asking for confirmation will be displayed MPE720 Ver A It is necessary ko convert a current project Form to open TEST MAL After converts is TESTOS YM opened j Cancel 4 Click the OK Button Conversion to a project file will begin and a conversion log will be displayed in the Output Subwindow When the conversion has been successfully completed the message notifying that Conversion has been completed will be displayed in the Output Subwindow Decompression the TEST MAL TEST MAL is converted into TES TOOS4 My
202. cale OFFset Vertical Scale Horizontal Scale M1 Calendar Seconds SW 00018 Vertical Offset Horizontal Offset af There is no need to select the object for scale adjustment Offset adjustment is valid when an offset adjustment object is selected in the Se ect Field of the list See note Offset adjustment cannot be used without selecting an object It also cannot be used if the selection is cleared after the dialog box is displayed If that occurs it can be used by selecting an offset adjustment object from the list to activate it Note Use the Select Field in the list to select the offset adjustment object On Monitor Pages and File Pages the selected object will be a Monitor Variable The offset adjustment horizontal axis will be the sampling time and the vertical axis will be the data value of the selected Monitor Variable On an X Y Display Page the Monitor Variables set for the vertical and horizontal axes become the objects The offset adjustment horizontal and vertical axes will be the data values for the variables that are set For details on pages refer to 7 6 1 Changing Pages The following table shows the items to be set in the Scale Object Adjust Dialog Box Vertical Scale Used to set the vertical scale Enter a Set Value value directly or use the spin buttons apne ea eis Vertical Scale Used to adjust the vertical scale Drag Adjustment Bar up and down using the mouse Horizontal a Scale Adjust ment
203. cessibility Options oY Performance and Maintenance The Add or Remove Programs Window will be displayed 3 Select YASKAWA MPE720 Ver 6 from the list of programs and click the Remove Button Add or Remove Programs nae Currently installed programs Sort by ata Change or i Intel R Extreme Graphics 2 Driver Remove Programs i Intel R PRO Network Adapters and Drivers i YASKAWA Communication Manager Size 0 62MB AS YASKAWA Electronic CamTool Size 2 40MB Add New nin Seo do Fen Programs YASKAWA MPETZO Yer b Size 42 76MB Used occasionally E Last Used On 11 9205 To remove this program From your computer click Remove f Remove Add Remove Remove Windows Components A dialog box will be displayed for confirmation that the program is to be removed Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 3 4 Uninstalling MPE720 Version 6 4 Click the OK Button Confirm Uninstall E 1 4re you sure you want to completely remove YASKAWA MPEFZO Ver 6 and all of its Features f Cancel The operation to uninstall MPE720 version 6 will begin When uninstall is finished the Maintenance Complete Window will be displayed 5 Click the Finish Button YASKAWA MPE720 Ver 6 InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for YASKAWA MPE720 Yer 6 The InstallShield Wizard will install YASKAWA MPE 720 Ver 6 on your computer To continue click Next InstallShield
204. ck the Close Button for the Comment List Tab Page to exit the list display Enter the desired register address in the Register input field in the Comment List Tab Page The list will scroll to display the entered register address 9 35 Chapter 5 Variables 5 7 1 Referencing Comment Lists 2 Referencing D A X Y and Z Register Comments For the D A X Y and Z registers use the following procedure to specify the program to be referenced and to display the comment list 1 Double click Comment List in the Variable Subwindow or the Local Variable Subwindow The comment list will be opened in the Main Window 2 Select from the Register List the register that is to be referenced or select Open from the pop up menu that will be displayed The comment list for the selected register will be displayed 3 Specify the data type to be referenced using the BIT WORD LONG FLOAT or ADDRESS Button 4 Click the drop down arrow for the Program Field and select from the list the program to be referenced The comment list for the specified program register and data type will be displayed Comment List Register List ff H E Register annet I Input Register anet 0 Output Register beeen a M Data Register oo fay C Constant Register El C Internal Register pe E Internal Constant Register HO4 main program for positioning beeen Bl Function Input Register HO2 ma
205. closed and the changed contents will be reflected in the Ladder Program Edit Window When the Cancel Button Is Clicked Changes to the settings in all tab pages will be cancelled and the Editor Option Dialog Box will be closed When the Apply Button Is Clicked Changes to the settings in all tab pages are overwritten and are immediately reflected The Editor Option Dialog Box remains open allowing further settings to be made Be careful when clicking the Apply Button because changes made to settings in other tab pages will be over written at the same time 3 16 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 3 4 Changing Edit Window Displays a Color Tab Page Editor Option Color Font Ladder Key Allocation ltem Ladder Window v Category RELAY 7 Color Background Text Td EES Line a Cancel The following items can be set Item Item Click the drop down arrow and select the item to be set Refer to the illustration Ladder Window v on the left When an item is selected the display in the Sample Field will be changed to the current value of the selected object Category Click the drop down arrow and select the instruction category to be set Refer to the illustration on the left If Instruction or Instruction Name is selected from the Jtem Combo box and the instruction category is selected from the Category Comb box the display in the Sample Field will be changed to the current va
206. command Motion command execution completed COMPLETE MotionSubCommand Motion sub command execution completed COMPLETE A 5 A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details Position Command Sa Position reference MoveType OBxx095 Position reference type PhaseCompensationType OBxx096 Phase compensation type with an electronic cam Position Position reference setting StepDistance STEP distance EXPOffset External positioning move distance PhaseCompensation Phase compensation PhasePositionLoopEnable Disable phase reference generation Setting ef Position setting POSCOMP Width Position completed width NEARWidth Position completed width 2 ZERO Width Home window POSCOMPTimeOut Position complete timeout PERRLevel Deviation abnormal detection error level Position Setting PERRLi Position S z Ss ti mY OLxx22 Deviation abnormal detection value Status fed Position status Distribution completed DEN POSCOMP Positioning completed POSCOMP NEAR Position proximity NEAR ZERO Zero point position ZERO ZRNC Zero point return Setting completed ZRNC Monitor fee Position monitor TPOS Machine coordinate target position TPOS CPOS Target position CPOS MPOS Machine coordinate system position MPOS APOS Machine coordinate feedback position APOS LPOS Machine coordinate latch position LPOS Position error PERR Turns POSMAX number of turns Latch fe Latch Enable Latch request EnableComplete Latch
207. ct The instruction key allocation can be changed For details refer to 3 3 4 3 Changing Edit Window Displays Editor Options 1 Click the position that the ladder instruction is inserted to display the input guide 2 Enter the instruction name or instruction key allocation Alternatively press any key on the keyboard A list of instruction names will be displayed as shown below lt Less Than 4 lt B Less Than or Equal A lt B gt gt Not Equal Al B Equal 4 B gt Greater Than A B gt Greater Than or Equal 4 gt B 3 28 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs 3 Enter the instruction name and instruction key allocation and press the Enter Key or select the instruction name and instruction key allocation from the list The instruction object will be inserted at the input guide position Insertion of the instruction can be cancelled by pressing the Esc Key or clicking outside of the list and field in the Ladder Edit Window before pressing the Enter Key or clicking in the list If an item is selected highlighted in the list however the name and key allocation will be saved even if attempts to cancel the operation are made 3 Instruction Object Component Names The following illustration shows the names of the components in an example of a newly inserted instruction object 1 Instruction Name Field 2 Comment Field Comment Display Mode 5 Min Max Button 3 Variable Name Field
208. ction toolbar 3 13 variable subwindow 3 13 main menu 1 24 main program disabled processing 1 69 main windows 1 24 managing ladder program 3 42 managing programs in the ladder subwindow 3 40 monitor 1 50 monitor pages 7 20 monitor variables 7 4 Motion Display Property Dialog Box 4 7 motion parameters batch import 2 11 export 2 9 import 2 11 import export 2 6 individual import 2 14 motion program 4 2 MPE O Version G a SAn 232s Seer ee as Ses Seen 1 3 MPE720 version 6 Window 1 21 N names of window components 1 24 O Object Variable Setting Dialog Box 7 24 objects 3 12 offline current value 6 9 online current value 6 8 online security 1 90 Open DWG Setting Dialog Box 3 9 Open Project Dialog
209. ctures 4 Enter the variable name in the Variable Name Field and comment in the Comment Field and click the OK Button Enter up to 60 alphanumeric characters in the Variable Name Field Variable names that have already been assigned cannot be used again in the same program The same address can be assigned for different data types e g ABOOO00 and AWO00000 When the address is assigned however a message will be displayed notifying that A malfunction may occur A maximum of 255 alphanumeric characters can be entered in the Comment Field Carriage returns and line feeds cannot be used in the comments 0 24 5 3 Variables that Can Be Set by the User Click the OK Button The Variable Registration Dialog Box will be closed and the assigned variable will be displayed in the Local Variable Subwindow VAR_ will be displayed at the beginning of the variable name to indicate that it is a local variable Local Variable fee Register Eh Comment List fe variable ES Internal variable les Function External Variable agenes e207 In programs where the assigned variable is used the assigned variable name will be displayed for the instruction object for the applicable register b Editing and Deleting Function External Variables The following procedure can be used to edit or delete a function variable 1 Open the relevant function program and display it in the foreground of the
210. d 1 7 3 Opening Project Files 1 21 1 22 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 4 1 Starting MPE720 Version 6 3 Starting from a Project File If a project file has already been created either double click or right click the icon and then select Open Refer to 1 7 Project Files MPE720 version 6 will start and the MPE720 Ver 6 Window will appear as shown below Project Files gt File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Q ax E a P Search Key Address EQ Hproject Fies OO 3 MIPS O10 vi a 5 MP2200 02 My FE HP MPE720 Ver 6 TESTFILE MP2300 Start At File Edit View Online Compile Debug Window Help DS a GS Bd bo Te te e 10 On 20 EE Offline MP2300 K Documents and Settings Owner Desktop TESTFILE YMW YASKAWA ELECTRIC CO Programming Monitor LEU Utility Scantime setting Module configuration adie TET my E II TESTFILE MP2300 fi Ladder program e e e e ce ce Ge ee el g J a High speed Communications Setting E Low speed Connection Start B Interrupt Disconnection Function TEA TESTFILE YMW zzz Y MW aaa YMW mpe YMW E kadder Motion Ladder Watch 1 variable Value Comment Praga output 2 Transfer Register List 1 OForce Coil List X cross Reference 1 watch 1 Ready When MPE720 version 6 is started from a project file then only Project and Help will be dis
211. d Descriptions of Monitoring Operations 2 Editing Values With the watch function double clicking the Value Field or pressing the F2 Key will display the text cursor in the Value Field and enable the following editing operations e Entering data directly e Copying and pasting Press the Enter Key to save the edited data While online the changes in the data will be directly reflected in Machine Controller operations Comments cannot be edited Chapter 6 Monitoring 6 2 3 Displaying Online Current Value 6 2 3 Displaying Online Current Value While connected to the Machine Controller while online the status of the following items can be monitored on the ladder program screen e The current values for each object are displayed in blue characters e Constant and coil instructions are highlighted when the register value is 1 e IF and ELSE instructions are highlighted when the condition is satisfied MB00OODZ MB0000O10 0000 HL 4 ee eee ooo TWLF Sre SUVOOOSO WLF Dest Dwo002S HL 4 o o a eee OA F a003 WLF Sre 01000 WLF Dest Dwoonz2 HL 1 1000 1000 Always ON SB000004 Ss ey rression A o004 MLE0100 DLO0010 HL 4 O 0 ML30102 DOOD ML30110 p001 4 O 0 ML30112 p001 O 0 ML30114 300000 S00000 300000 a lt tli gt Fig 6 1 Display Example of Register Current Value Y If is used in an EXPRESSION instruction the operation item on the right side of the equatio
212. d Speed 0000 T MLO064 Interpolation Acceleration Time Change 00003 T MLOO066 Interpolation Deceleration Time Change 00004 Al MLOTO60 FRLOI082 Linear Interpolation 00005 AT In position Check 00006 Program End Number of CP steps 6 Fig 4 1 Motion Program Example 4 1 2 Main Programs and Sub Programs Motion programs consist of main programs MPMxxx and sub programs MPSxxx Main programs are called directly from ladder programs and sub programs are called from either main programs or other sub programs The xxx represents a number from 1 to 256 4 1 3 Group Definitions With motion programs the axes involved in operations are organized into individual groups and programs can be cre ated for each group When a motion program is created the axis group to which the program applies is specified in a dialog box Mf Group Definition Group List Axis Specification BOND_STAGE No of Group Control Axis No Group Name Axis Circuit Axis No Logical Axis N 01 BOND_STAGE 01 1 1 Al 02 1 2 Bi o3 3 4 2 4 2 Creating New Motion Programs 4 2 Creating New Motion Programs Use the procedure described below to create a new motion program The Module Configuration must be defined for a new motion program to be created Refer to 2 1 Module Configura tion and set the Module Configuration 1 Double click the Motion Programs Folder in the Motion Subwin
213. d instruction object and select Paste from the pop up menu that will be displayed Another method is to press the Ctrl V Keys If an input guide was displayed in step 3 then the instruction object selected in step 1 will be inserted at that position If an instruction object was selected in step 3 then the instruction object selected in step 1 will be inserted in parallel with that object 2 Moving Objects by Dragging 1 Select the instruction object that is to be moved and then drag it A V symbol will be displayed at the rung where the instruction object is dragged 2 Release the mouse button when the V is displayed at the destination position 3 Deleting Instruction Objects 1 Select the instruction object that is to be deleted and then either select Edit Delete from the Main Menu or right click the instruction object and select Delete from the pop up menu that will be displayed The instruction object can also be deleted by pressing the Delete Key 4 Changing instructions Instructions that have already been entered can be changed to other instructions 1 Select the instruction object that is to be changed and click the Instruction Name Field Alternatively select Program Edit Instruction from the Main Menu Another method is to right click the instruction object and select Edit Instruction from the pop up menu that will displayed The instruction name will be selected and the List Button will be displayed L
214. ddress can be assigned for different data types e g MB00000 and MWO0000 When the address is assigned however a message will be displayed notifying that A malfunction may occur A maximum of 255 alphanumeric characters can be entered in the Comment Field Carriage returns and line feeds cannot be used in the comments Click the OK Button The Variable Registration Dialog Box will be closed and the assigned variable will be 5 displayed in the Variable Subwindow 2 Gy fee Register 23 Comment List fe Variable fia System Variable Axis Variable fe 10 Variable fest Global Variable fi Bit hee EQ Init DatafMBOoo000 fia Word E Long E Float a Address E Constant Variable User structure f Ladder Instruction Variable In the program where the assigned variable is used the assigned variable name will be displayed for the instruction object of the applicable address 9 13 5 14 Chapter 5 Variables 5 3 1 Variables that can be Referred from Any Program b Creating System Structures A system structure is a set of variables prepared in advance with an address format for a ladder instruction Click the Structure Button in the Variable Registration Dialog Box to create a structure Use the following procedure to create a system structure in the Variable Registration Dialog Box 1 Select the structure from the list in the System Structure Name Field
215. der program Click the Type Field and then select BIT WORD LONG or FLOAT as the data type Addresses Input No Set the number of addresses for FUNC instruction objects Function Output No Set the number of data objects to be output from FUNC instruction objects Click the Type Field and then select BIT WORD LONG or FLOAT as the data type After a function has been set it will be displayed in the right side of the Create New Program Dialog Box BIT B WAL BIT B WAL BIT B WAL BIT B WAL BIT B WAL ADDRESS Example of function with 2 inputs 3 outputs and 1 address 3 35 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 3 15 Creating Functions 4 Click the OK Button in the Create New Program Dialog Box The function will be created and will be displayed under the Function Folder in the Ladder Subwindow Ey Program DEF MP2300 ay Ladder program Ei High speed H Low speed E Start H Interrupt ar Function FUNCO 3 36 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs 3 3 16 Calling Functions The following procedure can be used to call functions that have been created under the Function Folder in the Ladder Subwindow for the ladder program 1 Click the position where the function is to be entered in the Ladder Program Edit Window The pointer will change to a V to show where the data is to be entered 2 Select FUNC User Function from the entry list for the instruction DZA Dead
216. der Programs as a Batch 3 59 3 6 2 Converting a Program Individually 3 61 3 1 Overview of Ladder Programming 3 1 Overview of Ladder Programming 3 1 1 What is Ladder Programming A ladder program is a control program for Machine Controllers created using ladder objects Machine control is executed by combining multiple ladder programs using high speed and low speed scan processing Creating and editing ladder programs in the MPE720 version 6 Ladder Program Edit Window is called ladder programming When a ladder program has been transferred to the Machine Controller CPU after a ladder program has been compiled in MPE720 version 6 it can be executed The following diagram shows an example of a ladder program eeeeR RRR Axis Common Settings Heeeeeeeee eeeeee RHE Motion Command Detection PERRRRRREE axis 1 motion command 0 detection Axis 1 motion command 0 MB300010 w F S 0000 WLF StcA X GetValue j NL 1 WLF SrcB 00000 axis 2 motion command 0 detection Axis 2 motion command 0 MB300018 gt C UD amp 0002 WLF StoA Ym GetValue NL 4 WLF SreB 00000 eeeeeeR ee Servo ON Command RRRRRRREE axis 1 Servo ON Servo ON PB Motion controller ready Set bit to energize servo MB300000 X PowerUpSeqDone SenwoOn 0004 aod NL 1 axis 2 servo on Sermo ON PB Motion controller ready Set bit to energize sero MB30000O Y PowerUpSeqDone SenoOn E gt e aI 0007
217. ding from CF card 1 78 writing into the CF card 1 77 changing edit window displays 3 15 changing ladder subwindow displays 3 40 changing the display magnification 3 14 changing the subwindow display type 1 30 closing project files 1 38 Color Tab 3 16 Comment Display Icon 3 15 comment editor 3 21 3 22 3 33 communcation setting 1 40 communication manager 1 11 communication process settings 1 11 Communications Setting Dialog Box 1 56 1 66 1 71 1 79 communications settings 1 55 Compare Flash to RAM Dialog Box 1 81 Compare Program Compare with Controller Dialog Box 1 79 Compare Program Compare with Project File Dialog Box 1 82 comparing flash memory and RAM 1 81 comparing project files 1 82 comparison with the machine controller 1 79 compatibility with MPE720 version5 14 Compile Option Dialog Box 3 38 compile options 3 38 compiling 3 38 compil
218. dow Alternatively right click the Motion Programs Folder and then select Group Definition from the pop up menu or double click the Axis Variable Folder in the Variable Subwindow The Group Definition Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Set each item and then click the OK Button Group List When a number is entered in the No of Group Field the group number and name will be displayed The group name can be changed by clicking the cell to display the text cursor and then changing the name When the group name is clicked the specified axes for that group will be displayed in the Axis Specification Field Axis Specification Group Name Set the axis specifications for the selected group When the number of controlled axes is entered in the Control Axis No Field fields for setting that number of 4 axes will be displayed For the Logical Axis Name double click the cell to display the text cursor and then enter the name and press the Enter Key When the OK Button is clicked the Main program and Sub program Folders will be displayed under the Motion Program Folder in the Motion Subwindow If there are multiple groups the folder for each group will be displayed When a group folder is opened the Main program and Sub program Folders will be displayed 3 Right click the Main program Folder or Sub program Folder and then select New from the pop up menu Program I 2300 MP2300 gt Motion program New Sub pro
219. ds at the scan time changes when change the setting value 2 Please do not set setting value smaller than current value The watchdog error occurs ok _Cancel_ High speed Scan 1 0 ms to 32 0 ms Setting Value Set the scan time for high speed processing programs H Hxx and Hxx xx in units of ms Current Value If offline 0 0 ms is displayed If online the value read from the scan data of the S register in the same way as the system monitor is displayed The maximum current value displayed during monitoring is the higher one of that the maximum value read from the scan data of S register or the maximum value set by the user Maximum Value The setting value can be changed within a specified range While changing the maximum value for high speed or low speed scans Clik Apply to start monitoring Low speed Scan 2 0 ms to 300 0 ms Setting Value Set the scan time for low speed processing programs L Lxx and Lxx xx in units of ms Current Value If offline 0 0 ms is displayed When online displays the value read from the scan data of the S register in the same way as the system monitor is displayed The maximum current value displayed during monitoring is the higher one of that the maximum value read from the scan data of S register or the maximum value set by the user Maximum Value The setting value can be changed within a specified range While changing the maximum value for high speed or low speed scans Click Apply to s
220. dth Position completed width 2 Home window Position complete timeout Deviarion abnormal detection error level Deviation abnormal detection value Position status Distribution completed DEN Positioning completed POSCOMP Position proximity NEAR Zero point position ZERO Zero point return Setting completed ZRNC Position monitor Machine coordinate target position TPOS Target position CPOS Machine coordinate system position MPOS Machine coordinate feedback position APOS POSMAX number of turns Coordinate Zero poing offset Work coordinate system offset POSMAX preset Preset data of POSMAX turns POSMAX turn number presetting completed TPRSE A 25 A 26 A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details Variable Register Comments Speed Speed OLxx10 OWxx18 OWxx19 OLxx36 OLxx38 OWxx3A Speed Speed reference Override Speed override BiasSpeed Bias speed Acceleration Linear acceleration time Deceleration Linear deceleration time S_CurveTime S curve acceleration time Bias speed for exponential acceleration decelera tion filter BiasSpeedForExponentialAccelerationD ecelerationFilter OWxx3B SpeedMonitor ILxx20 Speed reference output monitor ZeroPointReturn Home return Method ApproachSpeed OWxx3C OLxx3E OLxx40 OBxx093 OLxx42 OBxx058 Home return type Approach speed CreepSpeed Creep speed Direction Home direction Offset DecelerationLS Home offset Deceleratio
221. e displayed The Program Property Dialog Box will be displayed a Configuration E Program Property File privilege Read Modified history write Use register num D register Work register 0 register For details on the items to be set for the Configuration refer to 3 2 1 Creating New Ladder Programs The numbers can be set by clicking the Read Write D register and register Fields For details on renaming ladder programs refer to 3 4 3 3 Renaming Ladder Programs 3 4 Managing Programs in the Ladder Subwindow b Detail definition The number of steps being executed and the date and time of the latest modification of the program are displayed The operation to convert data from real numbers to integers can be displayed and set E Program Property qo Configuration Mo of steps 3 E Detail definition lodified 2006 05 22 15 52 32 Modified history Setting the operation Truncation No of steps Displays the number of steps being executed Cannot be edited Modified Displays the date and time of the latest modification of the program Compiling the program will refresh the displayed date and time Cannot be edited Setting the operations The operation to convert data from real numbers to integers can be set c Modified history The revision history can be confirmed E Program Property g e Program Name Configuration Mo Date Time User name Detail definit
222. e executed until sampling Number stops Number of Terminate Delays Specifies how many times sampling is to be executed and trac 0 to 65 534 Not shown for simple ing terminated after the termination condition is met display Not shown for simple display 1 1 7 8 Chapter 7 Data Tracing 7 5 1 Functions of Buttons in Graph Area 7 5 Graph Area Operations 7 5 1 Functions of Buttons in Graph Area The Graph Area buttons are used for common functions in the Trend Graph Mode and the X Y Graph Mode Graph Area buttons Start Scopel scope p gt start view Monitor data No 100 w Setting rigger Type fe bs e ae H Ae HAIE S00004 S00010 15000 15000 amp For description purposes all of the above icons are shown as active The following table shows the functions of the Graph Area buttons When this icon is clicked the cursor turns into an offset adjustment cursor for the Graph Slee Area and the graph can be scrolled vertically by dragging e l l il ia Graph Areas for which Auto is selected from the list as the maximum verti cal axis value cannot be moved Scroll Turns the cursor into a graph scroll cursor so that the graph can be scrolled horizontally ww by dragging Zoom In Turns the cursor into the graph zoom in cursor to enable enlarging areas by selecting them with the cursor After using zoom in to get a close up view gradually reduces the size of the image E
223. e following procedure 1 Select File Import Local variables and comments from the main menu The Browse For Folder Dialog Box will appear 2 Select the folder in which the data to be imported is saved and then click OK Browse For Folder Import Folder settings My Documents E oy My Computer eH Flo Ce See WI E S WINNT4E Es See WINGS FS E Se WINSBE iG E s WINO H E s WINZOO0E I Make Mew Folder wt The Import Dialog Box will appear 5 49 Chapter 5 Variables 5 8 2 Exporting Importing Local Variables and Comments 3 All the check boxes of ladder programs CSV files in the folder specified in step 2 will be selected Clear the check boxes of ladder programs not to be imported and then click Import If you wish to change the import source folder click Browse Program mg BRR SMPL mP2300 Gp Ladder program E High speed H Main Program H01 E Low speed fae Start Ep Interrupt Ep Function Import folder settings K Documents and Settings Owner Desktop cs file The following message will appear asking for confirmation MPE 20 Ver 6 Import the selected program of variable comment wt Do vou want to continue 4 Click Yes The selected files will start importing and the results will be displayed in the Output Subwin dow while reading the data H Main Program Complete While importing E Documents and Settings OwnerDesktop CS fileSH01 cay Regi
224. e output in the Output Subwindow Output eee sa Start compiling MPMOO1 Error 0 Warning 0 aaa Start compiling MPMOO2 Error 0 Warning 0 ae gece Start compiling MPMOOS Error 0 Warning 0 A Start compiling MPMOD4 Error 0 Warming 0 ade End Compile Error 0 Warning Output Hi Search 1 FAlRegister List 1 F Watch 1 Chapter 5 Variables This chapter describes the variables used in ladder programs 5 1 Overview 5 2 5 1 1 Types of Variables 5 2 5 1 2 Displaying Variables 5 3 5 2 Variables that Are Automatically Assigned by System 5 4 5 2 1 System Variables S Registers 5 4 5 2 2 Axis Variables I O Registers 5 5 5 2 3 I O Variables I O Registers 5 7 5 3 Variables that Can Be Set by the User 5 11 5 3 1 Variables that can be Referred from Any Program 5 12 5 3 2 Local Variables for Use in One Variable 5 21 5 4 Using Variables and Comments 5 26 5 4 1 Using Variables
225. e program displayed when a ladder program is opened after connecting is the program in the Machine Con troller RAM If the displayed ladder program is edited and saved compiled the changes will be overwritten in both the Machine Controller RAM and the open project file on the computer For details on saving data while connected refer to 1 11 1 Overview of Data Transfers 1 57 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 9 1 Connecting to Machine Controllers b Opening a Project File Containing Connection Information When the operation is executed to open a project file containing connection information the following dialog box will be displayed for confirmation MPE 20 Ver 6 c Controller connection information is preserved in the project File ka Do you connect with the controller Connection 1 Serial COM1 Uniti connect not connect The connection to the Machine Controller will be started by clicking the Connect Button When the connection has been made the Machine Controller name and a ladder program tree will be displayed in the Ladder Subwindow Nt MPE720 Ver 6 DATA MP2300 Start SEE At Fie Edit View Online Compile Debug Window Help 2 Ax MENET Gi ot ES ie lag Ai wae m a ee e eZee ee T ET Online MP2300 J Documents and Settings MPE Desktop ENG DATA YMW 1 Serial COM1 Uniti CPU RUN Kk Programming Monitor Transfer Utility Scantime setting Module configuration
226. e protect is set in disable Please execute writing into the controller again after changing setting write protect From disable to writable by setting of an environmental setting When selecting Batch select the types of data to be transferred from among System Configuration Program Register and Comment With a batch transfer the Machine Controller RAM will be cleared before the transfer and it will be updated by the project file data being transferred When ndividual is selected not only can System Configuration Program Register or Comment be specified but also the particular data to be transferred With an individual transfer only the same file will be overwritten by the data being transferred If The flash saving is executed after transfer 1s selected the data will be saved to flash memory after being transferred to the Machine Controller RAM For details on the data of the System Configuration Program Register and Comment that is transferred refer to 1 11 1 Overview of Data Transfers If the CPU is in RUN status one of the following messages will be displayed MPE 20 Ver 6 i Controller is running J Stop controller to transfer For clear all controller s memory Do you want to stop controller Controller is running There is 4 possibility to cause the Following problems when transfer during RUN 1 There is a possibility that the application miscalculation 2 It will take more time while to comp
227. e search for duplicate coils is executed To search for duplicate coils when the Project Link Connection is used transfer the data to the project file by executing the Read from Controller command in advance To search for duplicate coils when the Direct Connection is used project file data is also displayed for the duplicate coil search Select Debug Check for Multiple Coils from the Main Menu The search will be started and the results will be output to the Check for Multiple Coils Subwindow Check For Multiple Coils All program f Check Result 4 Output Type Register MBoooo01 MBoooo01 SBOOO00S SBOOO00S Program Execution Step H 5 H 6 HO Fi H z 11 If Enable to Multiple Coil Check is selected in the compile options a search for duplicate coils will also be executed while the program is being compiled and the results will be displayed in the Output Subwindow as a warning For details on the compile options refer to 3 3 17 Ladder Program Compiling and Compile Options 3 5 Debugging Ladder Programs 3 5 6 Forcing Coils ON OFF 1 Setting Coils to Forced ON OFF in the Ladder Program Programs can be monitored by forcibly turning specified coil objects ON or OFF in the Ladder Program Edit Window 1 Select the coil to be forcibly turned ON or OFF 2 Select Debug Force ON or Force OFF from the main menu The selected coil will be forcibly connected or disconnected
228. e selected program folder will be selected Clear the check boxes of programs not to be printed When some check boxes are deselected in step 3 some check boxes of project files ladder program folders and High speed Low speed Start Interrupt and Function Drawing Folders may be shaded This is because some of the check boxes of the files contained in the folder are selected or not selected Program aw smr MP2300 fe Ladder program e fie High speed EG IE H Main Program z HD1 HO 01 HO1 03 z HOZ HOz 01 z Hos HO3 01 Click Print The Print Setup Dialog Box will appear Select each item and then click OK All selected programs will be printed out as a batch 10 7 Chapter 10 Printing 10 1 4 Printing Cross Reference Information 10 1 4 Printing Cross Reference Information Cross reference information is the information on the output registers variables used for coils and cross referenced to another program The cross reference information will be printed on the right side of ladder program The cross reference information includes the program name and step number execution step number to which the output register is cross referenced The registers whose cross reference information can be printed are M I O Y Z and A registers Cross reference information can be printed only when the project file is open offline Refer to 1 8 16 Print Ladder for print setting Refer to 3 5 4 Cross Reference Searchi
229. ect files are always overwritten when closed A project file cannot be saved under a new name Whenever a backup file is required be sure to make a copy of the project file before opening it or before overwriting changes while editing the project Table Programming Functions Not Supported by MPE720 Version 6 MPE720 version 6 does not support these three table programming functions Interlock Tables Part Composition Tables and I O Conversion Tables Contents Graphic Symbols Used in this Manual jii Trademarks jii Caution on Managing Passwords lil Caution on Managing Project Files jii Table Programming Functions Not Supported by MPE720 Version 6 lil Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 1 1 1 What Is MPE720 Version 6 1 3 1 2 Basic Engineering Procedure Using MPE720 Version 6 1 3 1 3 Installing and Uninstalling MPE720 Version 6 1 4 1 3 1 MPE720 Version 6 System Requirements 1 4 1 3 2 Compatibility with MPE720 Version 5 1 4 1 3 3 Installing MPE720 Version 6 1 5 1 3 4 Uninstalling MPE7
230. ect the port to be used for the transfer and click the Connection Button N Communications Setting Set the communication setting Logical port Mo With this procedure connection information will not be written to the project file even when the Connection Button is clicked To write connection information to the project file select Online Communications Setting from the Main Menu and then make the settings in the Communications Setting Dialog Box that will be displayed The Transfer Program Write into Controller Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Select Batch or Individual and then click the Start Button Transfer Program Read from Controller Source Controller MP2300 Serial Uniti Th Individual The Following Files will be transferred System Configuration System Definition Scan Time Definition Program Module Configuration 5 Data Trace O Masladce Ladder Program High speed Low speed Start Interrupt Function C Comment Motion Program Mainf Sub Table Data Variable Axis Input Output Global Constant User Structure When selecting Batch select the types of data to be transferred from among System Configuration Program Register and Comment When ndividual is selected not only can System Configuration Program Register or Comment be specified but also the particular data to be transferred 1 71 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 11 5 Reading from Machine C
231. ect the project file to be overwritten and click Open Open Project Look in 2300 p amp fi Haaa YM T Te NewFileOO1 YMw My Recent EE NewFile vmw Documents BFE Fest YM Ge keto VM by File name test2 YMW a e Files of type Project File MW v a hy Network The Transfer Program Write into Project Dialog Box will appear 3 Click either the Batch or Individual Button and then click the Start Button Transfer Program Write into Project Target Project File MP2300 taaa YM ee Start The Following Files will be transferred System Definition Scan Time Definition Program Module Configuration F Data Trace a Pagister Ladder Program High speed Low speed Start Interrupt Function C Comment Motion Program Main Sub Table Data Variable Axis Input Output Global Constant User Structure When selecting the Batch or Individual Button the types of data to be transferred System Configuration Pro gram Register and Comment can be selected When selecting the Individual Button the particular data to be transferred can also be designated For details on the data of the System Configuration Program Register and Comment that is transferred refer to 1 11 1 Overview of Data Transfers After clicking Start the data will begin writing into the project file 1 73 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 11 6 Writing into a Project File
232. ection Busy Hold Fail Complete MotionSubCommand CommandCode ResponseCode Status Busy Fail OBxx000 OBxx001 OBxx00F IBxx000 IBxx001 IBxx003 IBxx0C6 ILxx4A ILxx4C OWxx03 OWxx04 OWxx08 IWxx08 OWxx09 OBxx090 OBxx091 OBxx092 IWxx09 IBxx090 IBxx091 IBxx093 IBxx098 OWxx0A IWxx0A IWxx0B IBxx0BO IBxx0B3 Servo ON Machine lock Alarm clear Motion controller operation ready Running Servo ready Machine lock ON MLKL Number of accumulated rotations of absolute encoder Numver of initial incremental pulses Function 1 Function 2 Motion command Motion command Motion command response code Motion command control flag Command pause Command abort JOG STEP direction Motion command status Motion command executing BUSY flag Motion command hold completed HOLD Motion command error occurrence FAIL Motion command execution completed COMPLETE Motion sub command Motion sub command Motion sub command response code Motion sub command status Motion sub command executing BUSY flag Motion sub command error occurrence FAIL Motion sub command execution completed COMPLETE A 19 A 20 A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details Position Command MoveType PhaseCompensationType Position PositionCompensation StepDistance EXPOffset PhaseCompensation PhasePositionLoopEnable AbsoluteReadRequest Setting POSCOMP Width NEARWidth ZERO Width POSCOMPTi
233. ed Select the Default User When this option is selected the project file or Machine Controller can be accessed by the default user account Default User Name Enter the default user name using from 1 to 16 alphanumeric characters Default Password Enter the default password using from 1 to 16 alphanumeric characters 1 45 1 46 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 8 7 Setup System Setting 1 8 7 Setup System Setting System settings such as those for program security and clearing of the D register at startup can be made for program files that are currently being used Select Setup System Setting from the tree in the Environment Setting Dialog Box to bring up that window and then make the settings Refer to 7 8 1 Environment Setting Dialog Box Environment Setting Po System PS Security System Setting eg Setup t gt System Setting Scan Time Setting PCI Reset Signal PS Ladder Po c language D Register Clear when Start Fa variable Keep Latest Value Number of scan of keep latest value FS Monitor when abnormal input Transfer High speed Input scan 1 255 Print Write Protect Wiitable Low speed Input 2 Scan 1 255 Calender Setting Date and Time Jan 0372005 03 03 gt Cancel System Settings Write Protect Select Writable or Not Writable to allow or prohibit the writing of program data to the Machine Controller If Not writable is selected data cannot
234. ed by pressing the Esc Key 6 Click the Normal Edit Mode Icon T in the Ladder Editor Toolbar to exit the Branch Edit Mode and return the cursor to its normal form The cursor will be also returned to its normal form by pressing the Esc Key 4 Deleting Branches 1 Select the branch to be deleted The edit mark t4 will be displayed For details on applicable objects of edit marks refer to 1 Cutting Copying and Pasting Branches 2 Select Edit Delete from the Main Menu Alternatively right click the edit mark and select Delete from the pop up menu that will be displayed Another method is to press the Delete Key 3 27 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 3 10 Inserting Instruction Objects 3 3 10 Inserting Instruction Objects For information on the meanings and uses of ladder instructions refer to Machine Controller MP900 MP2000 Series New Ladder Editor Programming Manual SIEZ C887 13 1 There are three ways of inserting new ladder instructions e Specifying the entry position input guide or instruction object e Entering directly to the input guide e Inserting a new instruction in parallel with an instruction that is already entered Inserting branches For details on inserting branches refer to 3 3 8 3 Copying Instructions and Arranging Them In Parallel and 3 3 8 4 Arranging Any Instructions in Parallel 1 Specifying the Entry Position This section describes how to insert a ladder instruction
235. ed by the following procedure and comments can be referenced by register and data type 1 Referencing S I O M and C Register Comments 1 Double click Comment List in the Variable Subwindow or the Local Variable Subwindow Alternatively right click the Comment List in the Local Variable Window and select Edit from the pop up menu that 5 appears The comment list will open in the Main Window 2 Select the register that is to be referenced from the Register List or select Open from the pop up menu that appears The comment list for the selected register will be displayed 3 Specify the data type to be referenced using the BIT WORD LONG FLOAT or ADDRESS Button The comment list for the specified register and data type will be displayed Start Comment List Register List ff 7X Register V Program Aa es Register E I Input Register Register Comment O Output Register nooo Inputo M Data Register EE Input a Constant Register RE Input E D Internal Register Te Inputs a Internal Constant Register Input4 4 Function Input Register RE hte Inputs Y Function Output Register MAA Input Gi 2 Function Internal Register IEA Input E A Function External Register TEN Inputs jogs Input3 Dogga Inpukid aie Trpuki 1 IEODOOC ipiis i annn eE Input i3 Aana puti 4 Aa Inpukis gt Scroll the list to refer to the comment for the target register address Cli
236. ed in detail below 1 8 2 System Communication Setting The timeout can be set for connecting and communicating with the Machine Controller Select System Communications Setting from the tree in the Environment Setting Dialog Box to bring up that window and then change the settings Refer to 7 8 1 Environment Setting Dialog Box Any changes made to the settings in this window will not be reflected until the next connection to the Machine Controller even if the Apply Button is clicked Environment Setting i ommunication Setting Timeout setting Controller Type Security Logon Timeout 10000 m I ms 32767ms Setup Ladder Communication Timeout m Ims 32 76 rns language Variable 1 Monitor Transfer Print After reconnected to the controller new setting becomes effective Logon Time ot Ik ig a time out pernod when connecting with the controller Communication Time out Iti a time out pernod when communicating with controller Logon Timeout 1 ms to 32 767 ms Set the timeout time for when connecting to the Machine Controller An error will occur if a connection is not completed within the set time after the connection operation has been started Communication Timeout 1 ms to 32 767 ms Set the timeout time for communications with the Machine Controller An error will occur if communications are not restarted within the set time 1 40 1 8 Environment Settings 1 8 3 System Controller Type
237. ed under each A I H and L program A folder is displayed for each program type in the Ladder Subwindow Hierarchical Structure and Restrictions on Ladder Programs A I H and L program structures can contain up to three hierarchical levels from Ay level 1 to level 3 eaten The level 1 program is called the main program and only one main program can Ll ABC MP2300 fia Ladder program be created for the A I H and L programs lap High speed Level 2 and level 3 programs can be referenced from higher level programs using the SEE instruction The maximum total number of level 2 and 3 programs depends on the program a BH type as follows oo IB Hoz o2 e A programs 62 H03 Ho4 e I programs 62 f oe e H programs 198 E Interrupt e aa aE L programs 498 Fig 3 1 Ladder Subwindow For details on operations and changing the display in the Ladder Subwindow refer to 3 4 3 Managing Ladder Program Files Ordinary ladder programs are indicated by in the Ladder Subwindow and CP ladder programs are indicated by E Functions and Motion Programs Functions and motion programs are both programming elements that can be referenced for use from ladder programs They can be referenced from ladder programs at any hierarchical level from level 1 to level 3 The features of functions and motion programs are described below E Functions Functions are a programming element referenced from other ladder
238. ed when entering comments 5 29 Chapter 5 Variables 5 6 2 Creating User Structures The Registration Structure Dialog Box will appear The assigned structure members will be displayed in a list MY Registration Structure structure Mame ser Structure Cameri Word Member Long 1 Member Bik O MEMBER 3 Member4 11 TEST 9 30 5 6 User Structures E When Values in Address or Bit Column Overlap in a Structure Member List When values in Address and or Bit Column overlap in one user structure the lines of overlapping structure members will be displayed in pink as shown below In the example below the data types BIT WORD LONG FLOAT are not overlapping MY Registration Structure x structure Mame ser Structure Comment Name twos ladies pt comment SSS O Member 1 Word Oo Member Member2 Long 1 Member Members eit e MEMBER Member4 Add il TEST DATA Bit o 0 DATA Es If you click OK the following message will appear asking for confirmation Registration Structure Overlap of the address by a different data type ae There is 4 possibility to malfunction when the member overlapped of the address is used by the application Do vou want to continue to register Click Yes to register the newly created structure 5 31 Chapter 5 Variables 5 6 2 Creating User Structures E When One Register is Assigned to Different Structure Members When the data type Type address
239. edited program the following confirmation message will be displayed If there are multiple programs that are not compiled the message will be displayed once for each program MPE 20 Ver 6 H Main Program has been changed Compile the program to sawe it Click Yes to compile and close the program Click Mo to cancel the changes and close the program Do you want to compile the program Yes After the applicable program has been compiled it will be saved and closed If a compile error occurs during the compiling closing the project file will be cancelled as if the Cancel Button had been clicked and editing can be continued No The applicable program will be closed without saving the changes Cancel Closing the project file will be cancelled and editing can be continued All programs closed up to that point however will remain closed When all uncompiled programs are closed the project file will close If there is a connection to a Machine Controller when the project file 1s closed the connection will be closed at the same time 1 7 7 Moving Project Files Deleting Copying and Renaming Project Files Just as with other Windows application files operations such as moving project files to other folders or deleting copying or renaming project files can be executed using a file manager tool such as Explorer Shortcut keys such as Ctrl C copy Ctrl X cut and Ctrl V paste can also be used 1 38 1 8 Env
240. efault directory for when trace data is imported or exported CPU The directory installed by MPE720 version 6 is set User settings Click the Detail Button and make the settings in the Folder Reference Dialog Box raph xY graph List Print CSV File Directory ET Setting the Graph Tab Page The general graph settings can be made on this tab page Select the elements to be set from the Type list and then set the items Set ED graph List Print Type Background vl Default Unit Mark Width Line Type Cursor 4 Grid Reference variable Monitor variableO1 Color Monitor variableO2 Line Width Set Graph x qraph List Print Default Unit ms Mark Width 50 Mark Value Span Line Type Line Width Color Font Font Ms Sans Serif 7 7 Other Functions Type File AandB Points variable cursors Reference variables Monitor Variables 1 to 16 z v v E Back Item Setting ground color Sets the default values for the X axis units Default Unit data ms sec mm Sets the size of one X axis mark in the default units When the default unit is Mark Width ms one mark will be 50 ms when the mark width is set to 50 Mark Value Span Sets the span of values step displayed T for marks lt lt pv v iv pv ivi iv Sets a solid line wavy line broken line Line Type etc Line Width Sets a line width fr
241. efer to 7 6 11 Calculate Dialog Box Hides the graph and maximizes the list display This icon is active only during normal list display Clears the maximum list display and returns to the normal display graph and list This icon is active only during maximum list display Normal List Display 7 17 7 18 Chapter 7 Data Tracing 7 6 3 Pop up Menu 7 6 3 Pop up Menu The following pop up menu is displayed by right clicking in the List Area Es Import Ctrl I Export ctrl E Cut Ctrl Copy Chr Paste Ctrl V Delete Delete Find Ctrl F El Calculate Cursor Mode YE Minimum Maximum value 3 Variable Comment l Cursor Position w Y Axis Scale Convert Unit Adjust Cell Width Ke Show List Vertically Show the Data The following table list the operations in the above pop up menu that cannot be executed using the list buttons Toggles between displaying and hiding the maximum and minimum values in the Maximum Minimum List Area value M This operation is the same as selecting Display Maximum Minimum Value from the Main Menu For details refer to 7 6 5 Monitor Pages Variable Comment O Toggles between displaying and hiding variable comments in the List Area from the Main Menu For details refer to 7 6 5 Monitor Pages Toggles between displaying and hiding Convert Unit in the List Area This operation is the same as selecting Display Convert Unit from the Main Menu For detai
242. egister address and the size CAUSE 1 The same constant variable which has already been registered is not corresponding to the register address and the size SOLUTION 1 The register address must be matched to the size to do the same constant variable which has already been registered importing 9 52 5 8 Exporting Importing Variables 2 Procedures to Export Import Constant Variables a Export Data of constant variables can be exported group by group to CTF files in the selected folder by using the following procedure 1 Select File Export Constant variables from the main menu The Browse For Folder Dialog Box will appear 2 Select a folder for export destination and then click OK To create a new folder click Make New Folder to enter a folder name Browse For Folder Export Folder settings My Documents El H My Computer fH Flo E S WINNT4E E See WINS iF E s WINSBE iG E s WINZO00 H i E s WINZOO0E I Make Mew Folder wt The Export Dialog Box will appear 3 All the check boxes of constant variables CTF files in the folder specified in step 2 will be selected Clear the check boxes of the items not to be exported and then click Export If you wish to change the export destination folder click Browse HP Export Constant variable 3M gt Variable Constant Variable C_DATA CONST DATA C_WAITT TEST a C_ O09 QQQ Expor
243. elated to print object settings File Print Object Setting from the Main Menu can be made on this tab page Set Graph at graph List ee Scope Configuration Printi Details Graph Print List Frint ka Scope Configuration Print Simple Used for trace data printing when Scope Configuration is selected as the print object Print Detail Used for trace data printing when Scope Configuration is selected as the print object Do Not Print Scope Configuration cannot be selected as the print object Graph Print Graph can be selected as the print object Do Not Print Graph cannot be selected as the print object List Print List can be selected as the print object Do Not Print List cannot be selected as the print object Print Object Setting Scope Setting Graph ms i Cancel Fig 7 2 Print Object Setting Dialog Box When List Is Set to Do Not Print 7 30 Chapter 8 Electronic Cam Data Preparation Tool This chapter describes how to start the Electronic Cam Data Preparation Tool 8 1 Overview of Electronic Cam Data 8 2 8 2 Starting and Operating the Electronic Cam Data Tool 8 2 8 1 Chapter 8 Electronic Cam Data Preparation Tool 8 1 Overview of Electronic Cam Data The Electronic Cam Data Tool is a simulation and conversion tool that reads CS V format files tracks transition points and converts the files to cam data files
244. elay Timerfl s RELAY TOF 1s Off Delay Tirner 1s RELAY ON PLS Rising Pulse RELAY OFF PLS Falling Pulse RELAY COIL Cail RELAY COIL Set Coil RELAY R COIL Reset Coil MATH STORE Store MATH ADD Addition MATH ADDS Extended Addition MATH SUB Subtraction MATH SUB Extended Subtractic haa TH hdl II Kal lkirdie skies a gt The key allocations used for entering instructions for objects can be changed Double click in the Key Field for the instruction that is to be changed as shown in the window above When the text cursor is displayed enter the key that is to be allocated If a key that is already being used is allocated or deleted the following error message will be displayed MPE 20 Ver 6 dd The input character string is illegal 3 20 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs 3 3 5 Editing Program Comments The program name is displayed when the new program is created The comment can be edited either by using the Comment Editor or by direct editing in the Program Comment Field 1 Using the Comment Editor Double click a program comment to display the Comment Editor shown to the left The following operations can then be executed e Characters can be entered e Icons short cut keys and pop up menus accessed by right clicking on selected character strings can be used for Cut Copy Paste Undo and Ctrl Redo operations Ctrl C For description purposes all of the icons and menu items shown
245. enceOutputDatal 3 TransmissionReferenceOutputDatal4 TransmissionReferenceOutputDatal 5 TransmissionReferenceInputData0 TransmissionReferenceInputDatal TransmissionReferenceInputData2 TransmissionReferenceInputData3 TransmissionReferenceInputData4 TransmissionReferenceInputData5 TransmissionReferenceInputData6 TransmissionReferenceInputData7 TransmissionReferenceInputData8 TransmissionReferenceInputData9 TransmissionReferenceInputData1 0 TransmissionReferenceInputData 1 TransmissionReferenceInputData12 TransmissionReferenceInputDatal 3 TransmissionReferenceInputDatal 4 OWxx70 OWxx71 OWxx72 OWxx73 OWxx74 OWxx75 OWxx76 OWxx77 OWxx78 OWxx79 OWxx7A OWxx7B OWxx7C OWxx7D OWxx7E OWxx7F IWxx70 IWxx71 IWxx72 IWxx73 IWxx74 IWxx75 IWxx76 IWxx77 IWxx78 IWxx79 IWxx7A IWxx7B IWxx7C IWxx7D IWxx7E Transmission Transmission reference output data 0 Transmission reference output data 1 Transmission reference output data 2 Transmission reference output data 3 Transmission reference output data 4 Transmission reference output data 5 Transmission reference output data 6 Transmission reference output data 7 Transmission reference output data 8 Transmission reference output data 9 Transmission reference output data 10 Transmission reference output data 11 Transmission reference output data 12 Transmission reference output data 13 Transmission reference output data 14 Transmission reference output data 15 Transmission refe
246. ent Value Set Counter 2 Count Enable Counter 2 Notch Output Enable Counter 2 Current Value Reset Counter 2 Notch Output Reset Counter 2 Count Value Hold Reset gt A 33 A Variable Tables A 3 1O Variables Comments OW mon Output Coil 2 Counter 1 Forced Notch Output Counter 2 Forced Notch Output Monitor 1 Monitor 2 Monitor 3 Output Register Word Output Register Word2 Output Register Word3 Output Register Word4 Output Register Long1 MONI OBxx038 OW Ows Owo OWsa E Pulse Output 2 channel Module Output Register Long2 Variable Register Comments IAxx00 IWxx00 IWxx01 IWxx02 RDY1 IBxx020 MONSELI1 IBxx022 PACKI IBxx024 PNACK1 IBxx025 MOVIL IBxx028 JOGIL IBxx029 ZRNIL IBxx02A OVERI IBxx02C TIMINGI IBxx02D ZRNI IBxx02E IBxx02F IWxx03 IWxx030 IWxx032 IWxx034 IWxx035 IWxx038 IWxx039 IWxx03A IWxx03C IWxx03D IWxx03E IWxx03F IWxx04 IWxx05 IWxx06 IWxx07 ILxx04 ILxx06 Z Input Reserve3 Reserved for the System Reserve4 Reserved for the System Channel 1 Input Relays Channel 1 Ready Channel 1 Monitor Parameters InputRelay1 Channel 1 Parameter Setting Normal Channel 1 Parameter Setting Error Channel 1 Positioning Channel 1 JOG Operation Channel 1 Zero Point Return Channel 1 Overheat Input Status Channel 1 Magnetic Excitation Timing Input Channel 1 Zero Point Signal Input Status Channel 1 General purpose Input Status Channel 2 Input Relays Channel 2 Ready Channe
247. ep 2 will be selected Clear the check boxes of the items not to be exported and then click Export mY Export Variable comment A gt Variable Ea 10 Variable E Global Variable Bit fiw Word Long E Float fa Address E Comment I Input Register Bit fiw Word Long E Float fia Address Output Register v Bit fi Word KA Femitana K K K K K Export file settings K Documents and Settings Owner Desktop CS File Book1 csv If Browse is clicked the specified export destination file name or the Save As Dialog Box to create a file as the export destination will be displayed To create a file enter a file name and then click Save in the Save As Dialog Box The following message will appear asking for confirmation MPE 20 Ver 6 Export the selected variable comment File information on the specified export is cancelled and overwrited Do vou want to continue 4 Click Yes Data export will start and the results will be displayed in the Output Subwindow Register Comment arable Structure CFOO045 Speed CLOO001 START CLOO2ZO1 AUN Cw 00000 CONST WART Cw 0000 TEA Cw 00999 0001 While exporting E Documents and Settings Owner Desktop Coy file Book1 csv Complete End of export Varable comment of global End of export Error Caution 5 8 Exporting Importing Variables b Import The global variables and comments in the CSV file can
248. er SIEP C880700 16 Monitoring Parameters Current positions current values of moving axes are saved in the monitoring parameters For details on monitoring parameters refer to 4 2 3 List of Monitoring Parameters of Machine Controller MP2200 2300 User s Manual Motion Modules manual number SIEP C880700 16 SERVOPACK Parameters A SERVOPACK is operated according to the values set as SERVOPACK parameters For details on SERVOPACK parameters refer to the relevant SERVOPACK manual 2 2 Motion Parameters 1 Value Data Display The values data of a SERVOPACK that is connected to a Machine Controller are saved in the SERVOPACK parameters Two types of values are saved in the SERVOPACK parameters Current Value and Input Data Current Value Current value data of the connected SERVOPACK Input Data Values stored in a Machine Controller as a backup data E SERVOPACK Parameter Unmatched Data Display Function When MPE720 version 6 is operated using a SERVOPACK the Current Values may differ from the Input Values If SERVOPACK parameters are set with a software other than MPE version 6 such as SigmaWin and digital operator the Input Values may be adjusted according to the specifications of the software that is used for setting If a difference is produced the following message will be displayed in the SERVOPACK parameter setting window of Engineering Manager and the parameters for which Current Values are different from the Input
249. er for a normal compiler such information is not given b When comparing programs in which conditional instructions are used this contradiction may appear due to differences between two types of compilations normal compilation and version 5 compatible compila tion the work registers used by MPE720 version 6 are optimized To obtain perfectly matched results execute compilation in the same compile mode Indicate the instructions displayed in the Ladder Subwindow Refer to Machine Controller MP900 MP2000 series New Ladder Editor User s Manual manual number SIE C887 13 1 for details 1 86 1 12 Security 1 12 Security 1 12 1 Security for User For details refer to 1 8 4 Security User Registration 1 12 2 Security for Project Files For details refer to 1 8 5 Security Project Password 1 12 3 Setting Passwords for Ladder Programs Passwords can be set individually for each ladder program A lock mark is displayed for each program for which a password has been set To edit the program with a password it is necessary to first enter the password The purpose of the password is to control access for editing and it does not affect the management of program files copying cutting pasting deleting or enable disable settings Refer to 3 4 3 Managing Ladder Program Files Y Once a password has been set be very careful not to forget it If a password that has been set is forgotten there is no way to undo it
250. er Name USER 4 Password TELIT Enter the project password has been set and then click the OK Button The project file can then be opened 1 8 6 Security Default User Setting A default user can be specified and the default user name and password can be set When Select the default user is selected option the default user information user name and password will be found when an attempt is made to open the project file If the user registration settings are the same as the default user settings for the project file then the project file can be opened without logging in If the user settings are not the same a dialog box will be displayed for logging in Select Security Default User Setting from the tree in the Environment Setting Dialog Box to bring up that window and then make the settings Refer to 7 8 1 Environment Setting Dialog Box Environment Setting System Select the default user Security User Registration Default User Name Project Password em efant User Setting USER A EI Setup Default Password PS Ladder PS c language aiei Ez variable E Transfer Default User To log on the project in the default user when the project file i opened or connect the controller the user ig specified The open connection to the controller is completed without inquiring of the user when the user password exists The changed part tt valid since the project will open nest time or the controller is connect
251. er has been selected only the default privileges can be changed For details on specifying the default user refer to 1 8 6 Security Default User Setting 3 Deleting User Registrations In the User Registration Window of the Environment Setting Dialog Box select the user whose information is to be deleted and click the Delete Button Then click the OK Button in the dialog box displayed for confirmation The selected user information will be deleted MPE 20 Ver 6 Lal r j Delete the selected user information Cancel 1 43 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 8 5 Security Project Password 1 8 5 Security Project Password A password can be set for a project file that is currently open Y Once a password has been set for a project file be very careful not to forget it If a password that has been set is forgotten there is no way to undo it that project file can no longer be opened Select Security Project Password from the tree in the Environment Setting Dialog Box to bring up that window and then make the settings Refer to 7 8 1 Environment Setting Dialog Box Environment Setting EJ System Set the project password E gt Security User Registration ee Project Password Default User Setting When the project is opened the password is input Fj Setup Fz Ladder Fz c language Ez variable Ez Monitor Ez Transfer Ez Print Project Password The password can be applied
252. er programs under the folder The folder itself cannot be cut or copied When a program is selected the operation will apply to all of the programs belonging to that program In the Ladder Subwindow for the project file where the ladder program is to be pasted select the destination program folder Right click the paste destination folder and select Paste from the pop up menu that will be displayed Alternatively select Edit Paste from the Main Menu The ladder program cut or copied in step 3 will be over written to the program folder selected in step 4 2 Deleting Ladder Programs 3 42 Before using this operation first close the ladder program that is to be deleted In the Ladder Subwindow select the ladder program that is to be deleted Either select Edit Delete from the Main Menu or right click the selected program file and select Delete from the pop up menu that will be displayed Alternatively press the Delete Key 3 4 Managing Programs in the Ladder Subwindow 3 Renaming Ladder Programs Before using this operation first close the ladder program that is to be renamed 1 Select the ladder program that is to be renamed in the Ladder Subwindow 2 Right click the selected program and select Rename from the pop up menu that will be displayed The Program Property Dialog Box will be displayed E Program Property 3 Change the name displayed in the Program No Field and click the OK Button
253. ere are too many cross references to be printed the distance between rungs will be automatically adjusted so that they will not run into one another Thus the ladder circuit and all the cross reference information can be printed Refer to 10 1 4 Printing Cross Reference Information for details Environment Setting Po System Print Setting PS Security circuit auto reduction print Po Setup print the cross reference information Po Ladder Closed Scope is opened and prints PS c language Eg Variable Eg Monitor Po Transfer E Print t gt ladder print the cross reference information Cross reference information is displayed and printed next to right power wire of the ladder program It is effective only to open the project by off line Expand Collapsed Instructions When Print is selected from the combo box all ladder instructions will be expanded to show the details Environment Setting Po System E Print Setting PS Security circuit auko reduction print Pj Setup print the cross reference information Po Ladder Closed Scope is opened and prints Po c language Ez variable Ez Monitor E Transfer E gt Print t gt ladder Closed Scope is opened and prints All are opened and Scope which closes the ladder in the program is printed Cancel Apply Refer to 3 3 10 Inserting Instruction Objects for information on Min Max button of simplified display scope 1 54
254. ersion 6 will overwrite it Prepare the MPE720 version 6 installation CD ROM and use the following procedure to install the software 1 Start the computer and insert the installation CD ROM in the CD ROM drive If any other software applications are running close them before proceeding If either MPE720 version 5 or MPE720 version 6 is already installed the following dialog boxes may be displayed for confirmation when the InstallShield Wizard is started In either case click the Yes Button Communication Manager The communication manager of an old version Ver 3 68K has already been installed IF you want to install this version Yer 3 68M included in this installer it is necessary to uninstall the current communication manager Is the version which has already been installed uninstalled The electronic cam tool of a same version Ver 4 51 has already been installed It is necessary to uninstall the electronic cam tool to install again Is the version which has already been installed uninstalled The following dialog box will then be displayed for confirmation Click the OK Button The earlier version or the same version of the Communications Process or the Electronic CAM Tool will be overwritten Confirm Uninstall Do you want to completely remove the selected application and all of its components Cancel The MPE720 version 6 Installer will automatically start the Title Window will be displayed and t
255. es I O Registers 3 Editing I O Module Names and Comments The following procedure can be used to edit I O Module names and comments for I O variables 1 Right click the I O module name leading I O address or I O variable that is to be edited and then select Edit from the pop up menu that will be displayed Alternatively double click the item to be edited The Edit variable Dialog Box will be displayed When the I O Module name is selected data can be entered in both the Variable Name and Comment Fields When the leading I O address or I O variable is selected data can be entered in only the Comment Field 2 Edit the text in the field that is to be changed and then click the OK Button W Edit variable EY Edit variable Register Register Comment Comment When I O Module Is Selected When Leading I O Address or I O Variable Is Selected Input the I O Module name using a maximum of 16 alphanumeric characters Use a letter of the alphabet for the leading character Carriage returns or line feeds cannot be used in the comments The display in the Variable Subwindow will be changed If the selected variable is entered in the program the comment for that variable will also be changed 5 3 Variables that Can Be Set by the User 5 3 Variables that Can Be Set by the User User variables can be assigned and edited by the user There are four types of user variables e Global variables M registers Global va
256. et for the left and right vertical axes 3 Maximum Value Selection Left Right The Maximum Value Selection is used to set the maximum values for the left and right vertical axes Monitor Variables The values can be directly entered by double clicking the cells When Auto is selected maximum values are adjusted so that all of the trace data that is obtained will be displayed in the Graph Area 4 Scroll Bar The section to be monitored can be moved by either dragging the slide bar or clicking the right or left arrows 5 Unit Selection The display unit for the horizontal axis time axis can be set to data ms sec or min 6 Maximum Display Button and Normal Display Button H When the Maximum Display Button is clicked the List Area 1s hidden the Graph Area is maximized and the Normal Display Button is displayed When the Normal Display Button is clicked the Graph Area is returned to its original size and the List Area is displayed 7 14 Chapter 7 Data Tracing 7 5 7 X Y Graphs 7 5 f X Y Graphs An X Y graph takes two specified Monitor Variables variable X and variable Y in the horizontal and vertical axes and shows their relationship over a given time Monitor Variable selection vertical axis X Y graph display setting buttons M2 fSW 00001 4 eval AMENI HIA Ez kd A T aximum value selection JARE AA y i ia M onitor Variable selection Playback buttons horizontal axis
257. et in the Register Field Click the Search Empty Register Button Available registers of the size to be used will be found and the leading address will be automatically entered in the Register Field Register Enter in WORD type the leading address of the C register group to be assigned Comment Enter a comment for this group A maximum of 255 alphanumeric characters can be entered Carriage returns and line feeds cannot be used 3 Click OK The global constant group will be created and it will be displayed under the Constant Variable Folder 2 Gy fee Register Comment List fe Variable fia System Variable Axis Variable fe 10 Variable fest Global Variable E Bit fia word E Long E Float A Address fe Constant Variable a C WAITOC O0000 C 00099 User structure I a Ladder Instruction Variable b Assigning Global Constants Use the following procedure to assign a constant variable to a group 1 Inthe Variable Subwindow right click the global constant group to which the variable is to be assigned and select Add from the pop up menu The Constant Variable Registration Dialog Box will be displayed 5 18 5 3 Variables that Can Be Set by the User 2 Set the following items as described u Constant Variable Registration C_TEST C 00000 100 variable Name Data001 Register cwoo000 Comment Upper Variable Name Number Unit Enter t
258. exit the wizard InstallShield The installation will begin and messages to indicate the progress will be displayed When the installation has been completed a window to complete the installation will be displayed 1 8 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 3 3 Installing MPE720 Version 6 6 Click the Finish Button YASKAWA MPE 20 Ver 6 InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete Setup has finished installing YASKAWA MPE 720 Ver 6 on your computer InstallShield The InstallShield Wizard will close and the installation of MPE720 version 6 will be completed 1 3 Installing and Uninstalling MPE720 Version 6 1 3 4 Uninstalling MPE720 Version 6 Use the following procedure to uninstall MPE720 version 6 1 Exit MPE720 version 6 and open the Windows Control Panel 2 Double click Add or Remove Programs or Add or Remove Applications in Windows 2000 E Control Panel E x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help F Q zack Ba p Search gt Folders fi gt a Vg Control Panel A Pick 4 category en Appearance and Themes om Printers and Other Hardware a oe ko h Windows Update Fa _ a ne Network and Internet Connections F User Accounts Q Switch bo Classic view See Also Help and Support lt Other Control Panel Date Time Language and Regional ba Options S F Add or Remove Programs E Options r oj Sounds Speech and Audio Devices Ac
259. f MPE720 version 5 Select Transfer MPLoader from the tree in the Environment Setting Dialog Box to bring up the window and then make the settings Refer to 7 8 1 Environment Setting Dialog Box Environment Setting aa ystaen Specified the detailled setting when the project data is transfered E3 Security with the MPLoader tool E Setup Transfer Specification of Register Data Po Ladder Fo c language C M register Eg Variable D register Ez Monitor C register E Transfer Clear the memory of Controller Transfer Not clear the memory O Clear the memory Transfer Specification of Others Backup the controller s data before transfer The flash saving i executed after transfer Stop the controller s CPU when transfer Transfer Specification of Register Data M register When this check box is selected M register data is transferred D register When this check box is selected D register data is transferred C register When this check box is selected C register data 1s transferred Clear the Controller Memory Not clear the memory When this is selected the memory will be cleared after transfer Clear the memory When this is selected the memory will not be cleared after transfer Transfer Specification of Others Backup the controller data before transfer When this check box is selected the data in the Machine Controller is backed up before transfer The flash waving is executed after transfer When
260. f you wish to change the import source folder click Browse oon Import Constant variable 5M Variable 3M Constant Variable v C_ DATA CONST DATA C_WAIT TEST C_QQQ QQQ Import folder settings K Documents and Settings Owner Desktop cS file The following message will appear asking for confirmation MPE720 Ver 6 Import the selected variable comment Do vou want to continue While importing E Documents and Settings Owner Desktop Coy fileSQ00 CTF Constant Register number Comment Unit Value Q001 000999 0001 pulse 0 While check the data Varable While reading the data C_OQQ QOG Complete End of import Constant variable End of import Eror Caution 5 55 Chapter 5 Variables 5 8 4 Exporting elmporting User Structures 0 8 4 a 5 56 Exporting elmporting User Structures A user structure that contains data of the structure members can be exported to a YST file from the MPE720 version 6 A desired name can be set for a YST file with a file extension YST Ifa YST file with the same name already exists in the export destination the data of the YST file in the export destination will be deleted and overwritten with the new data YST files cannot be edited The exported data in a YST file can be imported to the MPE720 version 6 as is The data in the destination file will be overwritten with the data in the imported file The following diagram il
261. files and export 0 Delete the all CSW files in the folder and export f Cancel the export Overwrite the CSV file in the folder and export The data at the export destination will be overwritten with the new file data Delete the all CSV files in the folder and export All the data at the export destination will be deleted and the new file data will be exported Cancel exporting The export operation will be cancelled and the dialog box will close 2 2 Motion Parameters 2 Import Multiple parameters can be imported at one time or each CSV file can be imported individually On the main menu in the Engineering Manager select File Import The Import Dialog Box will appear Select Batch import or Individual import Batch import Specified the CS file stored in folder ts bactoh imported the Fired Setups SERVOPRACE parameter of multiple axis Individual import Import the specified CSW file on parameter which opened window s parameter Y Online Import Operation Applicable Machine Controller Versions When online connected to a Machine Controller the import operation is disabled by some Machine Con troller versions The following Machine Controller versions are applicable for online import operation Machine Controller with SVB built in CPU version 2 35 or later and Machine Controllers with option SVB modules version 1 13 or later With a Machine Controller with SVB built in CPU versions earlier than 2 35 or
262. following message will appear asking for confirmation MPE 20 Ver 6 Export the selected user structure File information on the specified export is cancelled and overwrited Do vou want to continue Member LO0001 Member ME mber3 B 000D3E MEMBER Member 400011 TEST TEST2 400007 TESTA While exporting E Documents and Settings Owner Desktop CS file FILE1 pst Complete End of export User structure End of export Errol Cautiont 5 57 Chapter 5 Variables 5 8 4 Exporting elmporting User Structures b Import Data of user structures saved in a YST file can be imported to the MPE720 version 6 by using the following procedure 1 Select File Import User structure from the main menu The Open Dialog Box will appear 2 Selecta YST file to be imported and then click Open Look in CSV file SFist yst My Recent Documents File name FILET yst Files of type User structure file pst Cancel AG My Network Help The Import Dialog Box will appear 3 All the check boxes of user structures in the YST file specified in step 2 will be selected Clear the check boxes of user structures not to be imported and then click Import mf import User structure HM E User Structure v Structure Tester v TEST TESTER User_Structure Structure Import file settings K Documents and Settings Owner Desktop CS File FILE1 yst The following message will
263. fore starting transfer e When the connection is made without an open project file Data will be transferred from the CF card to the Machine Controller MP2200 CPU 02 The procedure is as follows 1 Select Online Transfer from the main menu and click the Read from CF Card Button in the Trans fer Dialog Box The Select Drive Dialog Box will appear 2 Select a drive to be used and then click the OK Button Select Drive Please select the drive Drive The Transfer Program Read from CF Card Dialog Box will appear 3 Click the Start Button Transfer Program Read from CF card Souce of transfer card pass RAMP _BKUPIBACKUP Removable disk 070 Reading from the CF card will begin When the reading is complete the following message will appear Click OK to end the transfer operation MPE 20 Ver 6 After the transfer is complete the data transfer log and results can be confirmed in the Transfer Subwindow 1 78 1 11 Transferring Data 1 11 10 Comparison with the Machine Controller This function differs as described below depending on whether a project file on the computer is open when offline and whether a Machine Controller is connected when online e Offline e Online When the project file for the data comparison is specified or a new file is created the data in the specified project file and the data in the Machine Controller RAM are compared and the results are outp
264. function external variables For other programs D registers can be assigned as internal variables These variables are local variables and are valid only in the programs in which they are assigned They are displayed in the Local Variable Subwindow Local Variable 2 Gy E Register Comment List fe Variable i Sa Internal Variable FB Bit fia Word fil Lang E Float a Address ageng e207 The following sections describe how to assign and edit internal variables and function external variables 5 21 Chapter 5 Variables 5 3 2 Local Variables for Use in One Variable 1 Internal Variables D Registers D registers can be assigned as variables for individual programs An assigned variable is valid only for the program for which it is assigned a Assigning Internal Variables Use the following procedure to assign internal variables If needed more addresses than those set for use in the Configuration Definition screen of the Program Property Dialog Box can be assigned refer to 3 2 1 Creating New Ladder Programs If so increase the number of addresses to be used to the same number as the variable to be used in the Program Property Dialog Box before using variables in a ladder program For the procedure to set Module Configuration Definitions refer to 2 7 Module Configuration 1 Open the relevant ladder program and display in the foreground of the Main Window Line up the mouse
265. g Setup System Settings Refer to 8 7 Setup System Setting Scan Time Settings Refer to 1 8 8 Setup Scan Time Setting Ladder General Refer to 1 8 9 Ladder General C language General Refer to 7 8 10 C Language General Linker Refer to 1 8 11 Transferring C Language Linker Variables Variables Refer to 1 8 12 Variable Variable Monitor System Monitor Refer to 7 8 13 Monitor System Monitor Transfer Transfer Refer to 7 8 14 Transfer Transfer MP Loader Refer to 7 8 15 Transfer MPLoader Print Ladder Refer to 7 8 16 Print Ladder The following operations are executed by clicking the buttons When the OK Button is clicked The current settings are saved the Environment Setting Dialog Box is closed and any changes are reflected When the Cancel Button is clicked 1 39 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 8 2 System Communication Setting Changes to the settings are cancelled and the Environment Setting Dialog Box is closed When the Apply Button is clicked Changes to the settings are overwritten and are immediately reflected The Environment Setting Dialog Box remains open allowing more settings to be made Be careful when clicking the Apply Button or the OK Button Clicking the Apply Button or the OK Button over writes the setting the items of tree in the Environment Setting Dialog Box The methods for setting these items are describ
266. g System Structures 9 22 5 3 Variables that Can Be Set by the User 4 Enter the variable name in the Variable Name Field and comment in the Comment Field and click the OK Button Inthe Variable Name Field enter up to 60 alphanumeric characters or up to 64 characters if the name begins with VAR_ An error will occur if a name identical to a register such as DBO db0O or IWO0000 iwO0000 is used Variable names that have already been assigned cannot be used again in the same program Reserved words such as motion instructions cannot be used For a list of reserved words refer to Appendix B Reserved Words The same address can be assigned for different data types e g DB00000 and DWO0000 When the address is assigned however a message will be displayed notifying that A malfunction may occur A maximum of 255 alphanumeric characters can be entered in the Comment Field Carriage returns and line feeds cannot be used in the comments Click the OK Button The Variable Registration Dialog Box will be closed and the assigned variable will be displayed in the Local Variable Subwindow VAR_ will be displayed at the beginning of the variable name to indicate that it is a local variable Local Variable E Register Eh Comment List Variable 8 Internal Variable eee Bit E VAR_VIA DB000000 fi Word fi Long E Float A Address aiqeueA 2207 In t
267. g items and methods are as follows a Import Path Specify the path of the folder in which CSV files are to be saved Either directly input the path or click the browse button b to select from the Select Folder Dialog Box When the dialog box is opened either the previously set path or MyDocument MPE720 is displayed b Browse Button Click this button to display the Select Folder Dialog Box Select a folder and the selected folder will be set for export path a c Module Name Displays the module name and line number of the motion parameter setting window displayed in the foreground of the Module Configuration Definition Window Module Name The module name for which a line number is assigned in the subslot SVB01 SVA01 PO or SVR is displayed Line Number Displays the line number defined in the Module Configuration Definition Line xx xx 1 to 16 For details on subslot and line numbers refer to Machine Controller MP900 MP2000 series Programming Software MPE720 Users Manual manual number SIEP C880700 05 d Axis Displays the axis assigned for the module The information given in the axis combo box in the motion parameter setting window of Engineering Manager is displayed e Fixed Parameters Displays CSV file names FixPrm_xxyy csv for fixed parameters of CSV file data xx indicates a line number and yy indicates an axis number If no file exists no CSV file name is displayed 2 12 2 2 Motion Parameters f Set
268. g parameter error FixedParamter Fixed parameter error Command Command setting error Communication Driver communication warning SubCommandSetError Sub command set error OutputDataOptionSelection Output data ooption selection TorqueCompensation Torque compensation MultiFunctionAnalogOutputFM MultiFunctionAnalogOutputAM MultiFunctionTerminalOutput Multi function analog output FM Multi function analog output AM Multi function terminal output AuxiliaryOutputDataOptionSelection Auxiliary output data option selection TorqueCompensation Torque compensation MultiFunctionAnalogOutputFM MultiFunctionAnalogOutputAM MultiFunctionTerminalOutput Multi function analog output FM Multi function analog output AM Multi function terminal output InputDataOptionSelection Input data option selection MotorSpeed Motor speed TorqueReferenceU109 Torque reference U1 09 EncoderCounter Encoder counter FrequencyReferenceU101 Frequency reference U1 01 MultiFunctionAnalogInputA2 Multi function analog input A2 MainBus Voltage AlarmCode WarningCode Main bus voltage Alarm code Warning code MultiFunctionAnalogInputA3 Multi function analog input A3 MultiFunctionInputTerminal Multi function input terminal Multi function analog input Al Encoder counter CH2 Input data option selection monitor MultiFunctionAnalogInputA 1 EncoderCounterCH2 InputDataOptionSelectionMonitor MotorSpeed Motor speed TorqueReferenceU 109 Torque reference U1 09 EncoderCounte
269. gr B Paste Ctrl V Delete Delete Compile The Create New Program Dialog Box will be displayed Chapter 4 Motion Programming 4 Set each item in the Configuration and then click the OK Button For details on Detail Definitions refer to 3 4 3 5 Ladder Program Properties Hf Create New Program _ Program No MPMOO1 Ls Program Name Configuration File privilege Detail definition Read Write D register Program No When a main program or sub program is created MPMxxx or MPSxxx is displayed automatically xxx represents the smallest number from 1 to 256 that has not been used for a program The xxx can be changed to any number by clicking in the input field to display the text cursor and then making the change Program Name Input a program name using up to 48 alphanumeric characters File Privileges The read and write privilege levels will be displayed Read and Write Set the read and write privilege levels to any of up to eight levels from 0 to 7 The higher the number the higher the privilege level will be The maximum value for each privilege level reflects the privilege level of the user who is accessing the pro gram For details on file read and write privilege levels refer to File Privilege Levels and Read Write Privilege Lev els D Registers Set the maximum number of D registers from 0 to 16 384 that can be used by this program When the OK
270. gram c Table of System Structures Refer to A 4 System Structures for details on variables included in each system structure d Editing Global Variables Variable names register addresses and comments can be edited 1 Inthe Variable Subwindow right click the global variable to be edited and select Edit from the pop up menu Alternatively double click the global variable to be edited The Edit variable Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Just as with assigning variables edit the variable name the register address and the comment and click the OK Button m Edit variable variable Mame pATAO Register MM oggi wt Comment Relay 1 0 If there is a comment already on the register to be edited a message will appear asking for confirmation to over write the comment MPE 20 Ver 6 It has already been set in the register MBOO0010 which the comment Stopping changed Do vou want to continue to overwrite Overwrite Comment WET is used Not Overwrite Comment Stopping is used Nok Overwrite Overwrite Overwrites the comment with the comment of the edited register Not Overwrite The comment will not be overwritten and the previous comment will remain unchanged Cancel Cancels the comment editing operation and closes the dialog box If there is a comment on the register before being edited and no unmatched comment on the edited register the previous comment will remain unchanged Y For global
271. grams A I H or L only Numbers are not allowed Level 2 programs Xnn X A I H or L n 0 to 9 Level 3 programs Xnn nn X A I H or L n 0 to 9 Only one main program can be created within each of the A I H and L programs Only one X00 program A I H or L processing error processing program X A H or L can be created within each of the A I H and L programs When the Create New Program Dialog Box is started from a folder or file in the Ladder Subwindow the program numbers that can be created are displayed 2 Program Name Enter a program name using a maximum of 48 characters 3 File Privileges The reading privilege level see 4 Read and writing privilege level see 5 Write for the program are displayed here 4 Read Select a reading privilege level between 0 and 7 for this program The higher the number the higher the privilege level will be Numbers cannot be entered directly A reading privilege level cannot be set higher than the current user privilege level For example if the current user level is 3 a level of 4 or higher cannot be set For details on user privilege levels and reading privilege levels refer to WUser Privilege Levels and Reading and Writing Privilege Levels below 3 6 3 2 Beginning Ladder Programming 5 Write Select a writing privilege level between 0 and 7 for this program The higher the number the higher the privilege level will be Numbers can
272. guage Ez variable 3 Monitor New Modified E Transfer Pj Print User Registration The user ig added edit delete which can be logged on to the controller project file Only the user of logon user s privilege and lower privilege than it is displayed ltiz valid since logon nest time 1 Registering New Users Click the New Button in the User Registration Window The User Registration Dialog Box will be displayed as shown below Set each item and then click the OK Button w User Registration User Mame Password User Privilege Reading Writing Default Privilege Reading Writing User Privilege Specified the privilege of the user who adds and deletes Higher privilege than the user privilege logged on cannot be set Default File Privilege Specified the default value of the program File privilege when the user newly makes the program who adds and deletes User Name Enter a name using from 1 to 16 alphanumeric characters Password Enter a password using from 1 to 16 alphanumeric characters User Privilege Select privilege levels of 0 to 7 for the user s reading and writing privileges The higher the number the greater the user s privileges will be For details on reading and writing privileges see Reading and Writing Privileges on the following pages Default Privileges Set the privilege level to be set by default when the user creates a new program Y Once a password has been set be very careful not to
273. h the up and down arrows are used to search up and down These buttons are invalid when the display is turned OFF by the Memory Map Display Button The search results are displayed in the Output Subwindow Registers used for more than one data type are displayed with a blue background Register List 1 Register MY 00014 2 MW00014 M00029 MW00044 M WO0059 MW00074 M00089 MW00104 4 0 0 5 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 eecece es eecececo sa eeoqcecea ow eece ce amp eececco eeoeooqoccs o eececceo E Output BlRegister List 1 Watch 1 XX Cross Reference 1 Ready Editing Data With a memory map double clicking a data cell or pressing the F2 Key will display the text cursor and enable the following editing operations e Entering data directly e Deleting setting to 0 e Copying and pasting Press the Enter Key to save the edited data While online the changes in the data will be directly reflected in Machine Controller operations 6 5 6 6 Chapter 6 Monitoring 6 2 2 Watch Function 6 2 2 Watch Function With the watch function values and comments for specified registers S I O M C or D can be monitored in the Watch Subwindow 1 2 or 3 This enables realtime monitoring when a Machine Controller is connected The values can be edited When Project Link Connection is used the data registered in the Watch Subwindow will be saved only in the Machi
274. hanging Edit Window Displays and 2 Displaying or Hiding Addresses Variables and Comments 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs Single line strings The maximum number of characters that can be entered in one line in the variable name display for an instruction object can be set from 10 to 259 Maximum Number of Lines The maximum number of lines that can be entered in the variable name display for an instruction object can be set from to 5 or to No limit Numbers cannot be entered Wrapping and Reduce Both of these are valid for structure variables e g axis variables such as Al axis motion command motion command status and command execution flag variables When Wrapping is selected variables are wrapped at periods When Reduce is selected only the beginning and end of a variable are displayed and the symbol is displayed in the middle The structure variable displays are as shown below Without Wrapping or Reducing Without Wrapping With Reducing Sewo command respon Sewo command respon ze ze STORE Faj STORE Faj LF Sre 00000 WLF Dest Aim SetValue WWLF Sre 00000 WLF Det A1 Command Set alue With Wrapping Without Reducing With Wrapping and Reducing e e E IO O EE E h WLF Sre 00000 WLF Dest A1 Command GetValue Display Register When the check box is selected register addresses are displayed in instruction objects This setting is linked with the operation of the Address Display Button
275. he Environment Setting Dialog Box select File Environment Setting from the main menu the System Monitor Subwindow will be displayed automatically when an alarm occurs Environment Setting Fo System E Alarm Notification E Security Automatically notified when the alarm occurs Notify E Setup Automatically notified when the battery alarm Mot notify P Ladder Eg c language Eg Variable E Monitor t gt System monitor Po Transfer Ez Print 2cm For details on measures to take when errors are detected refer to Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Chapter Data Tracing This chapter describes data tracing one of the monitoring functions 7 1 Overview of Data Tracing 7 3 7 1 1 What is Data Tracing 7 3 7 2 Data Trace Windows 7 4 7 2 1 Starting a Data Trace Window 7 4 7 2 2 Data Trace Window Configuration 7 4 7 3 Displaying Graphs 7 5 7 4 Operation Panel 7 6 7 4 1 Operation Panel Button Functions 7 6 7 4 2 Trigger and Configuration Dialog Box 7 7 7 5 Graph Area Operations 7 8 7 5 1 Functions of Buttons in G
276. he Variable Subwindow and select Add from the pop up menu The Registration Structure Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Enter a structure name in the Structure Name Field and comments in the Comment Field Then click Add ann a Registration Structure COL S S SO o Edit Delete The Add Structure Member Dialog Box will appear 3 Enter a member name in the Member Name Field an offset address in the Offset Address Field and comments in the Member Comment Field Then click OK Click the W Button in the Member Type Field to open the list and select the data type BIT WORD LONG FLOAT or ADDRESS Add Structure Member Member Mame Offset Address oo Bit o Member Comment Inthe Structure Name Field enter up to 64 characters starting with an alphabetic letter An error will occur if a name starting with a number is entered An error will occur if a register name such as MBO mb0 and IW00000 iw00000 is used for a structure name A unique name must be used for each structure A structure name that is already registered cannot be used more than once Nor can the system structure names provided by MPE720 version 6 be used Reserved words such as motion instructions cannot be used for structure names Refer to Appendix B Reserved Words for details on the reserved words A maximum of 255 alphanumeric characters can be entered in the Comment Field Carriage returns and line feeds cannot be us
277. he display method of registers that the coil uses from to Register to from Variable a Forcing State Indicates whether the searched coil is forced ON or OFF b Coil Displays the searched coils The following six coil symbols are used according to coil type and status Coil Symbol Coil Type ON OFF TION TOF TEON 76O TRON VRO c Program Displays the name of the program where the coil is searched d Variable Displays the variables or registers that are set for the searched coil e Comment Displays the comments set for the variable f Execution Step Displays the execution step number where the searched coil is located Refer to 3 3 1 Ladder Program Edit Window for details 3 5 Debugging Ladder Programs g Check Box Select the check boxes of the coils for which forced operations such as Forced ON Forced OFF and Forced Status Clear are to be executed Select an icon on the toolbar or select a command from the pop up menu to set or change the forced status of all the selected coils a Search in Forced Coil List Subwindow 1 Display the Forced Coil List Subwindow The Forced Coil List Subwindow can be displayed or hidden by selecting View Other Windows Forced Coil List from the Main Menu 2 Select Debug Forced Coil List from the main menu The forced status coils will be searched in all programs and the search results will be displayed in the Forced Coil List Subwindow To specify the programs
278. he program where the assigned variable is used the assigned variable name will be displayed for the instruction object of the applicable address b Editing and Deleting Internal Variables The following procedure can be used to edit or delete an internal variable 1 Open the relevant ladder program and display it in the foreground of the Main Window 2 Inthe Local Variable Subwindow right click the variable to be edited or deleted and select Edit or Delete from the pop up menu that will be displayed Edit The Edit Variable Dialog Box will be displayed Delete A dialog box asking for confirmation will be displayed Click the Yes Button to delete the variable Variables can also be edited by double clicking in the Local Variable Subwindow Variables can also be deleted by selecting a variable in the Local Variable Subwindow and then pressing the Delete Key 9 23 Chapter 5 Variables 5 3 2 Local Variables for Use in One Variable 2 Function External Variables A Registers A registers can be assigned as variables for individual function programs A function external variable is valid only for the function program for which it is registered A registers use memory that is specified using the address refer ence input to the function The programmer should take care not to overlap the memory usage processing a Assigning Function External Variables Use the following procedure to assign function external variable
279. he variable name to be given to the C registers being assigned and the value to be stored in that register Enter the variable name with up to 64 alphanumeric characters Click the drop down arrow to display a list of units from which to select The number can be set within the following ranges depending on the register data type WORD values 32 768 to 32 767 LONG values 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 FLOAT values 1 175e 38 to 3 402e 38 0 Enter a letter of the alphabet for the leading character of the variable name An error will occur if a number is entered first An error will occur if a name identical to a register such as MBO mbO or IW00000 iw00000 is used at the beginning of the variable Variable names that have already been assigned cannot be used again in the same group 5 Reserved words such as motion instructions cannot be used For a list of reserved words refer to Appendix B Reserved Words An address that is already used for another data type cannot be assigned again Register Enter the address of the C register for which the name is to be assigned Click the drop down arrow and select the data type from the list Cxnnnn will be input x W L or F nnnn the lowest number used for the selected data type within the address range of the group Comment A maximum of 255 alphanumeric characters can be entered for the comment for this variable Carriage returns and line feeds cannot be used 3 C
280. hen Difference between reference variables is selected as the type the Object Variable Setting Dialog Box will appear as shown below It will be similar when Sum of reference variables is selected Object Variable Setting Type Difference between refe v 1 Object Variable Setting K2 Object Variable Setting Setting Format K1 Reference variable selection 2 Reference variable selection Sek value Explanation The difference between two variables will be referenced on the Monitor page a Select a variable to be referenced in the list and click 1 Select reference variable 6 Select another variable to be referenced in the list and click 2 Select reference variable fc Click Set 5 in the variable Field on the Monitor page to set the selected variables id The difference between the two variables will be added to the Monitor page Close 7 6 List Area Operations 7 6 10 Find Dialog Box With a Monitor Variable selected in the list click the Find Button The Find Dialog Box will be displayed and the maximum value minimum value local maximum value local minimum value and time axis can be found for the selected variable Target Variable Msi sthwoooo1 Find Target Image Maximum value ka Find Area All Scope Data Find From Top mind to Backward Find to Forward g The following operations can be executed in the Find Dialog Box Amim 1 Amim Target
281. hen the InstallShield Wizard will be displayed YASKAWA MPE 20 Ver 6 InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully Name of the software YASKAWA Engineering Tool MPE 720 Ver6 Version 6 03 0012 License number 1 Software License Agreement Yaskawa Electric Corporation hereinafter referred to as VEC shall license the non transferable and non exclusive right to use this software provided with this Agreement to the customers hereinafter referred to as Recipient who bought this software under the Accordingly it shall be deemed to conclude this Agreement when Recipient opens this DISK PACKAGE Yr condition that Recipient consents the following terms and conditions a YEC should like to request Recipient to keep this Agreement accept the terms of the license agreement do not accept the terms of the license agreement InstallShield lt Back Next gt Cancel Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 3 3 Installing MPE720 Version 6 2 Click the Next Button to continue YASKAWA MPE7 20 Ver 6 InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for YASKAWA MPE 720 Ver 6 The InstallShield Wizard will install YASKAWA MPE 720 Ver 6 on your computer To continue v click Next a InstallShield The Customer Information Window will be displayed for registration 3 Enter the user name company
282. idates main program of high speed low speed by the automatic operation In that case please select enable From the popup menu of the main program and main program enabled If this message is displayed the main ladder program high speed or low speed is invalid in the Machine Controller and will not be executed even if the CPU is restarted RUN Even under the above conditions if there is a communications timeout or if a write error occurs due to not being able to communicate with the Machine Controller the message below in 2 will be displayed and disable processing will not be executed When High Processing of Invalid Low Main Program Is Not Disabled When Processing of invalid high low main program is set to Not Disable in the Transfer Window the following error message will be displayed if an error occurs during a data transfer with the CPU stopped MPE 20 Ver 6 Ad The error occurred during writing in the controller The transfer error occurred during write into controller There is creating danger of application damage when start the controller with transfer not completed Please solve the cause of the transfer error and execute writing to the controller again If this message is displayed the program will be executed when the CPU is restarted RUN even if the program is incompletely written Before restarting the CPU be sure to execute the data transfer again to ensure that the program in the Machine Controller is
283. ide Docked The form of the Automatic Hide Button switches each time it is Jappe Ep High speed clicked A L Logam If multiple subwindows are displayed on top of each other all of the EJ Hoz subwindows become displayed as auto hide subwindows aooo The Automatic Hide Button is not displayed in floating subwindows Interrupt fl Function 3 Changing the Display Type by Dragging and Dropping A docked subwindow can be changed to a floating subwindow or vice versa by dragging and dropping a subwindow tab or title bar An auto hide subwindow cannot be changed to another display type by dragging and dropping a Changing from Docked to Floating e The title bar of a docked subwindow is double clicked the display type is changed to floating e When a docked subwindow tab or title bar is dragged and dropped in any location a floating subwindow is displayed in that location e When the title bar of a docked subwindow is dragged and dropped when multiple subwindows are stacked the display type is changed to floating with the multiple subwindows stacked in the same way b Changing from Floating to Docked e When the title bar of a floating subwindow is double clicked the subwindow will be docked in the original docked position e A floating subwindow can be moved to a desired position by dragging the tab or title bar to the left right top or bottom of the main window and releasing the mouse button where
284. in program for manual operation HO2 07 asis 1 manual operation JOGES TEP HO2 02 axis 2 manual operation JOG amp 5 TEP i F HOB phase control main program oe Y Function Output Register p proa hersene E z Function Internal Register DN A Function External Register a HOB 02 phase control 2 electronic cam a L low speed main program HO6 01 phase control 1 electronic shaft Fig 5 2 Display Example Comment List for D Register and BIT Data A Start Comment List Register List 4 EI input Register Register Comment jannes 0 Output Register seen a M Data Register seen a Constant Register seen D Internal Register seen a Internal Constant Register seen Function Input Register seen Y Function Output Register a O 2 Function Internal Register 4 Function External Register 4 l Fig 5 3 Display Example Comment List for A Register and BIT Data Scroll the list to refer the comment for the target register address Click the Close Button for the Comment List Tab Page to exit the list display Enter the desired register address in the Register input field in the Comment List Tab Page 5 36 5 7 Comment Lists 3 Editing Comment Text Double click the Comment Field in the comment list or press the F2 Key The text cursor will be displayed and the comment can then be edited Press the Enter Key to save the edited comment Af
285. in the Ladder Editor Toolbar Refer to 3 3 4 Changing Edit Window Displays and 2 Displaying or Hiding Addresses Variables and Comments Comment Check Box When the check box is selected comments are displayed in instruction objects The method for displaying WLF Sre Ooo00 WLF Dest Ad GetValue comments can also be set When the check box is unchecked comments are not displayed and the setting fields are also invalid This setting is linked with the operation of the Comment Display Button in the Ladder Editor Toolbar Refer to 3 3 4 Changing Edit Window Displays and 2 Displaying or Hiding Addresses Variables and Comments Single line strings The maximum number of characters that can be entered in one line in the Comment Field for an instruction object can be set from 10 to 255 Maximum Number of Lines The maximum number of lines that can be entered in the Comment Field for an instruction object can be set from 1 to 5 or to No limit Numbers cannot be entered Allocate Comments in the instruction object Comment Field formatted as Center Flush Left or Flush Right 3 19 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 3 4 Changing Edit Window Displays d Key Allocation Tab Page Editor Option Color Font Ladder Rey Allocation o Category Instruction Mame Description of instr RELAY NOC NO Contact RELAY NCC NC Contact RELAY TOM 10m On Delay Timer n RELA TOFA ma Off Delay Timer n RELA TON I On D
286. ing motion programs 4 8 configuration definitions 3 44 connecting to machine controllers 1 55 Index Constant Variable Registration Dialog Box 5 17 5 18 controller type 1 41 converting CP ladder programs to ordinary ladder programs 3 59 CP 218 Communications Port Settings 1 18 CPU 1 61 CPU RUN 1 63 CPU STOP 1 61 Create New Program Dialog Box 3 6 3 35 4 4 creating functions 3 35 creating new ladder programs 3 6 creating new motion programs 4 3 creating new project files 1 32 cross reference searching 3 53 Cross Reference Setting Dialog Box 3 53 cursor A 7 9 cursor B 7 9 Cursor Setting Dialog Box 7 10 D D registers variables 5 22 data table programs 9 1 Data Trace Windows 7 4 data tracing 7 3 debugging 3 46 default user setting
287. ing that The out of range constants are to be deleted Yes or No Click the Yes Button The constants that are out of range will be deleted d Deleting Global Constants or Global Constant Groups Global constants can be deleted In a program where a deleted constant is used the constant will be replaced with the register when it is displayed When global constant groups are deleted all of the constants included in that group will be deleted 1 Inthe Variable Subwindow select the global constants to be deleted and press the Delete Key Alternatively right click the global constants to be deleted and select Delete from the pop up menu that will be displayed A dialog box asking for confirmation will be displayed Variable Variable Delete the variable TEST Dataodt Delete the constant variable C_TEST a i Delete all Following information ae Do you want to continue deleting Do you want to continue deleting When Global Constants are When Global Constant Group are Being Deleted Being Deleted 2 Click the Yes Button The selected global constants or global constant group will be deleted from the Variable Subwindow 5 20 5 3 Variables that Can Be Set by the User 5 3 2 Local Variables for Use in One Variable D registers and A registers have different contents for each ladder program For function programs however D registers can be assigned as internal variables and A registers can be assigned as
288. ion 1 2006 08 22 Modified history 2 2006 08 22 Modified history The latest 10 revision records of the program can be displayed 3 45 3 46 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 5 1 Monitoring Ladder Program Execution 3 5 Debugging Ladder Programs MPE720 version 6 has the following debugging functions Execution monitoring Refer to 3 5 1 Monitoring Ladder Program Execution Searching and replacing program variables instructions and comments Refer to 3 5 2 Searching and Replacing Searching and replacing variable names in project files Refer to 3 5 3 Searching and Replacing within Projects Searching registers being used Refer to 3 5 4 Cross Reference Searching Searching duplicate coils Refer to 3 5 5 Searching for Duplicate Coils Forcing coils ON OFF Refer to 3 5 6 Forcing Coils ON OFF Referencing called programs using the SEE instructions Refer to 3 5 7 Referencing Called Programs 3 5 1 Monitoring Ladder Program Execution When a ladder program is transferred to the Machine Controller and executed the instruction currently being executed will be indicated by a blue line and values for data currently stored in addresses will be displayed in blue Start H HD1 i OOOO M l D001 3 STORE u ogos WLF Sre DWOOOSO WLF Dest Duooo2s ML 4 STORE ml 0gig PWLF Sre 01000 MLF Dest Dwog0zz ML 4 Always ON EXPRESSION A 00s ML30100 0L00010 ML 1 ML30102 0L00012 ML301 10 0
289. ion Objects Register List N l ME Motion Subwindow T T E Refer to Chapter 4 Motion Programming Variable Subwindow Toolbars f Refer to 5 1 Overview Launcher Status Bar Cross Reference Subwindows 1 to 3 Refer to 3 5 4 Cross Reference Searching Check for Multiple Coils Subwindow Refer to 3 5 5 Searching for Duplicate Coils Register List Subwindows 1 to 3 Refer 6 2 1 Register Lists Watch Subwindows 1 to 3 Refer to 6 2 2 Watch Function Other Windows Output Subwindow Refer to 3 3 17 Ladder Program Compiling and Compile Options Other Windows Find Subwindows 1 and 2 Refer to 3 5 2 Searching and Replacing Refresh Other Windows Transfer Subwindow Refer to 1 11 Transferring Data Other Windows Forced Coil List Subwindow Refer to 3 5 6 2 Changing ON OFF Status of Forced Coil 1 28 1 6 3 Updating Subwindow Data The data displayed in a Ladder Motion or Variable Subwindow can be updated either by selecting View Update from the Main Menu or by pressing the F5 Key 1 6 Subwindow Operations The above operations update comment lists as well Refer to 5 7 Comment Lists 1 6 4 Types of Subwindow Displays When an Automatically Hidden Subwindow Is Displayed uonow Oy lt 4app27 E oe O HY MPE720 Ver 6 Sample version TEST MP2300 H Main Program H File Edit Yiew Online Program Compile Debug Window Help Hee The followi
290. ion Program Main Sub Program Table Data Variable 4xisf Input Output Global Constant a mediete User Structure El Comment When selecting Batch select the types of data to be compared from among System Configuration Program Register and Comment When ndividual is selected not only can System Configuration Program Register or Comment be specified but also the particular data to be compared For details on the data of the System Configuration Program Register and Comment that is compared refer to 1 11 1 Overview of Data Transfers 1 82 1 11 Transferring Data The comparison with the project file will begin When the comparison has been completed the following message will be displayed Click OK to end the compare operation MPE720 Ver 6 MPE720 Ver 6 Please confirm the content displayed in the output window 1 j Compare with Project File ended normally A Compare with Project File were difference No Difference Found Differences Found After the comparison is completed the data comparison log and result can be confirmed in the Transfer Sub window 1 83 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 11 13 Comparing with CF Card Data 1 11 13 Comparing with CF Card Data The data in the CF card will be compared with the data in a Machine Controller or a project file The operation differs depending on whether a project file on the computer is open when offline a
291. ironment Settings 1 8 Environment Settings The environment settings required for project files can be made in the Environment Setting Dialog Box 1 8 1 Environment Setting Dialog Box The Environment Setting Dialog Box will be displayed as shown below by selecting File Environment Setting from the Main Menu Environment Setting User Registration Project Password Tree Default User Setting Pj Setup PS Ladder PS c language Password USER A USER B USER C User Name USER A USER B USER C Default Privilege RUW Rie Ria User Privilege Aiwa RAT Ri 0 Non User Registration The user ig added edit delete which can be logged on to the controller project file Only the user of logon user s privilege and lower privilege than itis displayed ltiz valid since logon nest time The following settings can be made by selecting items from the tree Controller Type is for reference only An asterisk is displayed next to any item for which the setting has been changed after the Environment Setting Dialog Box is opened System Communications Settings Refer to 17 8 2 System Communication Setting Controller Type For reference only Refer to 7 8 3 System Controller Type Security User Registration Refer to 1 8 4 Security User Registration Protect Password Refer to 7 8 5 Security Project Password Default User Settings Refer to 1 8 6 Security Default User Settin
292. is a program that can be used to link to objects produced by compiling A support contract with Yaskawa is required to use this function 1 48 1 8 Environment Settings 1 8 12 Variable Variable These options can be used to set the variable display format in the Variable and Local Variable Subwindows and to make settings related to data processing when copying and dragging items from the Variable Subwindow Select Variable Variable from the tree in the Environment Setting Dialog Box to bring up that window and then make the settings Refer to 7 8 1 Environment Setting Dialog Box Environment Setting Po System E3 Security Variable Display Format PS Setup y Fy Ladder Comment Variable Register ex Enable the Servo Amplifier ServoON OBS0000 Po c language O Variable Fegister Comment ex ServoON OBS0000 Enable the Servo Amplifier Display Register Ez Monitor ita Data Processing of Copy Drag rin Store the variable on the clipboard Store the register on the clipboard Variable Display Format Comment Variable Register When this option is selected variables in the Variable Subwindow are displayed in the Comment Variable Register format Variable Register Comment When this option is selected variables in the Variable Subwindow are displayed in the Variable Register Comment format Display Register When this option is cleared Register is no longer displayed for the two
293. is symbol is used to indicate important information that should be memorized or minor precautions such as precautions that will result in alarms if not heeded Trademarks MECHATROLINK is a trademark of the MECHATROLINK MEMBERS ASSOCIATION Microsoft Excel Windows 2000 Windows XP and Internet Explorer are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the USA and or other countries Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation Other product and company names mentioned in this manual may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Trademark symbols and registered trademark symbols are not used in this manual W Caution on Managing Passwords The following passwords can be set for this software e User passwords Refer to 1 8 4 1 Registering New Users e Project passwords Refer to 7 8 5 Security Project Password e Program passwords Refer to 7 12 3 Setting Passwords for Ladder Programs e Online passwords Refer to 2 4 Online Security If a password is set and then forgotten or lost a project file can be opened and there is no way however to recover a project file or program Set passwords carefully and then take full responsibility for managing the passwords W Caution on Managing Project Files Proj
294. isplay positions When Cursor A Cursor B or Cursor A B is selected the cursor position on the graph is linked with the data position displayed on cursor A iB the Monitor Page and File Page of the List Area Cursor 4 Cursor Mode When cursor A or cursor B is not displayed Cursor A B cannot Cursor B be selected When Cursor A B with Same Interval is not set in the Graph Area Cursor A B cannot be selected The status will not change if disabled selections are selected oe Toggles the list display direction between vertical and horizontal List Display ae When OFF all variable data is displayed in the horizontal direction Direction When ON all variable data is displayed in the vertical direction Scot 2 MST Ma MST ws Td oe a wv 4 4 vi v z coir a Miwoo002 MiwO0003 Sw00016 Sw00017 sw00001 Program Calendar Month Calendar Hours F _x Auto _y Auto _x Auto _x Auto _x Auto Vertical List Display Example When this button is clicked with a Monitor Variable in the list selected the Find Dialog Box is displayed and the graph maximum value minimum value local maximum value local minimum value and time axis can be found Refer to 7 6 10 Find Dialog Box When this button is clicked with a Monitor Variable in the list selected the Calculate Dialog Box is displayed and the area average and absolute average calculation results can be referenced for the selected variable R
295. ist 1 E watch 1 Mk cross Reference 1 4OForce Coil List Ready CAP NUM SCRL CPU RUN can be set again even after it has been previously set by using this function This is because of the possibility that multiple users may be connected simultaneously to the same Machine Controller and that the CPU status may be changed by another user Even if the CPU status is changed by another user the CPU can be cer tainly restarted by setting CPU RUN 1 63 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 11 1 Overview of Data Transfers 1 11 Transferring Data 1 11 1 Overview of Data Transfers A data transfer involves writing reading or comparing data between a computer running MPE720 version 6 and a Machine Controller and saving the Machine Controller RAM data to flash memory The following types of data can be transferred System Configuration e System Definitions e Scan Time Definitions e Module Configuration Definitions e Data Trace Data Programs e Ladder programs High speed Low speed Start Interrupt Function e Motion programs Main Sub Group definitions e Table data e Variables Axis I O Global Constant and User structure e Comments I O Global and Constant Registers e M Data registers D Internal registers C Constant registers S System registers I Input registers O Output registers Registers marked by asterisks cannot be written The type of da
296. ixPrm_O103 cs Bah SrvPrm_O103 csv Bah SetPrm_O101 csv Bah SetPrm_O102 cov Ba SetPrm_O103 ca Files of type csv file csv Cancel 2 Select a CSV file to be imported and then click import The following message will appear Engineering Builder Import the specified data There is a possibility that the operation of the application changes when it is online connected to the controller because imported data is instantly reflected and saved Please confirm and execute no malfunction of the application by data which does the import Do vou want to execute import Click Yes to start importing the selected file When importing starts the progress indicator will display the per centage of the process that has been completed run status importing SrvPrrn_O103 czy The selected CSV file data will be imported to the parameter window displayed in the foreground of the cur rently opened window 2 14 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming This chapter provides an overview of ladder programming and describes basic operations 3 1 Overview of Ladder Programming 3 3 3 1 1 What is Ladder Programming 3 3 3 1 2 Overview of Ladder Program Functions 3 4 3 2 Beginning Ladder Programming 3 5 3 2 1 Creating New Ladder Programs 3 6 3
297. l 2 Monitor Parameters InputRelay2 Y MONSEL2 PACK2 PNACK2 MOV2L JOG2L ZRN2L OVER2 TIMING2 ZRN2 Channel 2 Parameter Setting Normal Channel 2 Parameter Setting Error Channel 2 Positioning Channel 2 JOG Operation Channel 2 Zero Point Return Channel 2 Overheat Input Status Channel 2 Magnetic Excitation Timing Input Channel 2 Zero Point Signal Input Status Z Channel 2 General purpose Input Status Input Register Word1 Input Register Word2 InputRegsiterW 1 InputRegsiterW2 InputRegsiterW3 InputRegsiterW4 Input Register Word3 Input Register Word4 InputRegsiterL 1 Input Register Long InputRegsiterL2 Input Register Long2 A 34 A Variable Tables A 3 1O Variables OUT OAxx00 OWxx00 OWxx01 OWxx02 OBxx020 OBxx021 OBxx022 OBxx023 OBxx024 OBxx025 OBxx026 OBxx027 OBxx028 JOGI OBxx029 ZRNI OBxx02A REVI OBxx02B COFF1 OBxx02D BFREE1 OBxx02E OUTI OBxx02F OWxx03 OBxx030 OBxx031 OBxx032 OBxx033 OBxx034 OBxx035 OBxx036 OBxx037 OBxx038 JOG2 OBxx039 ZRN2 OBxx03A REV2 OBxx03B COFF2 OBxx03D BFREE2 OBxx03E OUT2 OBxx03F OutputRegsiterW 1 OWxx04 OutputRegsiterW2 OWxx05 OutputRegsiterW3 OWxx06 OutputRegsiterW4 OWxx07 OutputRegsiterL1 ILxx04 OutputRegsiterL2 ILxx06 Output Reserve l Reserved for the System Reserve2 OutputCoill Reserved for the System Channel 1 Output Coils Channel 1 Alarm Reset Channel 1 Cancel Channel 1 Monitor Selector ARSTI CANI MONSELI PSET1 PRM10 PRMI11 PRM
298. laying or hiding addresses 3 15 displaying or hiding comments 3 15 displaying or hiding variables 3 15 displaying properties 3 41 docked 1 29 E each ladder program 10 5 Edit the Constant Variable Dialog Box 5 20 Edit Variable Dialog Box 3 33 5 10 5 16 editing branches 3 26 editing comment fields 3 33 editing constant variables 5 20 editing global variables 5 16 editing groups and logical axes 5 5 editing instruction objects 3 30 editing internal variables 5 23 editing motion program files 4 6 editing program comments 3 21 Editor Option Dialog Box 3 15 editor options 3 15 electronic cam data 8 2 electronic cam data preparation tool 8 1 enable main program 3 43 enable disable 3 43 enabling or disabling ladder programs 3 43 END Instruction
299. le in the MPE720 Ver 6 Window e Click a project file name displayed in History under Project in the Start Menu e Click File in the main menu and select a project file from the file history displayed in the menu e Drag and drop a project file icon into an MPE720 window that is already started e Select File Open Project from the main menu and then select a project file in the Project File Dialog Box e Click Open under Project in the Start Window and then select a project file in the Project File Dialog Box If one of the above operations is executed when another project file is already open in the same window the project file that was already open will be automatically overwritten and closed For details on closing project files refer to 1 7 6 Closing Project Files Ifthe contents of Communications Setting are saved in the selected project file the following dialog box will be displayed Refer to 1 9 1 Connecting to Machine Controllers MPE 20 Ver 6 Controller connection information is preserved in the project File ty Do you connect with the controller Connection 1 5erial COM1 Uniti When the connect Button Is Clicked The port set in the Communications Setting will be used to connect to the Machine Controller set in the project file and the application data saved in the Machine Controller RAM will be displayed If the displayed application data is edited and a save or exit operation is executed the changes will
300. le programs can be specified in the Target Program Field by separating them with commas and spaces Asterisks can also be used as wildcards in the Target Program Field as follows H L I A F all functions MPM MPS Wildcards can be used only in the above forms They cannot be used in forms such as H01 If Output log at Search 2 is selected the search results will be output in the Search 2 Subwindow and the output contents of the Search 1 Subwindow will not be changed If Output log at Search 2 1s not selected the search results will be output in the Search 1 Subwindow 3 Starts searching A progress bar will be displayed during the search and the search results will be displayed in the Output Subwindow Start the search SeryvoOn H Rung OO00 Step C002 NOC Operand 00 ServoOn H Rung 0001 Step 00DE NOC Operand 00 ServoOn HO1 Program Cannot search replace because the file does not open HO1 02 Program Cannot search replace because the file does not open HO2 Rung 0000 Step 0002 HOC Operand 00 ServoOn Hz Rung 0001 Step 0006 HOC Operand 00 ServoOn HO2 01 Program Cannot search replace because the file does not open HOS Program Cannot search replace because the file does not open End of search 4 founds 4 End the search by clicking the Cancel Button or the Close Button X 3 50 3 5 Debugging Ladder Programs 2 Replacing in
301. lete transfer Do you want to continue transfer b Anything Other than the Above a The transfer will be started by clicking the Yes Button b Yes The data will be transferred without first stopping the CPU CPU STOP The CPU will be stopped and then the data will be transferred Cancel The data will not be transferred Writing to the Machine Controller will begin Ifa writing error occurs refer to 1 11 5 Reading from Machine Controllers on how to take a corrective action When the transfer has been completed one of the following messages will be displayed MPE720 Ver 6 Ed MPE720 Ver 6 E s 1 Save to Flash ended normally If Save to Flash Was Specified If Save to Flash Was Not Specified 1 67 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 11 2 Writing to Machine Controllers If the CPU was stopped the following message will be displayed when the OK Button is clicked Click the Yes Button to restart RUN the CPU and end the transfer or click the No Button to end the transfer with the CPU stopped MPE 20 Ver 6 Lai h 1 RUN the controller After the transfer is complete the data transfer log and results can be confirmed in the Transfer Subwindow 2 Connected Online with an Open Project File 1 Select Online Write into Controller from the Main Menu Alternatively select Transfer Write into Controller from the Launcher The Transfer Program Write into Contr
302. lick the OK Button The name will be assigned and displayed under the selected group fee Register Comment List fe Variable ia System Variable Axis Variable E I0 Variable E Global variable E Bit fia Word E Long E Float a Address fe Constant Variable ie C_Waltic oo000 c o0099 Be Wake SUN O pulse iCwoO0000 User structure U Ladder Instruction Variable 9 19 Chapter 5 Variables 5 3 1 Variables that can be Referred from Any Program c Editing Global Constants Variable names registers and comments can be edited The size can also be edited 1 Inthe Variable Subwindow right click the global constant folder or global constant group to be edited and select Edit from the pop up menu that will appear Alternatively double click the global constants or global constant group to be edited The Edit constant Dialog Box will appear 2 Just as with assigning global constants edit the variable name register or the comment and click the OK Button N Edit the constant group variable Variable Name TEST Register cwooood we Size of Use 100 Search Empty Register _Wioo000 C h poga Register Comment Upper Comment When Global Constants are Selected When Global Constant Group are Selected Ifthe user attempts to assign a register out of the possible range when the Register Field is being edited a message will be displayed notify
303. ls refer to Convert Unit xN 7 6 5 Monitor Pages Adjust Cell Width W nd width of cells in the List Area to the width of the cell where the cursor Convert Unit U Toggles between displaying and hiding Cursor A Cursor B and Difference A B in T a Position P the List Area rsor 1u0n i i T ccna This operation is the same as selecting Display Cursor Position 7 6 List Area Operations 7 6 4 Select Monitor Setting Dialog Box The Select Monitor Setting Dialog Box is displayed by clicking the Monitor Setting Button The Data Trace Window displayed in the Main Window can be selected from Monitor I to Monitor 4 The default setting is for only Monitor I to be displayed For example selecting Monitor 3 and clicking the OK Button will cause Monitor I and Monitor 3 to be displayed in the Main Window A maximum of 16 Monitor Variables can be assigned on a single Data Trace Window Monitor Window The number of objects monitored can be expanded by setting multiple Monitor screens and the objects can be easily displayed by switching among the Monitor screens Select Monitor Setting Monitor EE Select Monitor For scope display Multiple settings simplify modification of scope target because 16 paints can be monitored at the same time 7 19 7 20 Chapter 7 Data Tracing 7 6 5 Monitor Pages 7 6 5 Monitor Pages Monitor Variables can be displayed assigned deleted and edited at a Monito
304. lue of the selected instruction Click the Background Text or Line color box or drop down arrow to display the Color Dialog Box shown on the left Select or create a color in the Color Dialog Box and click the OK Button The Color Dialog Box will be closed and the color will be changed in the Background Text or Line color box The color of the object in the Sample Field will be replaced by the selected color For information on how to create colors refer to help by clicking the Button in the Color Dialog Box Define Custom Colors gt gt 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs Sample Sample Displays preview b Font Tab Page Editor Option Color Font Ladder Key Allocation Sample Arial atte E Comic Sans MS TrueT ype Courier Courier New TrueT ype AaBbCo Estrangelo E dessalT rueT ype Fixedsys wt d E ET Style The following items can be set When a setting is changed the change is reflected in the text in the Sample Field Font Select from the list the font that is to be used in the Edit Window The fonts displayed in the list will vary depending on which fonts are installed in the personal computer Size Select from the list the font size points that is to be used in the Edit Window The text cursor is displayed by clicking inside the comb box and then a number from 1 to 128 can be entered directly If an out of range number is entered and the OK Button or the Apply Button is
305. lustrates the export import operation flow YST file per user structure PROGRAM YST MPE720 User structure version 6 Structure members Procedures to Export and Import User Structures Export Data of a user structure can be exported to a YST file by using the following procedure 1 Select File Export User structure from the main menu The Save As Dialog Box will appear 2 Select a folder as the export destination from the Save in drop down list and enter a file name in the File name Field Then click Save Save in CSV file O amp g My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents 55 hy Computer Flere e eo 3 J Save as type User structure file yst al hy Network The Export Dialog Box will appear 5 8 Exporting Importing Variables 3 All the check boxes of user structures in the YST file specified in step 2 will be selected Clear the check boxes of user structures that are not to be exported and then click Export mY Export User structure 3M E User Structure v Structure Tester W TEST TESTER User_Structure Structure Export file settings K Documents and Settings Owner Desktop CS File FILE1 yst If Browse is clicked the already specified export destination file name or the Save As Dialog Box to create a file for export destination will appear To create a new file enter a file name and click Save in the Save As Dialog Box The
306. m Comments 3 21 3 3 6 Inserting and Editing New Rung Comments 3 22 3 3 7 Inserting and Editing New Rungs 3 23 3 3 8 Inserting Branches 3 24 3 3 9 Editing Branches 3 26 3 3 10 Inserting Instruction Objects 3 28 3 3 11 Editing Instruction Objects 3 30 3 3 12 Entering and Changing Variables and Register Addresses 3 31 3 3 13 Editing Comment Fields 3 33 3 3 14 Entering and Editing Expressions for EXPRESSION Instructions 3 34 3 3 15 Creating Functions 3 35 3 3 16 Calling Functions 3 37 3 3 17 Ladder Program Compiling and Compile Options 3 38 3 3 18 Compiling when Exiting 3 39 3 4 Managing Programs in the Ladder Subwindow 3 40 3 4 1 Changing Ladder Subwindow Displays 3 40 3 4 2 Setting Passwords for Ladder Programs 3 41 3 4 3 Managing Ladder Program Files
307. maximum of four Data Trace Windows can be displayed For details on displaying multiple Data Trace Windows refer to 7 6 4 Select Monitor Setting Dialog Box 7 2 2 Data Trace Window Configuration A Data Trace Window is configured as shown below Start Scopel a 2r g Scope start stop view a Snap Monitor data No 100 Setting Lsrrigaer Type amp m Operation Panel Area BANS E ae AAE Refer to 7 4 Operation Panel Graph Area Refer to 7 5 Graph Area Operations gt fm Tiea AR Eea Calendar Seconds Auto Calendar Hours Minu Auto List Area Refer to 7 6 List Area Operations No of monitored data 00020 Latest monitor time oojooj2a 04 16 35 Scoping Mol For description purposes all of the above icons are shown as active e Operation Panel Area This area is used for general data trace operations such as starting and stopping a scope trigger settings etc It is always displayed regardless of the graph or list display mode Refer to 7 4 Operation Panel e Graph Area This area displays trace data Either a trend graph or an X Y graph can be selected The Graph Area is not displayed when the List Area display is maximized Refer to 7 5 Graph Area Operations e List Area This area is used for operations such as assigning and deleting Monitor Variables Monitor Variables are displayed in list format The List Area is not displayed when the Graph Are
308. me is clicked the project file is opened By moving the cursor over a file name a balloon appears And the location of the file the date that the file was created and the date that it was changed can be confirmed Refer to 1 7 3 Opening Project Files If any of the above operations i e opening a project file from New Open Close or History are executed while connected to the Machine Controller the connection will be closed 1 25 1 26 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 5 2 Start Window Controller Communications Setting Display the Communications Setting Dialog Box The communications port can then be set and a connection can be made to the Machine Controller Refer to 7 9 7 Connecting to Machine Controllers Connection Enable a connection to the Machine Controller using the communications port that is currently set Refer to 7 9 1 Connecting to Machine Controllers Disconnection Close the connection with the Machine Controller Refer to 7 9 2 Disconnecting from Machine Controllers History Connection Name Up to five connection names logical port number port type that have been used for connections can be displayed When a connection name is clicked changes the Machine Controller to which the connection is to be made can be selected Refer to 7 9 1 Connecting to Machine Controllers Help Help Start Acrobat Reader and displays help for MPE720 version 6 When the Close Butto
309. meOut PERRLevel Position Setting PERRLi mit S z Ss vi ae Status J Ti Z POSCOMP NEAR ZERO ZRNC AbsolutePositionReadCo mpleted RotationalDirectionOfAbs oluteEncoder Monitor TPOS CPOS MPOS APOS LPOS gt IncPosition Turns Latch Enable ZoneEnable ZoneLowerLimit ZoneUpperLimit LCOMP al e od dl IBxx0C7 IBxx0CA ILxx0E a Commendats Position Position reference Position reference type Phase compensation type with an electronic cam Position reference setting Position compensation STEP distance External positioning move distance Phase compensation Disable phase reference generation Absolute position reading demand Position setting Position completed width Position completed width 2 Home window Position complete timeout Deviation abnormal detection error level Deviation abnormal detection value Position status Distribution completed DEN Positioning completed POSCOMP Position proximity NEAR Zero point position ZERO Zero point return Setting completed ZRNC Absolute position read completed Report of rotating direction when absolute encoder is used Position monitor Machine coordinate target position TPOS Target position CPOS Machine coordinate system position MPOS Machine coordinate feedback position APOS Machine coordinate latch position LPOS Position error PERR Target position difference monitor POSMAX number of turns Latch Latch
310. mory usage Continue with variable assignment E f a register with the same address type already exists If a register with the same address type already exists in one project file the following message will appear asking for confirmation Change the register because the same register cannot be assigned in one project file Variable Registration 3 Enter the variable name in the Variable column and the comment in the Comment column Specify the address type MA in the Register column and then click OK The variable included in the assigned user structures will appear in the Variable Subwindow G3 ieee Register Comment List fe Variable System Variable Axis Variable E 10 Variable Se Global Variable ap Bit E BBB bbbimBooo000 Ward Lang Float ar Address OAE DATA User_Structure MAg Constant Variable E User structure User Structure Structure Structure Tester TEST TESTER The variables included in the assigned system structure will be displayed in the Variable Subwindow If the data type in the register is not the ADDRESS type the following message will be displayed Click the Yes Button to complete the assignment Variable Registration It is necessary to set the address type in a structural body Mwg00pi is changed to M400001 Do you want to continue 5 15 Chapter 5 Variables 5 3 1 Variables that can be Referred from Any Pro
311. mpleted run status importing SrvPrrn_O103 czy Limiting File Options for Import Right click the mouse in the Batch import Dialog Box to open the pop up menu Click to clear the check mark from the target fixed parameter target setup parameter and target SERVOPACK parameter Then these three parameter types will be excluded from the files to be imported The import file options set by using the pop up menu will be retained until the MPE720 version 6 is turned OFF and then ON again Batch import import path KAD ocuments and Settings Ownenkhy Documents MPE F20 Ey SVB circuitho specified the file name no select kd SERVOPACK Parame FisPrm 0101 csv Ej SetPrm_0101 csv Ej SrvPrm_0101 csv Ej axis E FixPrm 0102 cev Ej SetPrm_0102 csv Ej SrvPrm_0102 csv Ej asid E FixPrm 0103 cev Ej SetPrm_0103 cev Ej SrvPrm_0103 cev check all uncheck all w target Fixed parameter w target setup parameter w target SERVOPACK parameter Close 2 13 Chapter 2 Configuration 2 2 5 Exporting Importing Motion Parameters b Individual Import 1 Select File Import from the main menu and click the Individual Import Button in the Import Dialog Box The file import Dialog Box will appear All the CSV files including files whose names start with the specified character string can be selected file import Look in E MPE720 Eh FixPrm_O104 ESY Eh SrvPrm_O101 ESY Eh FixPrm_O102 cs E SrvPrm_O102 cov Ba F
312. n X in the Start Window is clicked the start window moves to the last main window without closing To exit MPE720 version 6 either click the Close Button in the MPE720 Ver 6 Window or select File Exit from the main menu E Saving Data when Connected to a Machine Controller after Opening a Project File When MPE720 version 6 is started from a project file and a connection is made to a Machine Controller from the Commu nications Setting Dialog Box or when a connection is made to a Machine Controller from Connection Connection Name in the Start Window the display will be changed to the contents of the application data stored in the Machine Controller RAM If the displayed application data is edited and then a save or exit disconnection operation is executed the changes will be over written in both the Machine Controller RAM and the selected project file on the computer 1 6 Subwindow Operations 1 6 Subwindow Operations 1 6 1 Descriptions of Subwindow Components Title Bar The title bar of the currently selected activated subwindow is displayed The title bar can be switched to a floating configuration with multiple subwindows by dragging it Ey i L Close Button Close the currently selected subwindow To display the subwindow again select the subwindow name from the View Menu Automatic Hide Button Specify automatic hide status Refer to 6 4 Types of Subwindow Program IU TEST MP2300 fae Ladder
313. n from the pop up menu that will be displayed Another method is to select Program Add Parallel Instruction Instruction Type Instruction from the Main Menu Another method is to drag and drop an instruction from the Instruction Subwindow into the instruction object of step 1 A branch with the instruction selected in step 2 will be inserted in parallel with the instruction object selected in step 1 Running Daoooo 10 DaBOOOdd 4 Semon Deaoooooo TWLF Sron F For details on entering comments and registers for the inserted instruction refer to 3 3 73 Editing Comment Fields and 3 3 12 Entering and Changing Variables and Register Addresses For information on the meanings and uses of ladder instructions refer to the Machine Controller MP900 MP2000 Series New Ladder Editor User s Manual SIEZ C887 13 2B ggg ML 4 3 25 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 3 9 Editing Branches 3 3 9 Editing Branches The following editing operations can be used for branches e Cutting copying and pasting e Moving branches by dragging e Changing branch positions e Deleting branches 1 Cutting Copying and Pasting Branches 1 4 Click the branching point of the branch that is to be edited A branch edit mark 5 will be displayed and the branch that is to be edited will be selected Be careful when clicking the branching point because the object that is selected will differ as shown below depending on which pl
314. n however edit logical axis names for axis variables They are described in more detail below Y Note that the user cannot edit comments for system variables and axis variables Note that changing the module configuration definitions or register range will automatically delete the variables The comments will not be deleted Changing the registers of already set variables will not replace the variables used in the ladder program S registers system variables and I O registers axis variables and I O variables can be assigned for trace However those registers that can be assigned are limited to registers of BIT WORD LONG and FLOAT type data 5 2 1 System Variables S Registers System registers S registers are assigned as variables so system variables are preset for MPE720 version 6 For a list of the system variables refer to 4 1 Variables that are Automatically Assigned by System Y Do not use the name that is same as the register name for the logical port Otherwise axis variables can not be used and the error message will occur 5 2 Variables that Are Automatically Assigned by System 5 2 2 Axis Variables I O Registers Axis groups with related operations can be assigned The logical axis variable set for all assigned groups is displayed in the Axis Variable tree in the Variable Subwindow IL E Register bese Comment List E Variable System Variable E E Axis Variable olf foe
315. n LS signal selection Zero point return reverse run side limit signal OBxx059 selection ReverceLimit Zero point return forward run side limit signal OBxx05A selection ForwardLimit IWxx04 IBxx043 IBxx044 IBxx045 IBxx048 IBxx04D ILxx02 IWxx01 IBxx021 IBxx022 IBxx024 Alarm Alarm P SOT N SOT ServoOff SpeedOutOfRange NotZRNC Positive soft limit Negative soft limit Servo OFF Excessive speed Zero point not set Warning Warning ParameterNumber Over range parameter number SettingParameter Setting parameter error FixedParamter Fixed parameter error MotionCommand Motion command setting error ServoParameter Servo parameter MotionSubCommand Motion sub command parameter OWxx5C ILxx56 IWxx58 IBxx580 IBxx581 IBxx582 IBxx583 IBxx584 OWxx5D OBxx5D1 OBxx5D2 OBxx5D3 FixParameterNumber Fixed parameter number FixParameter Value Fixed parameter monitor GeneralPurposeDI Monitor General purpose DI monitor DI 0 DI 1 DI 2 DI 3 DI 4 GeneralPurposeDO DO 1 DO 2 DO 3 General purpose DI 0 General purpose DI 1 General purpose DI 2 General purpose DI 3 General purpose DI 4 General purpose DO General purpose DO 1 General purpose DO 2 General purpose DO 3 A Variable Tables A 3 1O Variables A 3 VO Variables The names and models of the I O Modules that are used for I O variables are listed below Refer to the table on the ref erence page for related variables MECHATROLINK MECHATROLINK
316. n click Execute The Print Dialog Box will appear When printing is executed from the Print Manager for the first time the Printers Dialog Box will appear Set the printer type and then click OK 4 Set each item and then click OK Printing will start The List Manager will open at the same time as the Print Manager and indicate the progress of printing operation 10 14 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting This chapter describes how to use the System Monitor function to find errors in the program 11 1 Troubleshooting and Pop up Displays 11 2 11 2 Error Codes 11 4 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 11 1 Troubleshooting and Pop up Displays With the default setting the System Monitor Subwindow is automatically displayed as a pop up if an alarm occurs System Monitor Alarm occur ax X The alarm occurred Please click with the Run Status aj wor Onu m se amO em T pat 4 Clear El Setting Current Max E Setting High 10 0ms O Z ms 6 0 ms Low 200 0 ms 0 1 ms 2 7 ms Fi Clear Scan time When an error in the program causes the alarm that program is opened A setting in the Environment Settings Dialog Box specifies whether a pop up appears when an alarm occurs For details refer to 6 2 5 2 Pop up Display When an Error Is Detected The function that identifies locations of errors in the program cannot be used to identify
317. n may display an inverted current value If this happens 1 will be displayed in place of 0 so online current value display may be inconsistent as shown below EXPRESSION MB000010 MB000010 MB000010 4 0 0 MBO00010 hMB000010 MB000010 0 1 0 000g NL 1 000G 0010 NL 4 EXPRESSION MB000010 MB000010 M6000010 0 0 1 MB000010 MB000010 MB000010 1 0 0 6 2 Detailed Descriptions of Monitoring Operations 6 2 4 Displaying Offline Current Value While a Machine Controller is not connected while offline the current values of the registers can be viewed in blue characters by selecting Display Offline Current Value from the main menu The offline current value function is not supported for the IF ELSE WHILE and EXPRESSION instructions When register data is read using data transfer from the Machine Controller i e when the Register Checkbox is selected for reading from the Controller the register data that is read will be displayed When register values are changed by a means such as a register list the data for the applicable register will be refreshed but simulation will not be executed i e data will not be written due to a program condition turning ON Therefore no other register data will be refreshed DaOooOo2 DBOOOOS 4 DeBOoooooo ageng e207 0000 ML 4 DeOoooooo ae MWLF Ere 01000 MLF Dest Muvoo4o0 o003 Register mw00100 Monitor RE ey k
318. n outside of the subwindow is clicked As shown in the illustration to the left it is displayed above the main window and below floating subwindows 1 29 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 6 5 Changing the Subwindow Display Type 1 6 5 Changing the Subwindow Display Type 1 Selecting from a Menu ut MPE720 Ver 6 Sample version TES PU Eile Edit view Online Compile De Ue2An eS e In a subwindow with the Menu Button W displayed in the title bar SES Programming Monitor click the Menu Button to display the menu as shown in the illustration Scantime setting Modu u guration on the left Then select the new type of display on this menu To hide the subwindow select Hide on the menu Docking auth Nide To again display a subwindow that has been hidden select the subwindow to be displayed from the View Menu Refer to 1 6 1 Descriptions of Subwindow Components TEST MP2300 Ladder program High speed Low speed Start Interrupt Function 2 Changing from a Docked to an Auto Hide Subwindow In a subwindow with the Automatic Hide Button A or displayed in the title bar click this button to toggle between the docked and Program II TEST MP2300 E my Program TEST MP2300 fae Ladder program automatically hidden subwindows fl Docked Auto Hide 44 Auto H
319. n reset AlarmClear Alarm clear Ready SystemBusy Motion controller operation ready System busy InverterReady Inverter ready SpeedReference Speed reference TorqueReference Torque reference TorqueCompensationOption Torque compensation optional MultiFunctionAnalogOutputF MOption MultiFunctionAnalogOutputA MOption Multi function analog output FM option Multi function analog output AM option OutputFrequency Multi function terminal output OutputCurrent Output current MotorSpeedOption Motor speed optional TorqueReferenceU 109Option Torque reference U1 09 option EncoderCounterOption Encoder counter optional FrequencyReferenceU1010Option Frequence reference U1 01 option MultiFunctionAnalogInputA2Option Multi function analog input A2 option MainBusVoltageOption Main bus voltage option AlarmCodeOption Alarm code option WarningCodeOption Warning code option AnalogInput3Option Multi function analog A3 option InputOption Muti function input terminal option Multi function analog input Al option Encoder counter CH2 option AnalogInput1 Option EncoderCounterCH2Option Command Command OWxx08 IWxx08 IWxx30 IWxx32 IWxx09 IBxx090 IBxx093 IBxx098 CommandCode Command ResponseCode Command response code ResponseAlarmCode Response alarm code InverterAlarmCode Inverter alarm code Status Motion command status Busy Command executing BUSY flag Fail Complete Command error occurrence FAIL C
320. n the program to be printed in the main window and display it in the foreground of the window Select File Print from the Main Menu The Print Dialog Box will be displayed Set each item and then click the OK Button The program will then be printed Printer Name EPSON LP 9100 v Status Ready Type EPSON LP 9100 Place LPT1 Comment Print to File Print range Copies A All Nurmber of copies zZ Pages from 1 to Es EE z Collate 10 5 Chapter 10 Printing 10 1 3 Printing b Printing from Ladder Subwindow Program printing can be directly implemented from the Ladder Subwindow When there is no hierarchy of elements under the selected ladder program or no hierarchy of elements is displayed the Print Setup Dialog Box shown below will appear When there is a hierarchy of elements under the selected program refer to 70 1 3 2 Printing Programs as a Batch 1 Right click the ladder program to be printed and select Print from the pop up menu The Print Setup Dialog Box will appear 2 Seteach item and then click OK The selected ladder program will be printed Print Setup Printer Hame Microsoft Office Document Image Writer Shatus Ready Type Microsoft Office Document Image Writer Driver Where Microsoft Document Imaging Writer Port Comment Faper Orientation Size Ad w Refer to 3 4 1 Changing Ladder Subwindow Displays for display of hier
321. nabled for all models of the Machine Controller A file with CTF or YST extension cannot be edited The parameters that are applicable for import and export functions are fixed parameters setting parameters and SERVOPACK parameters of SVB 01 SVA 01 PO 01 and SVR Modules The following table shows the parameters of each module that are applicable for import and export function Module Fixed Parameters Setting Parameters SERVOPACK Parameters SVB 01 Applicable Applicable Applicable SVA 01 Applicable Applicable Not applicable PO 01 Applicable Applicable Not applicable Applicable Applicable Not applicable CSV File The specified name is set for each CSV file according to the motion parameter type regardless of module type such as SVB 01 SVA 01 PO 01 and SVR and a line number XX and axis number yy are added to the name A character string can be added in the beginning of each CSV file name as required Example CSV file name with a character string MPE for fixed parameters CSV file name MPE FixPrm_xxyy csv Axis number Line number Fixed parameters Character string Fixed parameter FixPrm Setting parameter SetPrm SERVOPACK parameter SrvPrm A CSV file data consists of an array with array elements separated by commas When a motion parameter is exported to a CSV file No parameter number is converted to A Name to B Input Data to C and Units to D The REG register number col
322. nction VAR_VIA bDBo00051 wiBooooo4 r f Ma VAR_VIA Relay VO f C STORE ON WLF Sre 01000 WLF Dest DATAD END e El Ladder E Motion amp variable zp Ladder Instruction Ladder Program Edit Window The Ladder Program Edit Window is displayed to perform either of the following operations e Creating new ladder programs e Opening ladder programs Both of these operations are described below For details on the Ladder Program Edit Window refer to 3 3 1 Ladder Program Edit Window 3 5 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 2 1 Creating New Ladder Programs 3 2 1 Creating New Ladder Programs 1 With a project file open right click a program folder from High speed to Interrupt or a level 1 or 2 program in the Ladder Subwindow and select Create New Program from the pop up menu that will be displayed The Create New Program Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Set each item and then click the OK Button I Create New P rogram E Program Mo i 1 Program Mame 2 Configuration f File privilege 10 Detail definition Read write Use register num D register Work register OONDOA W H register Fig 3 2 Create New Program Dialog Box The items to be set and the methods for setting them are described below 1 Program Number Enter the program number using alphanumeric characters beginning with the program type A I H or L The following rules apply when assigning program numbers Level 1 programs main pro
323. nd a ladder program tree will be displayed in the Ladder Subwindow When Disconnection is displayed by selecting Online from the Main Menu the connection with the Machine Controller has been completed M MPE720 Ver 6 MP2300 Start BR At File Edit View Online Compile Debug Window Help 8X OA EEN EN 7 MeNe E EAT Gallas ETN PHN Oe LE LLE EA eoo 70 ee Pe Oe gt Ex Online MP2300 1 Serial COM1 Uniti CPU RUN gt od Programming Monitor Transfer Utility Scantime setting Module configuration gt a l mP2300 Ladder program High speed Communications Setting E Low speed Connection 1 Serial COM1 Uniti B Start B Interrupt Disconnection Function 4 bn x History History DATA YHW 1 Serial COM1 Uniti E Ladder E Motion 5 Ladder Instruction variable Transfer ax Cuoutput Bitransfer ERegister List 1 EJwatch 1 X cross Reference 1 Force Coil List Ready CAP NUM SCRL The program displayed when a ladder program is opened after connecting is the program in the Machine Controller RAM and it is not yet saved in the HDD of the computer Refer to 1 11 5 Reading from Machine Controllers and save the Machine Controller application data to a project file on the computer 1 59 1 60 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 9 2 Disconnecting from Machine Controllers 1 9 2 Disconnecting from Machine Controllers The p
324. nd whether a Machine Controller is connected when online e When a project file is open The data in the open project file and the data in the CF card are compared and the results are output to the Trans fer Subwindow e When the Machine Controller MP2200 CPU 02 is connected The data in the Machine Controller MP2200 CPU 02 RAM and the data in the CF card are compared and the results are output to the Transfer Subwindow Use the following procedure to compare data 1 Select Online Transfer from the main menu and click the Compare with CF Card Button in the Transfer Dialog Box The Select Drive Dialog Box will appear 2 Select a drive and then click OK Select Drive The Compare Program Compare with CF Card Dialog Box will appear 3 Click the Start Button Compare Program Compare with CF card Destination card path Rs MP_BEKUP BACKUP Removable disk 070 Comparison will begin When the comparison is complete the following message will appear Click OK to end the comparison opera tion MPE 20 Ver 6 After the comparison is complete the comparison data log and results can be confirmed in the Transfer Sub window 1 84 1 11 Transferring Data 1 11 14 Detailed Comparison of Programs and Registers Data in the programs saved to two memories can be compared in detail Differences between the two sets of data are output to the Transfer Subwindow With the Compare Flash to RAM function
325. ne Controller To write the data in the project file transfer the data from the Machine Controller by executing the Read from Controller command and selecting the Batch Button Refer to 1 11 5 Reading from Machine Controllers 1 Display Watch Data 1 Click a tab to select one of the Watch Subwindows 1 2 or 3 Select Monitor Watch from the Launcher The Watch 1 Subwindow will automatically be displayed Menu The display will be toggled ON and OFF Display the text cursor by either double clicking the Variable Field or pressing the F2 Key and then enter the register or variable that is to be watched The register or variable can be entered by dragging and dropping or copying and pasting from a ladder program or the Variable Subwindow To watch a D register also enter the program number as shown below Watch 1 Variable Value SwWO0001 0 P ooggg 0 S000 14 Comment Program D Execution Scan Current Value 0 1ms Output Hi Search 1 FAlRegister List 1 Watch 1 Press the Enter Key The contents of the specified register will be displayed Variable comment Program Swogogi 0 Mgogog 0 Swop0l4 a DBOOOOO1 Right click the row and select decimal hexadecimal binary or ASCII from the pop up menu to change the data type in the Value Field To display or hide a Watch Subwindow 1 2 or 3 select Display Watch Watch 1 or 2 or 3 from the Main 6 2 Detaile
326. nection click Mm Setup Dial up and Virtual Private Network settings Add Choose Settings if you need to configure 4 proxy server For a connection Local Area Network LAN settings LAN Settings do not apply to dial up connections LAN Settings Choose Settings above for dial up settings i 1 aaa The Local Area Network LAN Settings Dialog Box will open 3 Confirm that the Automatically detect settings check box is not selected and then click OK to close the dialog box Local Area Network LAN Settings Automatic configuration Automatic configuration may override manual settings To ensure the aof manual settings disable automatic configuration Cherson detect settings _ Use automatic configuration script SS Proxy server p a proxy server for your LON These settings will not apply to dial up or YPN connections Address Pork Bypass proxy server for local addresses 4 For Windows 2000 click the Start Button and then select Settings Control Panel Click the Network and Dial up Connections Icon in the Control Panel For Windows XP click the Start Button and then select Settings Control Panel Click the Network Connections Icon in the Control Panel The Network and Dial up Connections Window on Windows 2000 or the Network Connections Window on Windows XP will be displayed 1 15 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Ve
327. ned by Engineering Builder to the replacing execution the program i not updated automatically Please open again after closing the program or executing The Register Tab Page is used for simple register replacements Replace in the project Register Address Source Kind Type BWLFA w Address 00000 vosi Destination Kind Mw Address 00000 Target Program When the program is opened by Engineering Builder to the replacing execution the program is not updated automatically Please open again after closing the program of executing The Address Tab Page is used to replace registers that match certain conditions Asterisks can also be used as wildcards in the Target Program Field as follows H L I A F MPM MPS 3 51 3 52 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 5 3 Searching and Replacing within Projects 4 Starts searching and replacing The relevant registers or addresses will be replaced A progress bar will be displayed during the operation and the results will be displayed in the Output Subwindow Start the replace SBOOOO04 js replace with SBOOOOO2 Success gt H Rung 0000 Step OO00 NOC Operand O00 SourceJSBOO0004 gt Destination SBO00002 Success gt H Rung 0001 Step 0002 NOC Operand O00 Source SBOO0004 gt Destination SBO00002 Start compiling H Main Program warning C5001 Rung 0000 Step 0001 Ope
328. ned by System ErrorlO ScanTime Calendar Count InputCount InputAddress OutputCount OutputAddress High HSet HCurrent HMaximum HOverCount LSet LCurrent LMacimum LOverCount Current Year MonthDate HoursMinutes Second Day SW00200 SW00201 SW00202 SW00203 SW00204 SW00004 SW00005 SW00006 SW00044 SW00010 SW00011 SW00012 SW00046 SW00014 SW00015 SW00016 SW00017 SW00018 SW00019 I O error T O error count Input error count Input error address Output error count Output error address Scan time High speed scan High speed scan set value 0 1 ms High speed scan current value 0 1 ms High speed scan max value 0 1 ms High speed scan timeover counter Low speed scan Low speed scan set value 0 1 ms Low speed scan current value 0 1 ms Low speed scan max value 0 1 ms Low speed scan timeover counter Execution scan current value 0 1 ms Calendar Calendar Year Calendar Month and date Calendar Hours and minutes Calendar Seconds Calendar Day of week A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details A 2 Axis Variable Details The following table lists the axis variables registered for each logical axis Register address IW IB IL IF IA xx00 indicates the leading input register address 00 Register address OW OB OL OF OA xx00 indicates the leading output register address 00 1 SVB Module Variables for Use with the SERVOPACK PMotonCommand Motion
329. nfiguration This chapter provides an overview of module configuration definitions and motion parameter functions 2 1 Module Configuration 2 2 2 2 Motion Parameters 2 4 2 2 1 Fixed Parameters 2 4 2 2 2 Setting Parameters 2 4 2 2 3 Monitoring Parameters 2 4 2 2 4 SERVOPACK Parameters 2 4 2 2 5 Exporting Importing Motion Parameters 2 6 2 2 Chapter 2 Configuration 2 1 Module Configuration The Module Configuration Window is used to define the Machine Controller main module CPU Module and Option Modules When a project file is created the module configuration must be set and saved When the module is connected to a Machine Controller project link connection and direct connection change the module configulation if necessary and save it For details of module configuration definitions refer to the MPE720 version 5 user s manual Machine Controller MP900 MP2000 series Programming Software MPE720 User s Manual manual number SIEP C880700 05 Set and save the module configuration of a Machine Controller with the following procedure 1 Select Setup Module Configuration Definitions from the Launcher The Engineering Manager
330. ng and Editing Ladder Programs Created by MPE720 version 5 on MPE720 version 6 35 radion Converting CPLadierFogams SSCS O e noses OOOO C SR Adkion Exporinpon ovais OOOO Modification I O Variables a 5 6 3 6 5 6 5 8 2 3 Engineering Tool for MP2000 Series Machine Controller MPE 720 Version 6 USER S MANUAL IRUMA BUSINESS CENTER SOLUTION CENTER 480 Kamifujisawa Iruma Saitama 358 8555 Japan Phone 81 4 2962 5696 Fax 81 4 2962 6138 YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA INC 2121 Norman Drive South Waukegan IL 60085 U S A Phone 1 847 887 7000 Fax 1 847 887 7370 YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTD A Avenida Fagundes Filho 620 Bairro Saude Sao Paulo SP Brazil CEP 04304 000 Phone 55 11 5071 2552 Fax 55 11 5581 8795 YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH Am Kronberger Hang 2 65824 Schwalbach Germany Phone 49 6196 569 300 Fax 49 6196 569 312 YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD 1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld G68 9LF United Kingdom Phone 44 1236 735000 Fax 44 1236 458182 YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION 7F Doore Bldg 24 Yeoido dong Youngdungpo Ku Seoul 150 877 Korea Phone 82 2 784 7844 Fax 82 2 784 8495 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SINGAPORE PTE LTD 151 Lorong Chuan 04 01 New Tech Park 556741 Singapore Phone 65 6282 3003 Fax 65 6289 3003 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SHANGHAI CO LTD No 18 Xizang Zhong Road Room 1702 1707 Harbour Ring Plaza Shanghai 200001 China Phone 86 21 5385 2200 Fax 86 21 5385 3299 YASKAWA ELEC
331. ng for cross reference The following illustration shows an example of printed program with cross reference information P00001 H01 Cross reference information MB300010 H04 0000 Motion 1 MB3000010 H02 01 0002w 0000 0000 WLF SrcA MW00000 NL 1 WLF SrcB 00000 Motion 2 MB300018 E MB3000018 H04 0002 H02 02 0002w C 0002 WLF SrcA MW00000 NL 1 WLF SrcB 00000 Servo on Servo on PG run ready MB300000 MB000020 MB000001 0004 NL 1 Servo on PG run ready MB300000 MB000020 MB001000 0007 m NL 1 Alarm clear Al t PB e MB000010 0004 C 0010 NL 1 Alarm reset PB MB300001 MB001019 0012 NL 1 0006 0014 NL 1 Cross reference information is given with Program name Step number Additional information in the same way as CP ladder programs Ex H01 01 0010w L_Additional information Step number Program name Only program numbers but not comments i H01 01 In order from First hierarchical level Second hierarchical level Third hierar FUNCO1 chical level In order from High speed Low speed Start Interrupt Function Program Name Step numbers are given with 4 digits in ascending order 0001 For CP ladder programs step numbers are given with 3 digits 1000 Subscript i or 7 H01 0010i Additional P J H01 0010j Information When being used as an output register w is added H01 0010w For CP ladder programs H01
332. ng illustration shows the three types of subwindow displays 3 Automatically hidden subwindows collapsed HF MPE72J Ver 6 Start Online Compile Debug Window Help i y EB 5 H Om x Aa P a VA 70 0 AD iy Programming Monitor Transfer Utility Scantime setting Module configuration uonow fol lt appe i Communications Setting Connection Disconnection FAyLadder Instruction Bi variable Output Cross Reference 1 x Force Coil List x EF sade ns Lee Oe LI Q x gt Meal AR Register Execution Step Forcing State variat E output Transfer B Register List 1 Ewatch 1 2 Docked subwindows 1 Floating subwindows 2h e OH2huiee GSA OB 1 Floating Ex R 46 AD E _ Subwindows can be displayed in the following three ways ax Displayed apart from the MPE720 Ver 6 Window Can be freely moved pe Transfer UEaRy by dragging the task bar E LI TEST MP2300 E Ladder program ic HHA E 2 Docked E High speed H Main Program aE This is the subwindow display type when MPE720 version 6 is first eta started after being installed Multiple subwindows are displayed on top tapaisi of each other just like the main windows The top subwindow can be changed by clicking the tabs 3 Automatically Hidden The subwindow slides out from the side when the relevant tab is clicked and closes when any locatio
333. ng z Positioning completion check time O n refere Export then 16 Speed reference 10n refer 20 Positive side limiti Disnlaved in 22 secondly Speed Q p ay 24 Override numerical Usd values ser umts ser units Lser units ms Wiser units Lser units ser units 20 Position reference 30 Width of positionin 32 NEAR signal outp 30 Positioning compla 40 Phase correction 4 4 Latch zone lower 46 Position loop gain 47 Speed loop gain When the number of digits of input data before export to a CSV file exceeds the space allowed this value is displayed in exponent form such as E 09 when the CSV file is opened This is because the display is limited by the cell width of the CSV file See the window shown above on the right Refer to Machine Controller MP2200 2300 Motion Modules User s Manual manual number SIEP C880700 16 for details of Input data The procedures to export and import motion parameters are described on the following pages 2 2 Motion Parameters 1 Export Select the CSV files created for each type of parameter and then export the selected CSV files to MPE720 version 6 1 Select File Export from the main menu The export Dialog Box will appear 2 Set the required items export path KAD ocuments and Settings Ownernhdy Documents MPE T20 Ey oi rcutH0 ified the fil G lect circu specifie ile name no selec kd dj Xe i g
334. nications Setting Set the communication setting Connection Logical port Mo With this procedure connection information will not be written to the project file even when the Connection Button is clicked To write connection information to the project file select Online Communications Setting from the Main Menu and then make the settings in the Communications Setting Dialog Box that will be displayed The Transfer Program Write into Controller Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Select Batch or Individual and then click the Start Button Transfer Program Write into Controller Target Controller MP2300 Serial Uniti A Batch a Individual Save to flash after transferring to the controller The Following Files will be transferred System Configuration System Definition Scan Time Definition Program Module Configuration Data Trace d Pegieter Ladder Program High speed Low speed Start Interrupt Function C Comment Motion Program Main Sub Table Data Variable Axis Input Output Global Constant User Structure 1 66 1 11 Transferring Data If writing to the Machine Controller is prohibited in the system settings under Setup in the Environment Setting Window a write error will occur when the Start Button is clicked and the following message will be displayed For details on system settings refer to 1 8 7 Setup System Setting MPE 20 Ver 6 The program transfer cannot start because Writ
335. not be entered directly A writing privilege level cannot be set higher than the current user level For details on user privilege levels and writing privilege levels refer to WUser Privilege Levels and Reading and Writing Privilege Levels below 6 Use Register Number The number of D registers work registers and registers used by this program are displayed here 7 D Register Set the maximum number of D registers between 0 and 16 384 to be used by this program The number can be set either by directly entering it or by using the spin buttons 8 Work Register The number of D registers used as work registers by the system is displayed here This number cannot be set 9 Register Set the maximum number of registers from 0 to 16 384 to be used by this program The number can be set either by directly entering it or by using the spin buttons 10 Detail Definition This setting is not required when creating a new program Refer to 3 4 3 5 Ladder Program Properties Make the above settings and click the OK Button The Create New Program Dialog Box will be closed and the Ladder Program Edit Window will be displayed as shown below with only the program title by default the program number the number 0000 rung and the END instruction entered A ladder program can now be created Shar tH agenes e207 moa ED ooo HL 4 For details on editing ladder programs and on the terminology refer to 3 3 Editing Ladder Pr
336. nsation StepDistance EXPOffset PhaseCompensation PhasePositionLoopEnable AbsoluteReadRequest Setting POSCOMPWidth NEARWidth ZEROWidth POSCOMPTimeOut PERRLevel Position Setting PERRLi mit S 3 D S i al i il Status DEN POSCOMP NEAR ZERO ZRNC Monitor TPOS CPOS MPOS APOS Turns Coordinate MachineOffset WorkOffset PresetRequest PresetTurns PresetComplete Register OWxx0A IWxx0A IWxx33 IWxx0B IBxx0BO IBxx0B3 IBxx0B8 IWxx31 IBxx310 IBxx311 IBxx312 OBxx095 OBxx096 OLxx1C OLxx24 OLxx44 OLxx46 OLxx28 OBxx051 OBxx005 OLxxlE OLxx20 OWxx3D OWxx26 OBxx010 OLxx22 IBxx0CO IBxx0C1 IBxx0C3 IBxx0C4 IBxx0C5 ILxx0E ILxx10 ILxx12 ILxx16 ILxxlE OLxx48 OLxx4A OBxx006 OLxx4C IBxx0C9 A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details Comments Sub command Sub command Sub command response code Auxiliary interver alarm code Sub command status Sub command executing BUSY flag Sub command error occurrence FAIL Sub command execution completed COMPLETE Sub command response status Sub command alarm Sub command warning Sub command ready Position Position Position reference type Phase compensation type with a electronic cam Position reference setting Position compensation STEP distance External positioning move distance Phase compensation Disable phase reference generation Absolute position reading demand Position setting Position completed wi
337. nsfer Register List 1 watch 1 X cross Reference 1 OForce Cail List Ready 1 Main Menu Used to select operations required for using MPE720 version 6 2 Toolbar Used to facilitate using functions related to project file management and programming 3 Launcher A submenu bar for quick and easy access to often used functions The launcher can be set to be displayed or hidden in the View Menu 4 Caption Bar Displays the Machine Controller connection status online or offline Machine Controller name CPU status when online and project file name when offline 5 Main Windows Aside from the Start Window the following windows are displayed depending on the operation selected Ladder Program Edit Window Refer to 3 3 1 Ladder Program Edit Window Motion Program Edit Window Refer to Chapter 4 Motion Programming Data Trace Edit Window Refer to Chapter 7 Data Tracing Register Comment Edit Window Refer to 5 7 1 Referencing Comment Lists For details on the Start Window refer to 1 5 2 Start Window 6 Window Tab Pages Used to select the window displayed in the foreground when multiple windows are displayed If there are many windows and not all of the tabs can be displayed click the W symbol to display a list of tabs from which to select Start H Main Program H02 H01 2004 08 16 HO3 H10 2004 06 02 A a i Ax H Main Program N f Lain Program Drive Run Command E Ho1 2004
338. nual manual no SIEPC88070014 1 12 Security 2 How to Set Clear and Change Online Security a Setting Online Security To restrict users from reading data in the Machine Controller use the following procedure when setting online security With the Machine Controller connected to the MPE720 version 6 online select Online Security Setting from the main menu The Security Setting Dialog Box will appear mf Security Setting Current Status File Reading Restricted Restriction Privilege 1 W Apply File Reading Restriction Ladder Motion iC Language Restriction Privilege fl r and higher are restricted MP2200 CPU O is used save bo CPU gt C4RD is prohibited regardless of the restriction privilege when the File reading restriction is set Security Key Change the Security Key Select the Apply File Reading Restriction check box and then select a program privilege level from the Restriction Privilege combo box list Enter a security key password in the Security Key Field and re enter it in the Security Key Confir mation Field Then click the Set Button The Set Button will be activated when one or more characters are entered in the Security Key Confirmation Field The file reading restriction and security key will be set and the following message will be displayed asking for confirmation MPE 20 Ver 6 Security setting has completed The security settings must be sawed to Flash memory to
339. ograms 4 5 4 3 1 Saving Motion Programs 4 5 4 3 2 Editing Motion Program Files 4 6 4 3 3 Displaying Property Columns 4 7 4 3 4 Compiling Motion Programs 4 8 Chapter 5 Variables 5 1 5 1 Overview 5 2 5 1 1 Types of Variables 5 2 5 1 2 Displaying Variables 5 3 5 2 Variables that Are Automatically Assigned by System 5 4 5 2 1 System Variables S Registers 5 4 5 2 2 Axis Variables I O Registers 5 5 5 2 3 I O Variables I O Registers 5 7 5 3 Variables that Can Be Set by the User 5 11 5 3 1 Variables that can be Referred from Any Program 5 12 5 3 2 Local Variables for Use in One Variable 5 21 5 4 Using Variables and Comments 5 26 5 4 1 Using Variables
340. ograms Em User Privilege Levels and Reading and Writing Privilege Levels Program reading and writing privilege levels are established to maintain program security To open a particular program the user must have a privilege level at least as high as the program s reading privilege level Similarly to edit and save a program the user must have a privilege level at least as high as the program s writing privilege level For details on setting and checking user privilege levels refer to 1 8 4 Security User Registration 3 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 2 2 Creating Ladder Programs in the CP Form 3 2 2 Creating Ladder Programs in the CP Form A new ladder program can be created using CP ladder language by selecting Use of Create new CP ladder option in the Environment Setting Dialog Box Ordinary ladder programs can be included in the same project file along with CP ladder programs Ordinary ladder programs are indicated by and CP ladder programs are indicated by in the Ladder Subwindow When a ladder program is created in the CP form use the Engineering Manager to save the program 1 Creating New Programs from the Ladder Subwindow 1 2 In the Ladder Subwindow right click a program folder or program from High speed to Interrupt and select Create new CP ladder from the pop up menu that will be displayed Create new CP ladder is displayed only when the Create new CP ladder use Option i
341. oller Dialog Box will be displayed The subsequent operations are the same as from step 3 onwards in 7 Offline with an Open Project File The Open Project Dialog Box will be displayed when Write into Controller is selected from the Transfer Dialog Box even while connected online with a project file open 3 Connected Online without an Open Project File 1 Select Online Transfer from the Main Menu and click the Write into Controller Button in the Transfer Dialog Box that will be displayed Alternatively select Online Write into Controller from the Main Menu A third method is to select Transfer Write into Controller from the Launcher The Open Project Dialog Box will be displayed Select the project file that is to be transferred and click the Open Button Open Project Look in 4 t Ge TESTO vw My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents Pr hy Computer a hy Network Select a project file for which the Machine Controller type is the same as that of the currently connected Machine Controller 01024 01 Mw Gila 1031 01 Mw Gila 1 101 0 vw 01104 01 yM 01107 01 YM 01108 01 YM Haaa Mw accw la M2100 4M Gla MP2100M YMw Gla MP2200 4M File name Files of type Ga TESTOOZ Yw Ga TESTOOS YW Ga test YmMw Gas TTT vy Project File M4 w The Transfer Program Write into Controller Dialog Box will be displayed The subsequent operations are the same as from
342. ollowing procedure 1 2 Select File Import Ver5 CMT file from the main menu The import of Ver5 CMT file Dialog Box will appear Select a CMT file to be imported and then click Import import of Ver5 CMT file My Recent Documents File name Files of type Import the selected Yer5 CMT File Do vou want to continue While importing K y eT ools MPE 208Co71 7Usr 4aa B4TESTISCMTSCMREGSMBSE 00 CMT A Register Symbol Comment E TFE While check the data Register While reading the data M Data register Comment Bit Complete End of import Verh CMT file End of import Eror Caution The data that can be imported is limited to registers and comments When you wish to use the symbols to which comments are assigned on the MPE 720 version 5 for variables on the MPE720 version 6 use the following proce dure to import the symbols to the MPE720 version 6 1 Select File Import Global variables and comments from the main menu Alternatively select File Import Local variables and comments Then create a CSV file 2 Open the CSV file to enter symbols in the variable column 3 Import the edited CSV file to the MPE720 version 6 In this way the symbols used in the MPE720 version 5 can be used as the variables in the MPE720 version 6 5 61 Chapter 6 Monitoring This chapter describes how to monitor items such as register status and the operating status of connected Machine Controllers
343. om 1 pt to 6 pt Color Displays the Select Color Dialog Box V Font Sets the font for displayed characters o m Sets a size from 8 to 72 points Can be entered directly A decimal point cannot V be entered E T I Italic Style U Underline V y Multiple selection possible When OFF Regular Displays a sample of font size and style Sample settings display only v v V Can be set lt lt Size l KELLE 3 Setting the X Y Graph Tab Page Settings related to X Y graph playback can be made on this tab page Set ze Print Playback Speed Set 100 ms Playback Speed Low ms Playback Speed Fast 10 ms Ratio of Fast Forward 3 Default Unit ms kai 1 29 Chapter 7 Data Tracing 7 7 3 Optional Settings 4 Setting the List Tab Page Settings related to the List Area display can be made on this tab page Set Graph Y grap TE rint Number of File Page i w Data Display es Sample Font MS Sans Serif w Text Color E Background color C Number of Monitor Data Number of File Page Select the default number of File Pages in the list from 1 to 8 Number of Monitor Data Set the number of data items to be displayed in the List Area while tracing is being executed All data is displayed when stopped or when a snapshot is taken For details on other settings refer to 2 Setting the Graph Tab Page 5 Setting the Print Tab Page Settings r
344. ommand execution completed COMPLETE SubCommand Sub command OWxx0A IWxx0A IWxx33 IWxx0B IBxx0B0 IBxx0B3 CommandCode Sub command ResponseCode Sub command response code AuxiliaryInverterAlarmCode Auxiliary inverter alarm code Status Sub command status Busy Sub command executing BUSY flag Fail Sub command error occurrence FAIL Sub command execution completed COMPLETE Sub command response status Complete IBxx0B8 IWxx31 IBxx3 10 IBxx311 IBxx312 SubCommandResponseStatus SubCommandAlarm Sub command alarm SubCommand Warning Sub command warning SubCommandReady Sub command ready A 11 A 12 A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details Variable Register Comments IWxx04 IBxx04F IBxx050 IBxx051 IBxx052 ILxx02 IWxx01 IBxx021 IBxx022 IBxx024 IBxx029 IBxx02A OWxx0C OBxx0C0 OBxx0C2 OBxx0C1 OBxx0C3 OWxx0E OBxx0E0 OBxx0E1 OBxx0E2 OBxx0E3 OWxx0D OBxx0D0 OBxx0D1 OBxx0D2 OBxx0D3 OBxx0D4 OBxx0D5 OBxx0D6 OBxx0D7 OBxx0D9 OBxx0DA OBxx0DB OBxx0DC IWxx0D IWxx0D0 IWxx0D1 IWxx0D2 IWxx0D3 IWxx0D4 IWxx0D5 IWxx0D6 IWxx0D7 IWxx0D9 IWxx0DA IWxx0DB IWxx0DC Alarm Alarm ServoParameterError Servo driver parameter setting error ServoCommunicationTimeout Servo driver synchronization communication error ServoCommunicationError Servo driver communication error ServoCommandTimeout Servo driver command timeout error Warning Warning ParameterNumber Over range parameter number SettingParameter Settin
345. on T Set the Trigger Configuration The items in the pop up menu can perform the same operations as the buttons in the Graph Area For details refer to 7 5 1 Functions of Buttons in Graph Area Using Mouse Cursors There are two types of cursor A and B in the Graph Area They can be used either individually or together For details on displaying hiding and linking cursors A and B refer to 7 5 7 Functions of Buttons in Graph Area Left clicking within a graph will cause the cursor to move as described below depending on the circumstances e When Only Cursor A or Cursor B Is Displayed Cursor A or cursor B will move to the location that was clicked e When Cursors A and B Are Both Displayed and Linked Cursor A will move to the location that was clicked and cursor B will move with it at a fixed interval e When Cursors A and B Are Both Displayed but Not Linked See note When the cursor mode in the List Area is set to either Normal or Cursor A cursor A will move to the location that was clicked Cursor B will not move When the cursor mode in the List Area is set to Cursor B cursor B will move to the location that was clicked Cursor A will not move Note When Cursor A B with Same Interval is not selected Normal cannot be selected as the cursor mode in the List Area Conversely when Cursor A B with Same Interval is selected neither Cursor A nor Cursor B can be selected as the cursor mode in the List Area 1 9
346. on 50 10 ms 50 Momentary Hold Time 1 20 Input Signal Selections 1 1881 H 8881 Input Signal Selections 2 8882 H 8888 H pe Input Signal Selections 3 ajajaj seno H O50D Input Signal Selections 4 8888 H 8888 H Output Signal Selections 1 0000 H 0000 H O50F 0510 Output Signal Selections 2 0100H 0100 H Output Signal Selections 3 0000 H 0000 H 0511 Input Signal Selection A 6543 H 6543 H 0512 Reversed Output Signal 0000 H 0000 H 0513 Output Signal Selection 4 0321H 0321 H 0515 Input Signal Selection 5 8988 H 8888 H O518 Excessive Position Error between motor and load position 1000 User units 1000 2 Lacar T For Help press F1 Display of alarm message and unmatched values can be used to prevent incorrect parameters from being written into a SERVOPACK Select Edit SERVOPACK Current Value Input Data from the main menu of the Engineering Manager to set the current value as the set value 2 5 2 6 Chapter 2 Configuration 2 2 5 Exporting Importing Motion Parameters 2 2 5 Exporting Importing Motion Parameters Motion parameter data can be exported from MPE720 version 6 to a CSV file or imported from the CSV file to MPE720 version 6 Export means saving data to a CSV file The CSV file data can be easily edited using Microsoft Excel hereinafter referred to as Excel Import means loading the CSV file data to the MPE720 version 6 Import is e
347. one 4 DZB Dead one B EXP Exponential EFR Expression FEND For End FGN Function Generator FINFOUT First in First out The FUNC instruction object will be entered at the ladder input guide position 3 Double click the Name Field and enter the function name to be used Alternatively select the function name to be used from the list displayed in the Name Field 5 The FUNC instruction object will be entered Hame FUMCO4 BJB VAL F BJB VAL 7 T 7 BJB VAL F BJB VAL F T 7 A gt BIBVAL 3 gt gt 4 Set the function s I O registers 3 37 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 3 17 Ladder Program Compiling and Compile Options 3 3 17 Ladder Program Compiling and Compile Options Before transferring a ladder program to the Machine Controller use the following procedure to compile it and to create and save compile data Programs can be compiled individually or all together 1 Any of the following operations can be used e Select Compile Compile from the Main Menu gt The program displayed in the foreground of the main window will be compiled e Select Compile Compile All Programs from the Main Menu gt All programs including motion programs will be compiled e Select the file name of the ladder program in the Ladder Subwindow and then right click and select Compile All Programs from the pop up menu that will be displayed gt All ladder programs will be compiled e Selec
348. ontrollers For details on the data of the System Configuration Program Register and Comment that is transferred refer to 1 11 1 Overview of Data Transfers Reading from the Machine Controller will be started When the transfer has been completed the following message will be displayed Click the OK Button to end the read operation MPE 20 Ver 6 E _l Read From Controller ended normally After the transfer is complete the data transfer log and results can be confirmed in the Transfer Subwindow 2 Online with an Open Project File 1 Select Online Read from Controller from the Main Menu Alternatively select Transfer Read from Controller from the Launcher The Transfer Program Read from Controller Dialog Box will be displayed The subsequent operations are the same as from step 3 onwards in 7 Offline with an Open Project File The Open Project Dialog Box will be displayed when Read from Controller is selected from the Transfer Dialog Box even while connected online with an open project file 3 Connected Online without an Open Project File 1 Select Online Transfer from the Main Menu and click the Read from Controller Button in the Transfer Dialog Box that will be displayed Alternatively select Online Read from Controller from the Main Menu A third method is to select Transfer Read from Controller from the Launcher The Open Project Dialog Box will be displayed 2 Either select the p
349. orCodeResponse Monitor2 OBxx020 OWxx4E IWxx2F ILxx30 ILxx32 ILxx34 Network servo user monitor information Servo user monitor 2 ServoUserMonitor3 Servo user monitor 3 Monitor4 ge Servo user monitor 4 A 9 A 10 A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details ServoParameter MotionCommand SetNumber SetSize SetValue GetNumber GetValue MotionSubCommand SetNumber SetSize SetValue GetNumber GetValue FixParameterNumber FixParameter Value ILxx56 OWxx50 OWxx51 OLxx52 IWxx36 ILxx38 OWxx54 OWxx55 OLxx56 IWxx37 ILxx3A OWxx5C Servo parameter Motion command parameter Servo user constant number Servo user constant number size Servo user constant set point Servo user constant number Servo user constant reading data Motion sub command parameter Auxiliary servo user constant number Auxiliary servo user constant number size Auxiliary servo user constant set point Auxiliary servo user constant number Auxiliary servo user constant reading data Fixed parameter number Fixed parameter monitor A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details 2 SVB Module Variables for Use with the Inverter Variable Register Comments OBxx00D OBxx00E OBxx00F IBxx000 IBxx002 IBxx003 OWxx11 OWxx12 OWxx13 OWxx14 OWxx15 IWxx11 IWxx12 IWxx13 IWxx14 IWxx15 IWxx16 IWxx17 IWxx18 IWxx19 IWxx1A IWxx1C IWxx1D IWxx1E IWxx1F DrivePermission Drive permission CommunicationReset Communicatio
350. ords Modularized position at power OFF Upper 2 words Absolute position at power OFF Lower 2 words Absolute position at power OFF Upper 2 words Modularized position at power OFF Lower 2 words Modularized position at power OFF Upper 2 words Speed Speed reference Positive side limiting torque setting at speed refer ence Secondary speed compensation Speed override Linear acceleration time Linear deceleration time S curve acceleration time Speed reference output monitor Feedback speed Torque Torque reference Speed limit during torque reference Feedback torque Home return Home return type Approach speed Creep speed Home direction Home offset InputSelect OBxx05B INPUT signal for zero point return A 7 A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details Gain Alarm Warning Variable IntegralClear SpeedLoopType SelectSecond SelectSecond2 PositionLoop SpeedLoop PositionFeedForward SpeedCompensation PositionIntegration SpeedIntegration ServoAlarm P OT N OT P SOT N_ SOT ServoOff POSCOMPTimeOut PositionOutOfRange SpeedOutOfRange FollowingError FilterTypeChanged FilterTimeChanged NotZRNC ServoParameterError ServoCommunicationTimeout ServoCommunicationError ServoCommandTimeout ABSEncoderOverrange ScanTimeSettingError MotorTypeError ConnectionEncoderDiffers ParameterNumber FollowingError SettingParameter FixedParamter ServoWarning MotionCommand P OT N
351. ore Target 2300 MP2300 Offline Local Siaa PT CPUR Column Attribute Table Data Table Name Table Type Table data store Comment For details on preparing data tables refer to Chapter 11 Data Table Folders in the Machine Controller MP900 MP2000 Series MPE720 Software for Programming Device User s Manual SIEP C880700 05 Chapter 10 Printing This chapter describes how to print out ladder programs and other programs 10 1 Printing Ladder Programs 10 2 10 1 1 Page Setup 10 2 10 1 2 Print Previews 10 3 10 1 3 Printing 10 5 10 1 4 Printing Cross Reference Information 10 8 10 1 5 Printing Call Program Instructions FUNC SEE MSEE 10 9 10 2 Printing Other Programs 10 11 10 1 10 2 Chapter 10 Printing 10 1 1 Page Setup 10 1 Printing Ladder Programs A ladder program can be printed page by page MPE720 version 6 contains various printing functions such as print preview display page setting cross reference information printing closed scope printing and circuit printing in reduced size Current values displayed while online can not be displayed in print preview or printed Refer to 10 2 Printing Other Programs for
352. otionSubCommand OWxx0A IWxx0A IWxx0B IBxx0BO IBxx0B3 CommandCode Motion sub command ResponseCode Motion sub command response code Status Motion sub command status Busy Fail Motion sub command executing BUSY flag Motion sub command error occurrence FAIL Motion sub command execution completed COMPLETE Position Complete IBxx0B8 Position Command Position reference OBxx095 OLxx1C OLxx44 MoveType Position reference type Position reference setting STEP distance Position setting Position StepDistance Setting ZEROWidth OWxx3D Home window Position status Distribution completed DEN Positioning completed POSCOMP Position proximity NEAR Zero point position ZERO Zero point return Setting completed ZRNC Position monitor Status DEN IBxx0CO POSCOMP IBxx0C1 NEAR IBxx0C3 ZERO IBxx0C4 ZRNC IBxx0C5 Monitor TPOS CPOS MPOS APOS IncPosition ILxx0E ILxx10 ILxx12 ILxx16 ILxx1C ILxxlE Machine coordinate target position TPOS Target position CPOS Machine coordinate system position MPOS Machine coordinate feedback position APOS Target position difference monitor POSMAX number of turns Turns A 17 A 18 A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details Variable Register Comments Coordinate Coordinate MachineOffset WorkOffset PresetRequest OLxx48 OLxx4A OBxx006 OLxx4C Zero point offset Work coordinate system offset POSMAX preset Preset d
353. peed Speed reference ForwardSpeedLimit Positive speed limit ReverseSpeedLimit Negative speed limit Positive side limiting torque setting at speed refer ence TorqueLimit OLxx14 OLxx16 OWxx18 OLxx36 OLxx38 OWxx3A SecondlySpeedCompensation Secondary speed compensation Override Speed override Acceleration Linear acceleration time Deceleration Linear deceleration time S_CurveTime S curve acceleration time Bias speed for exponential acceleration decelera tion filter reer OWxx3B ILxx20 ILxx24 ILxx26 ILxx28 ILxx40 SpeedMonitor Speed reference output monitor IntegralOutputMonitor Integral output monitor PrimaryLagMonitor Primary lag monitor Position loop output monitor Feedback speed Torque PositionLoopOutputMonitor FeedbackSpeed Torque OLxx0C OWxx0E OWxx33 ILxx42 Torque Torque reference SpeedLimit Speed limit during torque reference TorqueReferencePrimaryLagFilter Torque reference st order lag filter TorqueMonitor Feedback torque A 21 A 22 A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details Variable Register Commendts ZeroPointReturn Home return Method ApproachSpeed OWxx3C OLxx3E OLxx40 OBxx093 OLxx42 OBxx058 Home return method Approach speed CreepSpeed Creep speed Direction Home direction Offset DecelerationLS Home offset Deceleration LS signal selection Zero point return reverse run side limit signal OBxx059 selection ReverceLimit Zero point return forw
354. play by clicking the Expand Button The original display is restored by clicking the Contract Button The Local Variable Subwindow is displayed by moving the cursor to the Local Variable Tab Page Start H Main Program gt X Variable ax FARE T 1ST MOTION COMMAND Zi B A fie Register gt Register Eh Comment List Ely Comment List a Variable fia System Variable WLF SroA M000 EE tirerai Variable ta Internal Variable B Axis Variable WLF SreB 00000 m zI Bal 10 Variable fig Word E Global variable 2ND MOTION COMMAND x a fi Long E Constant Variable E Float A Address WLF SrcA M0000 WLF SreB 00000 SERVO ON COMMAND 0 5s Sampling Relay DB000010 DB000011 HighScan HalfSecond DB000010 DB000011 f Integration reset VAR_VIA bBoo0050 LAU_F IRST c Variable zp Ladder Instruction For details on entering variables in ladder programs refer to 3 3 12 Entering and Changing Variables and Register Addresses For details on variables refer to Chapter 5 Variables 3 13 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 3 3 Updating Subwindow Displays 3 3 3 3 3 4 Updating Subwindow Displays The data displayed in a Ladder Motion or Variable Subwindow or in a comment list can be updated either by selecting View Update from the Main Menu or by pressing the F5 Key For information on comment lists refer to 5 7 Comment Lists Ch
355. played in the Start Window as shown above and their contents will be displayed in ladder and variable subwindows If the contents of communications settings are stored in the selected project file the following dialog box will open Refer to 7 9 1 Connecting to Machine Controllers MPE 20 Ver 6 Controller connection information is preserved in the project File Do you connect with the controller Connection 1 5erial COM1 Uniti When the Connect Button Is Clicked The port set in the communications settings will be used to connect to the Machine Controller set in the project file and the application data saved in the Machine Controller RAM will be displayed If the displayed application data is edited the changes will be overwritten in both the Machine Controller RAM and the selected project file on the computer 1 4 Starting and Exiting MPE720 Version 6 When the Not Connect Button Is Clicked The project file on the computer that was first selected will be displayed For details on the Start Window refer to 1 5 2 Start Window For details on starting the Ladder Editor Window refer to 3 2 1 Creating New Ladder Programs and 3 2 3 Opening Ladder Programs 1 4 2 Exiting MPE720 Version 6 Either select File Exit from the Main Menu or click the Close Button X in the MPE720 Ver 6 Window Close Button in the MPE 720 version 6 Window ut MPE720 Ver 6 Start At File Edit view Online Compile Debug
356. point where this button is clicked Executes fast forward or return at the specified rate When these buttons are cleared playback is automatically resumed Can be used only during playback Fast Forward Return Slow motion Forward Executes slow motion forward or return 4 Slow motion Return Renato Beeman Select XY Graph Return to Beginning from the Main Menu 8 8 The beginning of the traced data will be returned to F rd to End Select XY Graph Forward to End from the Main Menu t The end of the traced data will be forward to 5 Fast Sets the forward and return rate inl Execution Time Displays the execution time for the playback display The unit can be set to ms sec min or data 7 15 7 16 Chapter 7 Data Tracing 7 6 1 Changing Pages 7 6 List Area Operations The following operations can be executed in the List Area monitor setting variable selection object variable setting data display setting cursor mode list vertical horizontal display switching searching calculations and maximum list display These operations can be executed in any mode regardless of the list display mode page For details on assigning Monitor Variables refer to 7 6 8 Assigning Monitor Variables An example of List Area display and configuration is shown below Page change buttons Refer to 7 6 7 Changing Pages D e na a g Monitor R xY Graph L Fie1 _ File 2 List operation buttons Refer to 7
357. program i E High speed Displays E s5 RN Menu Button Display the menu for selecting the subwindow display status Refer to 1 6 5 Hoz Changing the Subwindow Display Type Ey Low speed Ey Start Ey Interrupt H Function ooo Expand Button Displayed in a subwindow when a tree hierarchy or category list is displayed Expand the display to show the lower levels of the hierarchy or a list of items included in the category When the Collapse Button is clicked the displayed list restores the original display Tabs Change the subwindow to be displayed The order of the tabs can be changed by dragging one tab over another tab The subwindow display type can be changed from docked to floating by dragging the tab for l that subwindow to a position outside of the currently displayed subwindow Refer to 1 6 4 Ladder I E Moton Types of Subwindow Displays 1 27 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 6 2 Displaying and Hiding Subwindows 1 6 2 Displaying and Hiding Subwindows Subwindows can be selected for display from the View Menu When a subwindow Online Compile De that is currently displayed is clicked the checkbox is cleared and the subwindow A is hidden Ladder Instruction Motion Ladder Subwindow ahi variable Subwindows Refer to 3 4 3 Managing Ladder Program Files pide Relerence Ladder Instruction Subwindow aa aaa i Refer to 3 3 10 Inserting Instruct
358. program will be converted to an ordinary ladder program 3 61 Chapter 4 Motion Programming This chapter describes how to develop motion programs 4 1 Overview 4 2 4 1 1 What Is a Motion Program 4 2 4 1 2 Main Programs and Sub Programs 4 2 4 1 3 Group Definitions 4 2 4 2 Creating New Motion Programs 4 3 4 3 Managing Motion Programs 4 5 4 3 1 Saving Motion Programs 4 5 4 3 2 Editing Motion Program Files 4 6 4 3 3 Displaying Property Columns 4 7 4 3 4 Compiling Motion Programs 4 8 Chapter 4 Motion Programming 4 1 1 What Is a Motion Program 4 1 Overview 4 1 1 What Is a Motion Program A Motion Program is written in a structured text language called motion language It is referenced called from the ladder program using the MSEE instruction A maximum of 256 motion programs can be created W Motion Editor BOND_12 MP2300 Offline Local MPMO01 Seles PT CPU BOND_STAGE m lll us g E eo AxisO1 Serva Motion Program 00000 ABS Absolute Mode 00001 T MLO1068 Maximum Interpolation Fee
359. project file and the application data saved in the Machine Controller RAM will be displayed If the displayed application data is edited and saved the changes will be overwritten in both the Machine Controller RAM and the selected project file on the computer When the Not connect Button Is Clicked The project file on the computer that was first selected will be displayed Ifa password has been set for the selected project file the following Security Dialog Box will be displayed W Security Project Password Password Logon Password Password Enter the password that has been set and then click the OK Button For details on project file passwords refer to 7 8 5 Security Project Password 1 35 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 7 4 Opening an MPE720 Version 5 MAL File 1 7 4 Opening an MPE720 Version 5 MAL File A MAL file PLC folder compression file that was created in MPE720 version 5 can be converted to a YMW file and opened using the following procedure APLC folder is compressed by selecting File Transfer Block Transfer File Transfer MPE720 to Media in the MPE720 version 5 File Manager and then selecting the Compress option in the Execution Confirmation Dialog Box When MAL files are converted to project files new ladder programs that were not compiled and saved will not be converted Confirm that Verify All Programs has been executed in MPE720 version 5
360. put 16 E 24 VDC 16 point Output Module OW OUTO1 OBxx000 Output OUT16 OBxx00F Output 16 A 37 A Variable Tables A 4 System Structures A 4 System Structures The following table lists the variables included in each system structure x corresponds to M D or A registers Register address xW xB xL xF xA indicates the leading register address 00 PI_W PI Control integer type Lower integration limit DB o i Wann Plouputdeadand wo oo pea RO o i e O moo o i ee eon mooo e oeieo O Eoo i e overi Booo o i e Poo vooo i es ro wooo i ea o RO Ke W Pein o Ka W Dein o Tat xWxxx03 Divergence differential time Td xW Convergence differential time UE W005 Upper PD timit o AL AW Lower PD limit O S Yo n PD o PD_W PD Control integer type Kp Ki Ti IUL ILL UL LL Y Yi RLY Kp Kd Td1 Td2 UL LL Y A 38 A Variable Tables A 4 System Structures cont d T Convergence differential time K K T T T U L Y Y PD_F PD Control real number type Divergence differential time Upper PID limit vooo oes p O Control real number type Bo Yi X D E es LY PID_W PID Control integer type oe Me i wooo i fe oeoo xr PTnparvatisorge A 39 A 40 A Variable Tables A 4 System Structures cont d LAG _W First Order LAG integer type LAG reset S a eet sae First order lag time constant LAG output RLY Relay I O a T
361. r three level hierarchy programs the period between levels will be omitted as shown below Example CSV file name for H01 HO1 csv CSV file name for H02 03 H0203 csv Ifa CSV file with the same name already exists in the export destination the data of the CSV file in the export destination will be deleted and overwritten with the new data The procedure to edit or display CSV files when exporting or importing is the same as for exporting or importing glo bal variables and comments Refer to 5 8 7 7 Outline for details Right click a folder in the Variable Subwindow and select Export or Import from the pop up menu to implement the exporting or importing of data The following illustration shows the data export import operation flow CSV Files per Program H CSV D X Y Z Aregisters MPE720 Local internal variables version 6 Variables outside function Import Comments Structures Open and edit 5 47 Chapter 5 Variables 5 8 2 Exporting Importing Local Variables and Comments 2 Procedures to Export Import Local Variables and Comments a Export The local variables and comments assigned for each program can be exported to a CSV file by using the following pro cedure 1 Select File Export Local variables and comments from the main menu The Browse For Folder Dialog Box will appear 2 Select a folder as the export destination and then click OK To create a new folder click Make New Folder to ente
362. r Encoder counter FrequencyReferenceU101 Frequency reference U1 01 MultiFunctionAnalogInputA2 Multi function analog input A2 MainBus Voltage AlarmCode WarningCode Main bus voltage Alarm code Warning code MultiFunctionAnalogInputA3 Multi function analog input A3 MultiFunctionInputTerminal Multi function input terminal Multi function analog input Al Encoder counter CH2 MultiFunctionAnalogInputA 1 EncoderCounterCH2 Variable AuxiliaryInputDataOptionSelection MotorSpeed TorqueReferenceU109 EncoderCounter FrequencyReferenceU101 MultiFunctionAnalogInputA2 MainBus Voltage AlarmCode WarningCode MultiFunctionAnalogInputA3 MultiFunctionInputTerminal MultiFunctionAnalogInputA 1 EncoderCounterCH2 AuxiliaryInputDataOptionSelectionMonitor MotorSpeed TorqueReferenceU109 EncoderCounter FrequencyReferenceU101 MultiFunctionAnalogInputA2 MainBus Voltage AlarmCode WarningCode MultiFunctionAnalogInputA3 MultiFunctionInputTerminal MultiFunctionAnalogInputA 1 EncoderCounterCH2 InputCommand ForwardRUN ReverseRUN MultiFunctionInputCommands3 MultiFunctionInputCommandS4 MultiFunctionInputCommandS5 MultiFunctionInputCommandS6 MultiFunctionInputCommandS7 MultiFunctionInputCommandS8 ExternalFaultInputEFO FaultReset MultiFunctionInputCommandS9 MultiFunctionInputCommands10 MultiFunctionInputCommandS11 MultiFunctionInputCommandS 12 FaultTraceClearCommand ExternalBaseBlockCommand Register OWxx0F OBxx0FO OBxx0F1 OBxx0F2 OBxx0F3
363. r Page For details on assigning and editing Monitor Variables refer to 7 6 8 Assigning Monitor Variables The following table describes the items in a Monitor Page display using the illustration below as an example JL peca i normaly e Fine EEcelcuete TH Monitor E xv Graph LJ Fie1 riez Decimal v Normal v 7 E calculate C Difference Auto 10240 10240 Auto 10240 10240 Calendar Month Auto Calendar Hours Auto Auto System Program Auto Selects the Monitor Variable that is to be edited It is possible to view different data displays search calculate perform offset adjustments and change the cursor to a cross The following items are displayed M y Number y of monitor Fx y Number y of file x SUB Difference between two variables ADD Sum of two variables REF Reference variable Display Toggles between displaying f and hiding I a graph for a given variable Color Selects the color for a graph The Select Color Dialog Box is displayed by double clicking a cell The color can then be selected and set Used to enter the variable name or register address for the trace object Variable Variables can be entered by dragging and dropping from the Variable Subwindow A maximum of 16 register addresses or variables can be entered For a D register enter the name of the program in which the D register is used Comments are displayed display only Selects one of the follo
364. r a folder name Browse For Folder Export Folder settings EJ Desktop My Documents z y My Computer F3 A 344 Floppy 64 4 E s SYSTEM Cs See WINTA DB E S WINNT4E Es See WINGS FS E S WINSBE iG E s WINO H i Make Mew Folder The Export Dialog Box will appear 3 All the check boxes of ladder programs CSV files in the folder specified in step 2 will be selected Clear the check boxes of ladder program data not to be exported and then click the Export Button HP Export Program GS Ladder program E High speed H Main Program M E Ho fy Hoz E Low speed fae Start E Interrupt fs Function Export folder settings K Documents and Settings Owner Desktop CcS file 5 48 5 8 Exporting Importing Variables The following message will appear asking for confirmation MPE 20 Ver 6 Export the selected variable comment File information on the specified export is cancelled and overwrited Do vou want to continue Register Comment Variable Structure CFOO045 Speed CLOO001 START CLOOZO1 AUN CWOO000 COMST WART Cw 0000 TEA Cw 00999 0001 While exporting E Documents and Settings Owner DesktopCsy file Book1 csv Complete End of export Variable comment of global End of export Errol Caution b Import The local variables and comments assigned for each program can be imported from the CSV file to the MPE720 ver sion 6 by using th
365. r user Even if the CPU status is changed by another user the CPU can be cer tainly stopped by setting CPU STOP 1 62 1 10 Stopping STOP and Restarting RUN the Machine Controller CPU 1 10 2 Restarting Machine Controller CPU RUN Use the following procedure to restart a Machine Controller CPU that has been stopped 1 Select Online CPU RUN from the Main Menu The following dialog box asking for confirmation will be displayed MPE 20 Ver 6 Execution the user program Do you want bo continue 2 Click the Yes Button The display in the project caption bar will be changed to CPU RUN In addition the color of the caption bar and the CPU status shown on the right side of the bar will be changed N MPE720 Ver 6 MP2300 Start At File Edit View Online Compile Debug Window Help or Aimi l a 7 y i PEA r 49 sh SD Te me sa ase aD ja Daa P E E ee ed 4 5 Online MP2300 1 Serial COM Uniti CPU RUN Kki lie Programming Monitor Transfer Utility Scantime setting Module configuration Ladder Progam Gao a l MP2300 GS Ladder program Ladder Instruction 4 g x High speed Communications Setting Low speed Start Interrupt Disconnection E Function Connection 1 Serial COM1 Uniti History History DATA YHW 1 Serial COM1 Uniti El Ladder E motion Ladder Instruction Ti variable Transfer Cee Mae e Output 3 Transfer EfRegister L
366. rams by the following methods MPE 720 version 5 compatible programs mean that programs originally made with version 6 are compiled into a for mat that is compatible with MPE720 version 5 Refer to 3 3 77 Ladder Program Compiling and Compile Options for details 1 Select Compile Compile Option from the Main Menu The Compile Option Dialog Box will open 2 Select Compile to ver 5 compatible and then click OK E Compile Option Set the compile option Enable to multiple coil check Display and edit over ver 3 4 3 Select Compile from the Main Menu again The Compile to Ver 5 Compatible command will appear under Compile menu Click Compile to Ver 5 Compatible to start compilation or MPE720 Ver 6 TESTTEST MP2300 H Main Program File Edit View Online Program lee Debug Window Help 2pm u h a Fs aq Compile to ver 5 Compatible F8 Ss D amp G EE Ww nan rs Las Compile All Programs Offline MP2300 J Documents and 5 E a E a Compile Option Programming Monitor Transfer Utility Scantime setting Module configuration Ladder a ax Start H Main Program H hdain Program Program E l TESTTEST MP2300 fe Ladder program ay High speed E H02 CP Ladder E Ho3 peau Selecting Compile Compile All Programs from the Main Menu will compile all ladder programs at once MBOOOOOO PARA R 4
367. rand 00 DEO0OQOTi used with multiple coil warning C5001 Rung 0001 Step 0003 Operand 00 DBEO0OQOTi used with multiple coil Error 0 Warming 2 End of replace 2 founds Successful 2 Failed 0 The replace operation can be aborted by clicking the Cancel Button in the dialog box of the progress bar but the program will be compiled and saved with whatever items have already been replaced up to that point If an error occurs while the program is being compiled the items will not be replaced 5 End the replace operation by clicking the Cancel Button or the Close Button X After the replace operation has been completed the register or variable replacements will be displayed 3 5 Debugging Ladder Programs 3 5 4 Cross Reference Searching Variables or registers used in a program can be searched 1 3 Select Debug Cross Reference from the Main Menu The Cross Reference Setting Dialog Box will be displayed Set the variable or register to be searched and the name of the target program The target program can be selected from the list Variables can also be entered by dragging dropping copying and pasting from the Variable Subwindow Click the Search Button The cross reference searching will be executed and the search results will be displayed in the Cross Reference 1 Subwindow Input registers will be displayed in blue and output registers in red Cross Reference 1 L6000000 H Search Res
368. raph Area 7 8 7 5 2 Graph Area Pop up Menu 7 9 7 5 3 Using Mouse Cursors 7 9 7 5 4 Cursor Setting Dialog Box 7 10 7 5 5 Scale Offset Adjust Dialog Box 7 11 7 5 6 Trend Graphs 7 13 7 5 7 X Y Graphs 7 14 7 6 List Area Operations 7 16 7 6 1 Changing Pages 7 16 7 6 2 List Operation Buttons 7 17 7 6 3 Pop up Menu 7 18 7 6 4 Select Monitor Setting Dialog Box 7 19 7 6 5 Monitor Pages 7 20 7 6 6 X Y Display Page 7 21 7 6 7 File Pages 7 22 7 6 8 Assigning Monitor Variables 7 23 7 6 9 Object Variable Setting Dialog Box 1 24 7 6 10 Find Dialog Box 7 25 7 6 11 Calculate Dialog Box 7 26 Chapter 7 D
369. rea will change to the Trend Graph Mode In Trend Graph Mode Monitor Variables register values that have been set are displayed in graph format in a time sequence Operations such as pointer settings cursor settings scale adjustments and graph copying can be performed in this mode Operations in Trend Graph Mode are described in detail below 1 Operations in Trend Graph Mode The configuration elements of the graph in Trend Graph Mode are described below 1 Graph Area buttons 2 Monitor Variable selection vertical axis left ATEN EHAE 2 Monitor Variable selection vertical axis right M2 iS WwOooo1 3 Maximum value selection right 1 ii Filim CL 6 Maximum Graph N Display Button 3 Maximum value 4 Scroll bar selection left 5 Unit selection horizontal axis 1 Graph Area Buttons The Graph Area buttons are used in both the Trend Graph Mode and the X Y Graph Mode They can be used for operations such as setting or changing pointers and cursors or switching the graph display For details on the Graph Area buttons refer to 7 5 1 Functions of Buttons in Graph Area 2 Monitor Variable Selection Left Right Variable names and maximum values units can be set separately for the left and right vertical axes in a trend graph Clicking the drop down arrow will display in a list all of the variables for which the display is set to ON in the List Area Select the variables to be s
370. rence input data 0 Transmission reference input data 1 Transmission reference input data 2 Transmission reference input data 3 Transmission reference input data 4 Transmission reference input data 5 Transmission reference input data 6 Transmission reference input data 7 Transmission reference input data 8 Transmission reference input data 9 Transmission reference input data 10 Transmission reference input data 11 Transmission reference input data 12 Transmission reference input data 13 Transmission reference input data 14 TransmissionReferenceInputData1 5 IWxx7F Transmission reference input data 15 A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details 3 SVR Module Variables Variable Register Comments OBxx000 OBxx00F IBxx000 IBxx001 OWxx03 Servo ON Alarm clear ServoOn AlarmClear Ready Running Motion controller operation ready Running UnitsSelection Function 1 MotionCommand Motion command OWxx08 IWxx08 OWxx09 OBxx090 OBxx091 OBxx092 IWxx09 IBxx090 IBxx091 IBxx093 CommandCode Motion command ResponseCode Motion command response code Control Motion command control flag Pause Abort Direction Command pause Command abort JOG STEP direction Status Motion command status Busy Hold Fail Motion command executing BUSY flag Motion command hold completed HOLD Motion command error occurrence FAIL Motion command execution completed COMPLETE Motion sub command Complete IBxx098 M
371. request Latch zone enable Latch zone lower limit setting Latch zone upper limit setting Latch completed LCOMP A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details Variable Register Commendts Coordinate Coordinate MachineOffset WorkOffset PresetRequest OLxx48 OLxx4A OBxx006 OLxx4C Zero point offset Work coordinate system offset POSMAX preset Preset data of POSMAX turns POSMAX turn number presetting completed TPRSE ABS encoder Infinite length axis position information LOAD request PresetTurns PresetComplete IBxx0C9 AbsEncoder AbsDataRestore OBxx007 ABS system infinite length position control infor mation ABLDE Absolute position at power OFF Lower 2 words AbsDataRestored IBxx0C8 OLxx5E OLxx60 SetEncoderPositionL SetEncoderPositionH Absolute position at power OFF Upper 2 words Modularized position at power OFF iain Lower 2 words SetPulsePositionL Modularized position at power OFF ie el Upper 2 words SetPulsePositionH ILxxS5E ILxx60 GetEncoderPositionL GetEncoderPositionH Absolute position at power OFF Lower 2 words Absolute position at power OFF Upper 2 words Modularized position at power OFF acini Lower 2 words GetPulsePositionL Modularized position at power OFF moe Upper 2 words GetPulsePositionH Speed Speed OBxx012 OLxx10 OWxx12 OWxx13 SpeedAmendsDuringPositionControl Speed amends is effective at the position command S
372. riables Variables are used to assign names called variable names and comments to register addresses When a variable is input for an instruction object in a ladder program the register address and comment are entered at the same time For details on entering variables for instruction objects refer to 3 3 12 Entering and Changing Variables and Regis ter Addresses MPE 720 Version 6 does not support for the X Y and Z registers Several types of variables can be used Variables that Are Automatically Assigned by System e System Variables S Registers Prepared in the system and displays the operation status of the controller e Axis Variables I O Registers Displays the setting parameters for axes and the monitor parameters e I O Variables I O Registers Prepared according to the numbers of I O modules Variables that Can Be Set by the User e Global Variables M Registers Global Constants C Registers e Internal Variables D Registers e Function External Variables A Registers 5 1 Overview 5 1 2 Displaying Variables Variables are displayed in the Variable Subwindow and the Local Variable Subwindow as shown below The Local Variable Subwindow is displayed by moving the cursor to the Local Variable Tab Page displayed when the ladder program is opened Variable Local Yariable 7 En a Register fe Register Comment List Ely Comment List F wo me fe Variable Ga aaa aaa Variables that variabies
373. riables can be referenced in any project file e Global Constants C registers Global Constants can be referenced in any project file e Internal variables D registers Internal variables are local variables that are enabled only in the ladder program where they are set e Function external variables A registers Function external variables are local variables that are enabled only in the function where they are set Mregisters global variables and D registers internal variables can be assigned for trace However those that can be assigned for trace are limited to registers of BIT WORD LONG and FLOAT type data D registers cannot be used in motion programs W Precautions on Assigning Variables e If the register already assigned to a variable is also used for a variable to be added the following message will appear Variable Registration f Register MWOO000 overlaps TEST assigned to MBOOOO00 Data corruption or program error may occur due to duplicate memory usage Continue with variable assignment Yes Assigns the register to the variable to be added No Cancels new variable assignment e If the register already included in a structure is also used for a variable to be added the following message will appear Variable Registration The overlap of the register MLOO013 to occupation register address of the structure which was allocated by the yariable DATA There is 4 possibility to malfunction when the v
374. rocedure for disconnecting a Machine Controller depends on whether or not a project file is open 1 When No Project File Is Open 1 Select Online Disconnection from the Main Menu or select Disconnection under Controller in the Start Window The connection to the Machine Controller will be closed and the Ladder Subwindow will become blank The connection is also closed by exiting MPE720 version 6 2 When a Project File ls Open 1 Select Online Disconnection from the Main Menu or select Disconnection under Project in the Start Window The connection to be Machine Controller will be closed and a window will be displayed for the open project file The connection is also closed when by exiting MPE720 version 6 or by closing the project file 1 10 Stopping STOP and Restarting RUN the Machine Controller CPU 1 10 Stopping STOP and Restarting RUN the Machine Controller CPU The CPU must be stopped when transferring data to the Machine Controller or when writing to the Machine Controller flash memory This section describes how to stop STOP and restart RUN the Machine Controller CPU This function is valid only while connected online to the Machine Controller 1 10 1 Stopping Machine Controller CPU STOP Use the following procedure to stop the CPU of a Machine Controller 1 Select Online CPU STOP from the Main Menu The following dialog box asking for confirmation will be displayed MPE 20 Ver 6
375. rogram High speed Low speed Start Interrupt Function C Comment Motion Program Main Sub Table Data Variable Axis Input Output Global Constant User Structure Ce When selecting the Batch or Individual Button the types of data to be transferred System Configuration Pro gram Register and Comment can be selected When selecting the Individual Button the particular data to be transferred can also be designated For details on the data of the System Configuration Program Register and Comment that is transferred refer to 1 11 1 Overview of Data Transfers After clicking Start the data will begin writing into the project file 1 75 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 11 7 Reading from a Project File When writing is completed the following message will appear Click OK MPE 20 Ver 6 E I Read From Project ended normally After the transfer is complete the data transfer log and results can be confirmed in the Transfer Subwindow 1 76 1 11 Transferring Data 1 11 8 Writing into the CF Card The data can be written into the CF card The operation of this function differs depending on whether a project file is open or not e When a project file is open The data in the open project file that needs to be saved in a CF card is transferred to the CF card e When the connection is made without an open project file The data in the currently open project file that
376. roject file in which the data read from the Machine Controller is to be saved or Enter the name of a new project file to be created and then click the Open Button Open Project Look in 9 ProjectFile Data D Eng 23 MP2300 YMW 2 FEJ TESTOOL VMW My Recent Documents G2 1024 01 MW G23 1031 01 MW G23 1101 01 Mw 3 1104 01 MW EE TESTOOZ YW 3 TESTOOS YW test ymw Ga TTT yw 3 1107 01 MW 3 1108 01 MW Ha Aaa YM a acc MW 3 MP2100 YW 23 MP2100M MW 23 Mp2200 YW My Documents p My Computer File name Project File C YMW Files of type My N etwork Ifa new project file is being created the class of the currently connected Machine Controller will be set for that project file The Transfer Program Read from Controller Dialog Box will be displayed The subsequent operations are the same as from step 3 onwards in 7 Offline with an Open Project File 1 72 1 11 Transferring Data 1 11 6 Writing into a Project File Write the data in the open project file into another project file This function is enabled when the MPE720 version 6 is not connected to the Machine Controller This status is regarded as offline The procedure is as follows 1 Select Online Transfer from the main menu and click the Write into Project Button in the Transfer Dialog Box The Open Project Dialog Box will appear Sel
377. ror FixedParameterError PresetCompleted PILatchCompleted PulseO CoincidenceSignal PulseAStatus PulseBStatus PulseCStatus WritingFixedParameter DisconnectedAlarm POSMAXCompleted MultipurposeSignal ModuleReady IncrementalPulses Counter Value PILatchValue IncrementPulseAfterConversion CountValueA fterCounversion PILatchValueA fterCounversion POSMAXTurnsNumber FeedBackSpeed DetectedFrequency AverageFrequency SystemMonitor CNTRI OUT RUNMODE Prohibited PresetRequest PILatchRequest CoincidenceRequest POSMA XRequest MultipurposeOutPut FunctionSelections CountPresettingData AgreedDetection Value PresetDataPOSMAXTurns ZoneOutputMinimum Value ZoneOutputMaximum Value SpeedCoincidenceDetectionSetting SpeedCoincidenceDetection Width FrequencyCoincidenceDetectionSetting FrequencyCoincidenceDetection Width AveragingCountSetting SystemMonitor Register IAxx00 IWxx00 IBxx000 IBxx001 IBxx002 IBxx003 IBxx004 IBxx005 IBxx006 IBxx007 IBxx008 IBxx009 IBxx00A IBxx00C IBxx00D IBxx00F ILxx02 ILxx04 ILxx06 ILxx08 ILxx0A ILxx0C ILxx0E ILxx10 ILxx12 ILxx14 ILxxlE OAxx00 OWxx00 OBxx000 OBxx001 OBxx002 OBxx003 OBxx004 OBxx005 OWxx01 OLxx02 OLxx04 OLxx06 OLxx08 OLxx0A OLxx0C OLxx0E OLxx10 OLxx12 OLxx14 OLxxlE Comments 1 Channel Counter Input Status Data Setting Error Fixed Parameter Error Count Value Preset Completed PI Latch Completed Pulse A B 0 Coincidence Detection Phase A S
378. rsion 6 1 3 5 Communication Process Settings 5 For Windows 2000 double click the Local Area Connection Icon For Windows XP select Local Area Connection and then click Change settings of this connection in the Network Tasks field lt Windows 2000 gt lt Windows XP gt Network Connections twork and Dial up Connections 1 Ne File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help 4m Back p A Search yFolders 4 S gt a i ala 4 amp Q gt P Search Wey Folders Address a Network and Dial up Connections m Fall oR L th File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Advanced Help Address e Network Connections Type Statu LAN or High Speed Inter Netwo LAN or High Speed Inter Conne Make New Local 4rea Network Tasks IML ocal Area Connection D Connection Connection oF z Create a new connection Set up a home or small office network Change Windows Firewall settings Disable this network device mi Rename this connection Change settings of this onnection A maf c miM The Local Area Connection Properties Dialog Box will be displayed 6 Select the Internet Protocol TCP IP check box in the General Tab Page and then click the Proper ties Button i Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using E9 Realtek RTLS139 Family PCI Fast Et This connection uses the following
379. s 1 Open the relevant function and display in the foreground of the Main Window Line up the mouse cursor with the Local Variable Tab Page to display the Local Variable Subwindow Ladder TAX Start FUNCOI eX b FUNCOA ocal Variable E Local Variable Program a 5000 Coo oo o 7 M ABC MP2300 ooo i ee Register i Ladder program HL 1 Comment List Ei High speed r fe variable fay Low speed Es Internal variable E Start EE Function External variable E Interrupt f Function 2 Right click the Function External Variable Folder and select Add The Variable Registration Dialog Box will be displayed In the Register Field the lowest address used for each data type among the A registers for which variables can be assigned will be displayed The Variable Registration Dialog Box can be displayed even if the character string for the variable to be registered has been entered and confirmed in the Variable Name Field for the user object in the Main Window 3 Enter the register address in the Register Field Click the Structure Button A list of structures will be displayed By giving a variable name folder name to the structure the variables that are included in that structure can be assigned together Variable Registration FUNCO1 Variable Mame Register comment For details on system structures refer to 5 3 1 7 b Creating System Stru
380. s Y With project link connection the data saved in the Machine Controller RAM will be printed for CP ladder pro grams and the data saved in a project file will be printed for registers definitions system definition scan time definition module configuration data trace and motion programs With direct connection data other than CP ladder programs cannot be printed as no project file was open when connecting the Machine Controller to the MPE720 version 6 Refer to 7 9 7 Connecting to Machine Controllers for details on project link connection and direct connection 1 Executing Printing from Launcher Execute printing from the Launcher 1 Select Utility Print Manager from the Launcher The Print Manager will open FA Print Manager File Edit Print wiew Help Su S 0 User e DWG No PSMPL 962401 Used at e Draw o Equipment Silla Date 2006 08 09 Usage TF Program Register Definition Motion Drawing List Drawing Program Function List Function Program Constant T able C REG List Constant Table C REG Table Data Store Target Table Data Definition SSS aa SSS Ee First aaae O Refer to 1 5 1 Names and Descriptions of Window Components for information on Launcher 10 11 Chapter 10 Printing 2 Select Print Execute print from the main menu The Execute print Dialog Box will appear Execute print Register Definition Motion Margin 5 50 5 50 Left 5 5
381. s The variable will be entered in the instruction object After High Sean Star t Only 1 Scan OW Paste HighScan FirtScanRu oning SB00000 4 The variable cannot be entered when anything other than the Variable Name Field is selected 3 Dragging and Dropping Variables 1 Select the variable that is to be entered or changed in the Variable Subwindow and then drag it to the instruction object 2 When gt is displayed in the Variable Name Field of the instruction object release the mouse button to enter the variable Variable 41 E Start HO4 mr gt Register Comment List Variable E System Variable lef Always ON OnCoilfSBO00004 Calendar Clock H04 gt ajqeLeA 2307 7 E3 Controller CPU High Speed Program Error ErrorHigh F 7 Interrupt Program Error ErrorInterrupt IJO Error ErrorIo Low Speed Program Error ErrorLow Start Program Error ErrorStart i High Scan Relay HighScan EE After High Scan Start Only 1 Scan ON FirstScanRunning SBO00001 E Start up Relay OndAfter ffl Samplina Relay PulseEverv 3 32 3 3 Editing Ladder Programs 3 3 13 Editing Comment Fields The Comment Field for an instruction object can be edited The method for editing a Comment Field differs depending on whether or not a variable comment is being used in the Comment Field A variable comment being used in the Comment Field means th
382. s described below depending on whether a project file is currently open e When a project file is open Offline The current project file data is transferred to the Machine Controller When offline first connect to the Machine Controller before the transfer e When a MPE720 is connected to the Machine Controller with a project file open Project Link Connection If the Write into Controller Button in the Transfer Dialog Box is clicked the Open Project Dialog Box will appear e When the connection is made without an open project file Direct connection The project file that is to be the transfer source is first selected and then the data is transferred to the Machine Controller These methods are described in detail below 1 Offline with an Open Project File 1 Select Online Transfer from the Main Menu and click the Write into Controller Button in the Transfer Dialog Box that will be displayed Alternatively select Online Write into Controller from the Main Menu A third method is to select Transfer Write into Controller from the Launcher If the project file does not contain connection information or if the Write into Controller Button is clicked in the Transfer Dialog Box the Communications Setting Dialog Box will be displayed In all other cases the Transfer Program Write into Controller Dialog Box shown in step 3 will be displayed 2 Select the port to be used for the transfer and click the Connection Button u Commu
383. s from the main menu Refer to 1 8 4 Security User Registration for details on security settings and 3 4 3 4 Enabling or Disabling Ladder Programs for details on enabling or disabling ladder programs When executing CP ladder program conversion for the first time the following message will appear MPE 20 Ver 6 A After converts to the new ladder program the CP ladder program cannot be opened Please make the backup of the project File before the convert the ladder i Cancel 3 6 1 Converting CP Ladder Programs as a Batch Select a program folder such as High speed Low speed Start Interrupt and Function that contains programs of the lower hierarchical levels or a ladder program that contains CP ladder programs from the Ladder Subwindow All the CP programs in the selected folder or program will be converted at once 1 Select a program folder High speed Low speed Start Interrupt or Function or select a program that contains programs of the lower hierarchical levels Then right click the selected folder or program and select Conversion of CP ladder from the pop up menu When the selected program contains programs of lower hierarchical levels the following message will appear asking for confirmation MPE 20 Ver 6 A Is H converted into the new ladder program Please select the converted program clicking Select button when you convert the program of the subordinate together Conversion Click this
384. s selected in the Environment Setting Dialog Box For details refer to 1 8 9 Ladder General The Create New Program Dialog Box will be displayed Set each item and then click the OK Button N Create New Program Program Mo Program Mame Configuration E File privilege Detail definition Read Write Use register num D register Wark register register For details on the items to be set refer to 3 2 1 Creating New Ladder Programs The Engineering Manager will be started and the Edit Window for CP ladder programs will be displayed F Engineering Manager File Edit View Command Debug Cursor Window DW amp b GS G pee Gt Eh Em Ee A Er IF GF ft e MB H01 LADDER ABC MP2300 Offline Local 3 2 Beginning Ladder Programming 2 Creating New Programs from the Engineering Manager After the Engineering Manager has been started a new CP ladder program can be created 1 Select Utility Engineering builder from the Launcher The Engineering Manager will be started 2 Select File Open Program Open New Diagram from the Main Menu The Open DWG setting Dialog Box will be displayed 3 Enter the name of the diagram and then click the OK Button Open DWG setting Name Hol Type f DWG C FUNC f Cancel The Edit Window for CP ladder programs will be displayed ae Engineering Manager File Edit View Command Debug Cursor Window Dh amp p GS G pee Gt Bh Em
385. ser constant reading data 3 ReadingData3 UserInverterConstant IWxx41 Inverter user constant reading data 4 ReadingData4 SubCommand E Inverter sub command parameter AuxiliaryInverterUser ee pa OWxx42 Auxiliary inverter user constant number ConstantNumber AuxiliaryInverterUser a eer OWxx43 Auxiliary inverter user constant number size ConstantNumberSize AuxiliaryInverterUser Bates 16 i OWxx44 Auxiliary inverter user constant set point 1 AuxiliaryInverterUser Mek ate ad A OWxx45 Auxiliary inverter user constant set point 2 ConstantSetPoint2 A AuxiliaryInverterUser ere OWxx46 Auxiliary inverter user constant set point 3 ConstantSetPoint3 AuxiliaryInverterUser oe OWxx47 Auxiliary inverter user constant set point 4 ConstantSetPoint4 FixedParameterNumber _ OWxx48 Fixed parameter number Fixed parameter number number FixedParameterMonitor IWxx48 Fixed parameter monitor A 15 A 16 A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details TransmissionReference TransmissionReferenceOutputData0 TransmissionReferenceOutputDatal TransmissionReferenceOutputData2 TransmissionReferenceOutputData3 TransmissionReferenceOutputData4 TransmissionReferenceOutputData5 TransmissionReferenceOutputData6 TransmissionReferenceOutputData7 TransmissionReferenceOutputData8 TransmissionReferenceOutputData9 TransmissionReferenceOutputDatal 0 TransmissionReferenceOutputData 1 TransmissionReferenceOutputDatal 2 TransmissionRefer
386. sion 5 MAL File 1 36 1 7 5 Saving Project Files 1 37 1 7 6 Closing Project Files 1 38 1 1 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 7 7 Moving Project Files Deleting Copying and Renaming Project Files 1 38 1 8 Environment Settings 1 39 1 8 1 Environment Setting Dialog Box 1 39 1 8 2 System Communication Setting 1 40 1 8 3 System Controller Type 1 41 1 8 4 Security User Registration 1 42 1 8 5 Security Project Password 1 44 1 8 6 Security Default User Setting 1 45 1 8 7 Setup System Setting 1 46 1 8 8 Setup Scan Time Setting 1 47 1 8 9 Ladder General 1 48 1 8 10 C Language General 1 48 1 8 11 Transferring C Language Linker 1 48 1 8 12 Variable Variable 1 49 1 8 13 Monitor System Monitor
387. step 3 onwards in 7 Offline with an Open Project File 1 68 1 11 Transferring Data 1 11 3 Program Disable Processing when a Write Error Occurs When data is transferred with the CPU stopped a high speed or low speed main program may be invalid if the transfer fails e g if there is an incompletely written program When the CPU is restarted RUN after a transfer failure there is arisk that an incompletely written program may be executed and the machinery may be damaged This function can be set to eliminate this risk This function is valid only by selecting File Environment Setting Transfer from the Main Menu and setting Pro cessing of invalid high low main program to Disable For details on high speed and low speed main program disable processing refer to 1 8 14 Transfer Transfer When Processing of Invalid High Low Main Program Is Disabled When Processing of invalid high low main program is set to Disable in the Transfer Window the following error message will be displayed if an error occurs during a data transfer with the CPU stopped MPE 20 Ver 6 The error occurred during writing in the controller The transfer error occurred during write into controller There is creating danger of application damage when start the controller with transfer not completed Please solve the cause of the transfer error and execute writing to the controller again Safety Measures Shirk away From risk the system inval
388. ster Addresses For details on variables refer to Chapter 5 Variables 4 Register Address Field Register addresses are displayed here 5 Minimize Button Instruction objects can be minimized the display as shown below The original display size more detailed can be restored by clicking the Maximize Button DeOoooooo D BOOS 4 Maximize Button 3 29 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 3 11 Editing Instruction Objects 3 3 11 Editing Instruction Objects The following editing operations can be executed for instruction objects e Cutting copying and pasting e Moving objects by dragging e Deleting e Changing instructions 1 Cutting Copying and Pasting 1 Click to select the instruction objects to be cut or copied 2 Select Edit Cut or Copy from the Main Menu Alternatively right click the selected instruction objects and select Cut or Copy from the pop up menu that will be displayed Another method is to press the Ctrl X Keys Cut or the Ctrl C Keys Copy After an instruction object has been cut it must be pasted before another cut or copy operation is executed or else the branch that was cut first will be deleted 3 Either click the insertion position to display an input guide or select the instruction object at the insertion position Objects from other ladder programs and other project files can also be used 4 Select Edit Paste from the Main Menu Alternatively right click the selecte
389. ster Comment Variable Structure While reading the data HOT Complete End of import Variable comment of local End of import Error Caution 5 50 5 8 Exporting Importing Variables 5 8 3 Exporting Importing Constant Variables 1 Overview Constant variables registers comments units and values in a constant group variable can be exported The exported files will be saved in the specified folder for each constant group variable The data will be exported with the constant group variable name with a CTF file extension If a CTF file with the same name already exists at the export destination the data of CTF file in the export destination will be deleted and overwritten with the new data The data in the CTF files can be imported to the MPE720 version 6 as they are CTF files cannot be edited An example of a constant variable folder importing operation is shown below A Constant Variable Import Source Folder B Constant Variable of Import Destination Folder Gy Z Bs fe Register fee Register Comment List E Variable ia System Variable a Axis Variable fi 10 Variable 3 Global Variable Comment List E Variable a System Variable a Axis Variable fis 10 Variable E Global Variable LE Fink Constant variable f o OO C_OoOOtC O1000 C O10995 Jw OO01 OO01 0 pulseicwo1000 of FS Constant variable fee CONST DATA C_DATACC oo000 c o009
390. t Remote operation Motor selection Set zero completed Multi function terminal output option Contact output M1 M2 MA MB PHC1 output Contact P1 PC PHC 1 output P2 PC PHC1 output P3 C3 PHC1 output P4 C4 Digital input terminal option Terminal 1 status Terminal 2 status Terminal 3 status Terminal 4 status Terminal 5 status Terminal 6 status Terminal 7 status Terminal 8 status Terminal 9 status Terminal 10 status Terminal 11 status Terminal 12 status Inverter Inverter alarm monitor number Auxiliary inverter alarm monitor number Inverter type Inverter software version option Inverter software version main A Variable Tables A 2 Axis Variable Details InverterParameter Inverter parameter I terUserConstant ee sen OWxx3C Inverter user constant number Number InverterUserConstant Boe Peers OWxx3D Inverter user constant number size NumberSize InverterUserConstant OWxx3E Inverter user constant set point 1 SetPoint InverterUserConstant OWxx3F Inverter user constant set point 2 SetPoint2 InverterUserConstant OWxx40 Inverter user constant set point 3 SetPoint3 InverterUserConstant OWxx41 Inverter user constant set point 4 SetPoint4 I terUserConstant Ss IWxx3C Inverter user constant number Number UserInverterConstant eee TWxx3E Inverter user constant reading data 1 ReadingDatal UserInverterConstant IWxx3F Inverter user constant reading data 2 ReadingData2 UserInverterConstant TWxx40 Inverter u
391. t a folder or program in the Ladder Subwindow and then right click and select Compile from the pop up menu that will be displayed gt All programs included in the selected folder or program will be compiled After the ladder programs have been compiled the compile log will be displayed in the Output Subwindow Compile All Programs gt Warning e Start compiling L amp O 2004 07 30 Ethernet gt Warning A Start compiling LAO 2004 12 20 14 gt Warning ee Start compiling L99 04 08 02 Hz20 0z 2004 07 13 Alanig a Start compiling L Low speed Main Program ae 43 Wi arming 0 z T a End Compile Cancel gt Warming O Ladder Program High speed E Compile Options With a ladder program displayed in the Main Window select Program Compile Option from the Main Menu The Compile Option Dialog Box will be displayed as shown below Either of the compile options can then be set This setting will be applied to all programs E Compile Option Set the compile option C Compile to ver 5 compatible Display and edit over ver 5 34 Enable to Multiple Coil Check When this option is selected duplicate coils will be detected during the compile operation Compile to Ver 5 Compatible When this option is selected programs can be opened programs in MPE720 version
392. t be selected 4 Click Conversion All the selected CP ladder programs will be converted to new ladder programs If you click the Cancel Button the CP ladder program conversion will be cancelled An error code OXAxxxxxxx and an error name may be displayed in the Output Subwindow in accordance with the changed program Select the error code OxAxxxxxxx and press the F1 Key Error Generating Information will appear Check the error causes and take corrective action 3 6 Converting CP Ladder Programs to Ordinary Ladder Programs 3 6 2 Converting a Program Individually Select a CP ladder program that does not contain programs of lower hierarchical levels or a CP ladder program under which no hierarchical structure is displayed from the Ladder Subwindow The selected CP ladder program can be individually converted to a new ladder program 1 Select a CP ladder program that does not contain programs of lower hierarchical levels or a CP ladder program under which no hierarchical structure is displayed from the Ladder Subwindow Then right click the selected program and select Conversion of CP ladder from the pop up menu The following message will appear asking for confirmation MPE 20 Ver 6 Laj r l Is H converted into the new ladder program When the selected program contains programs of lower hierarchical levels refer to 3 6 1 Converting CP Ladder Programs as a Batch 2 Click Yes The selected CP ladder
393. t folder settings K Documents and Settings Owner Desktop CS file 9 53 Chapter 5 Variables 5 8 3 Exporting Importing Constant Variables The following message will appear asking for confirmation MPE 20 Ver 6 Export the selected variable comment File information on the specified export is cancelled and overwrited Do vou want to continue While reading the data CODO QOG Constant Register number Comment Unit Value Q001 000999 0001 pulse 0 While exporting E Documents and Settings Ownrer Desktop Coy Iern CFT Complete End of export Constant variable End of export Errord Caution b Import Data of constant variables can be imported group by group to MPE720 version 6 using the following procedure 1 Select File Import Constant variables from the main menu The Browse For Folder Dialog Box will appear 2 Select the folder in which the data to be imported is saved and then click OK Browse For Folder Import Folder settings My Documents E F My Computer A 344 Floppy 64 4 NNT4 Ds Se WI Se WINNT4E Es Se WINGS Fs See WINE Gi See WINZO00 fH Se WINZ000E 1 wt Make Mew Folder The Import Dialog Box will appear 5 54 5 8 Exporting Importing Variables 3 All the check boxes of constant variables CTF files in the folder specified in step 2 will be selected Clear the check boxes of the items not to be imported and then click Import I
394. t is being displayed When the cursor is moved on the memory map the register address at the cursor position will be shown with the usage status in a balloon display The number of registers displayed in one row can be changed The display can also be changed using the five buttons at the upper right of the list 6 3 Chapter 6 Monitoring 6 2 1 Register Lists Right click the register list and select decimal hexadecimal binary or ASCII from the pop up menu to change the data type in the Value Fields The type cannot be changed however for data types B and F Characters are displayed in blue and black in alternating rows The Monitor Icon is valid while a Machine Controller is connected while online Inthe screen shown in step 3 on the previous page a green background indicates that the register is used in a ladder program A red background indicates that the register is used for more than one data type This color coded display is enabled when the Memory Map Display Button is ON For details on the number of registers displayed in one row and on using the five buttons refer to 2 Changing Memory Map Displays below 2 Changing Memory Map Displays The number of registers displayed in one row can be changed In addition the memory map display can be changed using the five buttons displayed in the upper right Number of registers displayed in one row r 1 2 3 4 5 6 307200 0 0 0 o 0
395. ta to be compared can also be designated For details on the data of the System Configuration Program Register and Comment that is compared refer to 1 11 1 Overview of Data Transfers After clicking Start the data will begin comparison 1 79 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 11 10 Comparison with the Machine Controller When the comparison has been completed the following message will be displayed Click OK to end the compare operation MPE720 Ver 6 x MPE720 Ver 6 Compare with Controller ended normally Compare with Controller were difference Please confirm the content displayed in the output window No Difference Found Differences Found After the comparison is completed the data comparison log and result can be confirmed in the Transfer Sub window 2 Online 1 Select Online Transfer from the main menu and click the Compare with Controller Button in the Transfer Dialog Box The Open Project Dialog Box will appear 2 Select the project file to be compared with the Machine Controller Data and click the Open Button When a connection is made to the Machine Controller after the project file has been opened the file name of the open project file will be displayed in the File name Field as the default Open Project Look in C3 ProjectFile Data wt Oo a ee Ej Seng a M2300 YMw z G3 1000 vm Ge TESTIOOL yh My Recent 2lioz o1 vew SSlTesToo2 ya
396. ta transfer can be specified by selecting Online Transfer on the Main Menu and then selecting the transfer type in the Transfer Dialog Box that will be displayed Transfer Write into Controller Read from Controller The data of the project file is written into Controller s data is read to the project file controller Write into Project Read from Project The data of the opened project file is written in Reads to the project file which is the opening of other project files other project files data Save to Flash The controller s RAM data is save in the flash memory Data is cleared when controller s power is turned off Write into CF card Read from CF card Controller s data or data of the project File is Data of the CF card is write into controller or written in the CF card write the project file Compare with Controller Compare Flash to RAM Output 4 result after data of the controller and Output 4 result after data of the controller s data of the project file are compared RAM and data of the flash memory are compared Compare with Project File Compare with CF card Output 4 result after data of the opened Output a result after compared with the CF card project file and data of the other project file are and controller or CF card and the project file compared For purposes of description all of the icons in the above dialog box are shown as active The transfer can also be executed by selecting Online Wri
397. tart monitoring 1 47 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 8 9 Ladder General 1 8 9 Ladder General This option can be specified whether Create new CP ladder option is to be displayed in Ladder Subwindow popup menus Select Ladder General from the tree in the Environment Setting Dialog Box to bring up that window and then make the settings Refer to 7 8 1 Environment Setting Dialog Box Environment Setting Po System Program PS Security Create new CP ladder Pj Setup cs Ena t gt General PS c language P variable P Monitor E Transfer Ez Print Even if Create new CP ladder option is selected to Not Use the Engineering Manager can still be used to create programs in the CP form For details refer to 3 2 2 2 Creating New Programs from the Engineering Manager 1 8 10 C Language General This option can specify whether Display C language program sub window option is to be displayed in Language Sub window pop up menus Select C language General from the tree in the Environment Setting Dialog Box to bring up that window and then make the settings Refer to 7 8 1 Environment Setting Dialog Box Environment Setting Py System E C language program PS Security Display the language program sub window No Po Setup Po Ladder Es c language Linker Ez variable Ez Monitor E Transfer PS Print 1 8 11 Transferring C Language Linker Linker
398. tatus Phase B Status Phase C Status Writing Fixed Parameter Disconnect Alarm POSMAX Turns Preset Completed Multipurpose Signal Module Ready Incremental Pulses Counter Value PI Latch Data Incremental Pulse after Conversion Current Count Value After Conversion PI Latch Data After Conversion Number of POSMAX Turns Feedback Speed Detected Frequency Average Frequency System Monitor 1 Channel Counter Output Operation Mode Count Disable Count Preset Request PI Latch Detection Request Coincidence Detection Request POSMAX Turns Preset Request Multipurpose Output Function Selection Count Preset Value Coincidence Detection Value POSMAX Turns Preset Value Minimum Value of Range of Zone Output Maximum Value of Range of Zone Output Speed Coincidence Detection Setting Speed Coincidence Detection Width Frequency Coincidence Detection Setting Frequency Coincidence Detection Width Averaging Count Setting System Monitor Variable CNTR2_IN RUNSTS DataError FixedParameterError PresetCompleted PILatchCompleted PulseO CoincidenceSignal PulseAStatus PulseBStatus PulseCStatus WritingFixedParameter DisconnectedAlarm POSMAXCompleted MultipurposeSignal ModuleReady IncrementalPulses CounterValue PILatchValue IncrementPulseA fterConversion CountValueA fterCounversion PILatchValueA fterCounversion POSMAXTurnsNumber FeedBackSpeed DetectedFrequency AverageFrequency SystemMonitor CNTR2 OUT RUNMODE Prohibited PresetRequest
399. te into Controller Read from Controller or Save to Flash from the Main Menu 1 64 1 11 Transferring Data The transfer can also be executed by selecting Transfer and then Write into Controller Read from Controller or Save to Flash from the Launcher The following diagrams illustrate the data transfer procedures using MPE720 version 6 Data Transfers 1 Writing to the Machine Controller and Saving to Flash Memory When Write into Controller is executed in the Trans MPE720 Ver 6 fer Dialog Box data from the open project file or Project file Machine Controller another specified project file is written to the Machine transfer data Sii Controller RAM When Save to Flash is executed data in the Machine Controller RAM is written to the Machine Controller flash memory Project file Another project file Machine Controller flash memory 2 Reading from the Machine Controller When Read from Controller is executed in the Trans fer Dialog Box data in the Machine Controller RAM is read to MPE720 version 6 and written to the open Application data in Machine Controller noe RAM project file or another specified project file e Another project file Project file The data transfer procedures are described in detail below 1 65 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 11 2 Writing to Machine Controllers 1 11 2 Writing to Machine Controllers The procedure differs a
400. teger type Comment Variable Mame 9 Register Comment MBOOOOOO Integration r Mw ogogo i P gain MM Ooo02 Integration 4 MM OO003 Integration time MM iO0004 Upper integr MVWOOO0S Lower integr Mw OO008 Upper PT lirit M D000 Lower PT lirit MWOOOOS PI output de a In the Variable Name Field enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters starting with a letter of the alphabet An error will occur if the leading character in the name is a number An error will occur if a name identical to a register such as MBO mb0 or IW00000 iwO00000 is used A variable name that is already assigned cannot be used again Reserved words such as motion instructions cannot be used For a list of reserved words refer to Appendix B Reserved Words An address that is already used for another data type cannot be assigned again A maximum of 255 alphanumeric characters can be input in the Comment Field Carriage returns and line feeds cannot be used in the comments 5 3 Variables that Can Be Set by the User E SS E E E E ay E f a register with the same address already exists If a register with the same address already exists in one project file the following message will appear asking for confirmation Variable Registration Register MA00000 overlaps bbb assigned to MBOOOO00 Data corruption or program error may occur due to duplicate me
401. ter 5 Variables 1 Directly Entering Addresses or Variable Names 1 Click to select the Variable Name Field of the instruction object for which the variable is to be entered or changed and then enter the register address or variable name 2 Press the Enter Key to save the variable or address Enter 4 Sean Flicker Relay When a variable is set HighScan OneSecan Seale for the address that is entered Enter sidad When no variable is set DBOo0001 for the address that is entered Ifthe entered variable name is too long is displayed in the spellings When entering addresses the leading zeroes can be omitted Variable names can be entered in place of addresses for variables assigned as global or local variables 2 Copying and Pasting Variables 1 Select the variable that is to be entered or changed in the Variable Subwindow and then select Edit Copy from the Main Menu Alternatively right click the variable to be entered in the Variable Subwindow and then select Copy from the pop up menu that will be displayed 2 Click to select the Variable Name Field of the instruction object for which the variable is to be entered and then select Edit Paste from the Main Menu Alternatively right click the Variable Name Field of the instruction object and then select Paste from the pop up menu that will be displayed 3 31 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 3 12 Entering and Changing Variables and Register Addresse
402. ter MEOOOT O10 ka Replace Register MEOOOOZO ka Search Direction Replace All Our C Select Range Start Rung End Rung o g The Register Tab Page is used to find and replace register addresses 3 5 Debugging Ladder Programs Replace Register Comment Search Object w Search Replace Object od C Use wild cards Search Direction Find whole items only Oup Down Match case Register compensation el e a The Comment Tab Page is used to find and replace object rung and program comments and comments in expressions Use wild card When selected the wildcards and can be used in searches If either or is used in the Replace Object it will be treated not as a wildcard but as a character Select range When selected the search range can be set by specifying the start rung and end rung 3 Start the search and replace operation When the Search Button is clicked the relevant instruction object will be searched and selected When the Replace Button is clicked the selected item will be replaced by the characters in either the Replace Register Field or the Replace Object Field If the Replace All Button is clicked on the Register Tab Page all of the relevant registers will be replaced and the replacement results will be displayed in the Output Subwindow Begin replacing MBOOO100 with MBOOO020 Success H Rung 0000 Step 0002 NOC Operand 00 Source MBOO0100 gt
403. ter addresses will be displayed at their display location Each click toggles between display and hide When Display is in effect the background color of the icon is blue Address Display Icon Variable Display Icon Comment Display Icon SUG HUTS FA The display hide function for register addresses variables and comments can mie used in the following combinations Addresses Variables Comments Object Display IA ddresses Variables Comments Line is an MBOOoOooO TEST MBOOoOOO aeons TEST RN MBOOooOO i Line is running Ea MB0OOOOO ine is running MBOOOoOO MBOOOOOO Line is running Eje N TEST RM y Display Hide Even if variables are set to be Displayed the register address will be displayed if no variable is set for that address Changing Edit Window Displays Editor Options Object colors fonts display methods and key allocations can be changed by selecting View Editor Option from the Main Menu in the Editor Option Dialog Box that will be displayed and then using the four tab pages Color Font Ladder and Key Allocation The following operations are executed by clicking the buttons When the Default Button Is Clicked The set values on the currently selected tab page will be restored to the default values The set values on the other tab pages will not be changed When the OK Button Is Clicked The current settings in all the tab pages will be overwritten the Editor Option Dialog Box will be
404. ter editing the comments will be changed for all object subwindows using the applicable register Select File Save from the Main Menu with the Comment List Tab Page open or press the Ctrl S Keys The com ment data will be stored in the project file or in the Machine Controller A maximum of 255 alphanumeric characters can be entered in the Comment Field Carriage returns and line feeds cannot be used in the comments Editing with Pop up Menus The Comment Field can be edited by selecting it and right clicking to display a pop up menu Multiple Comment Fields can be selected by dragging while holding down the Shift Key Start Comment List Register List ff fea Register I Input Register Output Register FA M Data Register a Constant Register E D Internal Register E Internal Constant Register Tee CEAR 4 Function Input Register e LEMON Delete Delete Y Function Output Register Tae ME Gi 2 Function Internal Register ae FAR E A Function External Register MBoooooS fern TENTES LA OOo004 TEA Register Program Register Comment OOOO TEST MIBOOOOO MBOOOoo MBOOON03 gt x Doses Pa Cut Ctrl Copy Chr Paste Ctrl Comment All Clear Find Ctrl F Replace Ckrl H Cross Reference Chril R Nonin CHANGE MEOOOOOD PIEBOOOOOE 4 WEATHER Add to Watch Import Export Ctrl gt Cut Copy Paste and Delete Commen
405. tery alarm Mot notify E Ladder Eg c language Eg variable Es Monitor System monitor Eg Transfer fy Print Alarm Notification Automatically Notified when the Alarm Occurs When Notify is selected the System Monitor Subwindow is automatically displayed when an alarm occurs Automatically Notified when the Battery Alarm Occurs This function is valid when Automatic notification when an alarm occurs above 1s set to Notify When Notify is also selected the System Monitor Subwindow is automatically displayed when a battery alarm occurs 1 8 Environment Settings 1 8 14 Transfer Transfer Detailed settings can be made for data transfers with the Machine Controller Select Transfer Transfer from the tree in the Environment Setting Dialog Box to bring up that window and then make the settings Refer to 7 8 1 Environment Setting Dialog Box Environment Setting Po System Save to Flash E Security Automatic run after disconnection the controll Po Setup CPU Control FP Ladder Check before write into controller PC language Message of Transfer Result fj Variable Display when the transfer compare ended Display E Monitor Processing after transfer fer Processing of invalid high low main program Not disable gt De Transfer of C language program MPLoader Ez Print Locate again and transfer No Save to Flash Automatic Run after Disconnection the Controller When es is selected project files in the Machine
406. the dialog box is displayed enter the password in the Program Password Field and click the OK Button The OK Button is valid when one or more characters of text are entered in the Program Password Field CP ladder programs can also be opened For details refer to 7 7 4 Opening an MPE720 Version 5 MAL File E User Privilege Levels and Reading Writing Privilege Levels Program reading and writing privilege levels are established to maintain program security To open a particular program the user must have a privilege level at least as high as the program s reading privilege level Similarly to edit a program the user must have a privilege level at least as high as the program s write privilege level For details on setting and checking user privilege levels refer to 1 8 4 Security User Registration 3 2 4 Opening CP Ladder Programs CP ladder programs can be opened from Engineering Manager A maximum of 16 CP ladder programs can be opened CP ladder programs are opened in the same way as ladder programs described in 3 2 3 Opening Ladder Programs 3 10 3 2 Beginning Ladder Programming 3 2 5 Displaying and Editing MPE 20 Version 6 Ladder Programs on MPE720 Ver sion 5 To display and edit the ladder programs that were created on MPE720 version 6 on MPE720 version 5 the ladder pro grams need to be compiled into MPE720 version 5 compatible programs The ladder programs can be compiled into MPE720 version 5 compatible prog
407. the direction icons 4 A P or W are displayed A docked subwindow is not allowed on the same side as an auto hide subwindow e When a floating subwindow tab or title bar is dragged and dropped when multiple subwindows are stacked the display type is changed to docked with the subwindows stacked in the same way 1 30 1 7 Project Files 1 Project Files 1 7 1 What Is a Project File A project file is an application file used for MPE720 version 6 and is configured of the following files System Configuration Files e System Definitions e Scan Time Definitions e Module Configuration Definitions e Data Trace Data Program Files e Ladder programs High speed Low speed Start Interrupt and Function e Motion programs Main Sub and Group definitions e Table data e Variables Axis I O Global Constant and User structure e Comments I O Global and Constant Register Files e M Data registers D Internal registers C Constant registers S System registers I Input registers and O Output registers Project files keep these files together so that they can be managed as a single file in Windows The file extension is YMW The above files can be edited when the project file is opened An attached file is displayed for an open project file as shown below This file indicates that the project file is open When the project file is closed the attached file is deleted ie MP2300 4M et MP2300
408. the rung number block and select Insert Rung Comment from the pop up menu that will be displayed The rung comment will be inserted before the selected rung as shown in the following illustration Start H Main Program H hdain Program ageng e207 Rung comment line 3 Enter or edit the comment Rung comments can be entered or edited either by using the Comment Editor or by editing directly in the Rung Comment Field For details on these two methods refer to 2 Using the Comment Editor and 3 Editing Directly in the Rung Comment Line Click the left side of the rung comment line to display an oval That oval can then be used to edit copy paste move or delete the rung comment as an object Refer to 3 3 7 4 Deleting Rungs 2 Using the Comment Editor WY Comment Editor Edit Double click a rung comment to display the Comment Editor shown to the Irena F Icons left The following operations can then be executed e Characters can be entered e Icons short cut keys and pop up menus accessed by right clicking on selected character strings can be used for Cut Copy Paste Undo and cira Redo operations _ For description purposes all of the icons and menu items shown in the illustration to the left are shown as active ae e Use the Enter Key to start a new line Pop up Menu Click the OK Button to complete the comment entering and editing Chrl 2 3 Editing Directly in the Rung Comment
409. the rung number block and select Insert Rung or Add Rungs from the pop up menu that will be displayed e Press the Insert Key on the keyboard With any the above operations a new rung will be inserted before the selected rung or after for Add and the rung number in the inserted position will be advanced by one When Insert Rung or Add Rungs is selected or when the Insert Key is pressed an input guide will be displayed for the inserted rung The number of rungs that can be inserted with a single insertion operation can be changed using the Ladder Tab Page in the Editor Option Dialog Box For details refer to 3 3 4 3 Changing Edit Window Displays Editor Options 2 Cutting Copying and Pasting Rungs 1 Click to select the rung number block to be cut or copied 2 With the rung number block selected select Edit Cut or Copy from the Main Menu Alternatively right click the rung number block and select Cut or Copy from the pop up menu that will be displayed After the rung has been cut it must be pasted before another cut or copy operation is executed or else the branch that was cut first will be deleted 3 Select the rung number block for the insertion position and select Edit Paste from the Main Menu Alternatively right click the rung number block for the insertion position and then select Paste from the pop up menu that will be displayed Rungs from other ladder programs and program files can also be p
410. this check box is selected the data will be saved to flash memory after transfer Stop the controller s CPU during transfer When this check box is selected the CPU in the Machine Controller is stopped when the transfer starts 1 52 1 8 Environment Settings 1 8 16 Print Ladder Select Print Ladder from the tree in the Environment Setting Dialog Box The following window will appear Environment Setting Ez System Print Setting PS Security circuit auko reduction print Ez Setup print the cross reference information Po Ladder Closed Scope is opened and prints Po c language P variable P Monitor Ez Transfer E Print gt enh Circuit Auto reduction Print When Print is selected from the combo box the rungs that cannot fit on one page will be reduced in width Environment Setting Ez System Print Setting E Security circuit auto reduction print Fz Setup print the cross reference information F Ladder Closed Scope is opened and prints Po c language P variable Ez Monitor E Transfer E Print t gt ladder circuit auto reduction print The circuit is reduced and printed that the width of the circuit may enter one page Cancel Apply 1 53 Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 8 16 Print Ladder Cross Reference When Print is selected from the combo box the cross reference information will be printed on the right side of the ladder program When th
411. tions Start Button Stop Button The Start Button and the Stop Button are valid only while online These buttons start and stop trace operations that record register values with each scan When one of the buttons is turned ON the other is automatically turned OFF e start Tracing is being executed May be waiting for trigger condition Bs Tracing is stopped Tracing is started simultaneously when the Scope Window is opened so the Stop Button is turned ON when the window is opened Snap Button The Snap Button is valid only while online When this button is clicked a one time snapshot of the trace data memory is captured and displayed Monitor data No mm v 100 A maximum value can be set for the trace data to be captured when the Stop Button or Snap Button is clicked Either select All data 100 or 1 000 or click in the cell and directly enter the number The maximum value that can be directly entered is 32 158 Trigger and Configuration Button sriszer When this button is clicked the Trigger and Configuration Dialog Box is displayed For details on the Trigger and Configuration Dialog Box refer to 7 4 2 Trigger and Configuration Dialog Box Trend Graph Button When this button is clicked a trend graph is displayed For details on the contents of the display and the setting method refer to 7 5 6 Trend Graphs X Y Graph Button fell When this button is clicked an XY graph is displ
412. to 5 Allocate Comments in the program comment line formatted as Center Flush Left or Flush Right Rung Comment Check Box When the check box is selected rung comments are displayed in the Edit Window The maximum number of lines for entering rung comments can be set When the check box is unchecked rung comments are not displayed and the maximum number of lines cannot be set Even when the check box is not cleared the rung comment information is retained without being deleted Maximum Number of Lines If a Limit is set click inside the box to display the text cursor and then enter the maximum number of lines from l to 5 Allocate Comments in the rung comment line formatted as Center Flush Left or Flush Right Rung Rung Wrapping When the check box is selected rungs will wrap when they are too long If this check box is cleared rungs in displays may be long Use the scroll bar in the Edit Window to show the required sections Insert Rung No The number of rungs that can be inserted in the Edit Window with one insertion operation can be set between 1 and 10 Variable Check Box When the check box is selected variables are displayed in instruction objects The method for displaying variables can also be set When the check box is unchecked variables are not displayed and the setting fields are also invalid This setting is linked with the operation of the Variable Display Button in the Ladder Editor Toolbar Refer to 3 3 4 C
413. ts of the Forced Coil List Subwindow are as follows The Forced Coil List Subwindow consists of the list field and the toolbar containing buttons each with a distinctive icon to search for forced coils re search and change the forced status l LX A eee ee Trevor ier A alli 2 MEET EA ESE ETE lt lt a EPEE Toolbar D Comment JExecution Step Run Switch 1 Run Switch List field i 5 ON MBOOOLO0 Run Switch R OFF MBOOOLO0 Run Switch 7 i 5 ON Hol MBOOO2Z00 Alarm Clear 1 Forced Status Coil Search Condition Setting Button E gt Click this icon to display the Forced Coil Condition Setting Dialog Box Specify the programs where forced status coil search is to be executed and click the Search Button to start the search Research Button ll Click this icon to research forced status coils in the programs specified in the Forced Coil Condition Setting Subwindow Forced Status Clear Button lt Select the check boxes of the coils for which forced status is to be cleared and click this icon to clear the forced status of the selected coils Forced ON Button Select the check boxes of the coils to be forcibly turned ON and click this icon to forcibly turn ON the selected coils Forced OFF Button 77 Select the check boxes of the coils to be forcibly turned OFF and click this icon to forcibly turn OFF the selected coils Variable Display Switching Button F4 Click this icon to switch t
414. ts selected in the Comment Field can be cut copied pasted or deleted If multiple comments are to be pasted after cutting or copying them they can be pasted in multiple Comment Fields starting from the selected Comment Field Comment All Clear All comments displayed in the Main Window will be deleted Comments cannot be recovered once they have been deleted Find The comments in the registers displayed in the Comment List Tab can be searched Replace The comments in the registers displayed in the Comment List Tab can be replaced Cross Reference and Add to Watch The register for the comment selected will be added to the Cross reference Subwindow or the Watch Subwin dow For cross references refer to 3 5 4 Cross Reference Searching For the watch function refer to 6 2 2 Watch Function Import The CSV CTF and YST files in which the comments assigned to each variable are saved will be imported into MPE720 version 6 Export The comments assigned to each variable will be saved in a CSV CTF and YST files Refer to 5 8 Exporting Importing Variables for details on import and export functions After editing the comments will be changed for all objects and subwindows using the applicable register 5 37 Chapter 5 Variables 5 7 1 Referencing Comment Lists 5 Linking with External Editors Text can be copied and pasted from external editors such as Notepad 5 38 5 7 Comment Lists 5 7 2 Search Replace Delete in
415. ty key for online security can be changed by using the following procedure 1 With the Machine Controller connected to the MPE720 version 6 online select Online Security Setting from the main menu The Security Setting Dialog Box will appear mf Security Setting Current Status File Reading Restricted Restriction Privilege 1 W Apply File Reading Restriction Ladder Motion C Language Restriction Privilege 1 and higher are restricted MP2200 CPU O is used save bo CPU gt C4RD is prohibited regardless of the restriction privilege when the File reading restriction is set Security key 2 Click the Change the Security Key Button The Security Key Change Dialog Box will appear Security Key Change Current Security Key New Security Key New Security Key Confirmation an ccc 3 Enter the currently valid security key password in the Current Security Key Field and a new security key in the New Security Key Field Re enter the new security key in the New Security Key Confir mation Field Then click OK The following message will appear asking for confirmation MPE 20 Ver 6 Security setting has completed The security settings must be saved to Flash memory to be enabled when starting From flash memory 4 Click OK Click the Close button in the upper right to close the Security Setting Dialog Box If saving to flash memory is required save the change to the flash memory 1 94 Chapter 2 Co
416. uble click the Communication Process Icon in the task bar to display the Communication Manager Window r36 PM If the window is not displayed when the Communication Process Icon is double clicked then right click the icon and select Application Display from the pop up menu 3 Double click the logical port number logical PT for which the settings are to be made Communication Manager File View Tool Control Modem Help le P a al Logical PT PTKind DUAL Physica Device TimeOut RQ Address Connec Modify Logging Status 1 Pom A E a Po The Logical Port Setting Dialog Box will be displayed 4 Select Serial from the Port Kind list and then click the Detail Button Logical Port Setting Logical Fort Port Kind TimeOut i A Dual On OF Detail Cancel The Serial Port Setting Dialog Box will be displayed Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 3 5 Communication Process Settings 5 Set each item and then click the OK Button Serial Port Setting Physical Port te Unit No i 4 0 63 Baud Rate 19200 Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Cancel Default The Logical Port Setting Dialog Box will again be displayed 6 Click the OK Button in the Logical Port Setting Dialog Box The Communication Manager Window will again be displayed Serial will be displayed for the logical port selected in step 3 Communication Man
417. ult 3 Register Program Execution Step DBOOOOOO H Main Program 5 w DBOOOOOO H Main Program 6 R DE000OO0O H Main Program 10 FR The program will be opened and the objects in the selected register will be selected by double clicking on a displayed register Ladder Wx Start H Main Program xX By H Main Program gt agenes 22307 Program OG DRIVE AT 1ST AXIS z i ABC MP2300 0 5s Sampling Relay E far Ladder program ppoo0010 DB000011 HighScan HalfSecond VAR_VIA High speed f eo Low speed Start Interrupt DB000010 DB000011 Function f Integration reset VAR_VIA DB000050 LAU_F IRST mMBoooo00 VAR_VIA DB000051 mpooo004 O VAR_VIA Relay 0O f STORE A WLF Sre 01000 WLF Dest DATAO v B El Ladder E Motion Cross Reference 1 DB000000 H Search Result 4 X h Register Program Execution Step DBOOOOOO H Main Program 5 w DB000000 H Main Program 6 R DB000000 H Main Program 10 R 3 54 Chapter 3 Ladder Programming 3 5 5 Searching for Duplicate Coils 3 5 5 Searching for Duplicate Coils A search for duplicate coils coils using the same register can be done in all the ladder programs and the search results can be displayed 1 If the Project Link Connection is used and the data in the project file does not match the data in the Machine Controller then the results in the Machine Controller may differ when th
418. uments 3 1031 01 vMW test mw Ga 1101 01 vmw a TTT ymw G23 1104 01 MW 3 1107 01 Mw G23 1108 01 MW Haaa vmw Ga acc ymw 23 mp2100 MW 23 MP2100M Mw G23 Mp2200 MW 3 My Computer File name a v d e Save as type D Project File MW v e P e My Network Places Controller c MP2300 The setting items and methods are as follows a File name Enter a name for the project file to be saved b Save as type Displays extensions of the project file that can be selected Example Project File Y MW c Controller Select the type of Machine Controller to be used d Create Click this button to create a file with the name entered in a e Cancel Click this button to cancel the Create New Project operation and close the Dialog Box f Help Click this button to open the Help Selection Dialog Box The following characters cannot be used in the file name lt gt or Either Project Files YMW or All Files can be selected as the Save as type but the project file YMW will be created in either case 1 32 1 7 Project Files 3 Click the Create Button A message will be displayed notifying that The project file will be created and opened The project file will be created in the specified folder and the new project file will be displayed in the Ladder Subwin dow Ladder AX ms Program II TEST MP23
419. umn will not be exported See the example on the next page The following table shows the details of the structure of the CSV file data Eo A No B Parameter name C Input set data D Units Export Outputs the parameter number Outputs the parameter name Outputs the input data in the Outputs the units in P in the window in the window window the window The data of the parameter in Will not be read Will not be read ee wane boreal written to the corresponding parameter Motion parameters are classified into three types BIT type Combo type and Others The CSV file data format differs depending on these parameter types The display examples when the above types of parameters are exported to CSV files are shown below 2 2 Motion Parameters E Parameters Set in Bits BIT Type Save the parameter window displayed in the foreground of the Engineering Manager Window and then export to a CSV file If the CSV file is opened after exporting the input data are displayed in hexadecimal notation Fixed Parameters Setup Parameters SERVOPRACK Monitor Export th Run command setting Dw ROOD OOOO OOOO OOOO OO H001 H xport then Mode setting 1 Ow g00 OOOO OOOO 0000 OOOO 0000 H Mode setting 2 ow gogz 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 H Function zetting 1 0w a003 Duu u AF EIniE EIE L Function setting 2 ow S004 Function setting 3 Dw a005 El Option Setting Ow S006 Displayed in Motion comman Oh
420. up Parameters Displays CSV file names SetPrm_xxyy csv for setting parameters of CSV file data xx indicates a line number and yy indicates an axis number If no file exists no CSV file name is displayed g SERVOPACK Parameters Displays CSV file names SrvPrm_xxyy csv for SERVOPACK parameters of CSV file data xx indicates a line number and yy indicates an axis number If no file exists no CSV file name is displayed h Import Button Click this button to import the files selected with check marks i Close Button Click this button to close the dialog box Import will not be executed j Specifying the File Name Add an unique character string at the beginning of the motion parameter file name to specify the file name Example Fixed parameter file name when MPE is specified MPE FixPrm_xxyy csv k Check Box Click the box to select the file to be imported 3 Click the Import Button The following message will appear asking for confirmation Engineering Builder Import the specified data There is a possibility that the operation of the application changes when it is online connected to the controller because imported data is instantly reflected and saved Please confirm and execute no malfunction of the application by data which does the import Do vou want to execute import Click Yes to start a batch import When the importing starts the progress indicator will display the percentage of the process that has been co
421. urns Preset Completed Module Ready Incremental pulses DisconnectedAlarm POSMAXCompleted IBxx00C ModuleReady IBxx00F PDV ILxx02 PFB ILxx04 FREQ ILxx06 PDVG ILxx08 PFBG ILxx0A FREQG ILxx0C POSMAX ILxx0E FeedBackSpeed ILxx10 CNTR OUT OAxx00 RUNMOD OWxx00 OBxx000 OBxx001 OBxx002 OBxx003 OBxx004 OWxx01 OLxx02 OLxx04 OLxx06 POSMAX Turns Preset Value Counter Value PI latch Value Incremental Pulse After Conversion Current Count Value After Conversion PI Latch Value After Conversion Numver of POSMAX Turns Feedback Speed Counter Output Command Settings Count Disable Count Preset Request PI Latch Detection Request Prohibited PresetRequest PILatchRequest Coincidence Detection Request POSMAX Turns Preset Request Function Selection CoincidenceRequest POSMA XRequest FunctionSelections PPSDAT COINDAT POSMAX Count Preset Value Coincidence Detection Value A 28 A Variable Tables A 3 1O Variables 4 LIO 04 Module Variables LIO32_IN TAxx00 Local I O 32 inputs DL 31 IBxx01 F Input 31 LIO32_ OUT OAxx00 Local I O 32 outputs DO 31 OBxx01F Output 31 5 DO 01 Module Variables DO OUT OAxx00 Digital outputs OBxx03F Output 63 IWxx07 Analog input CH8 7 AO 01 Module Variables Variable Comments AVO OUT OAxx00 Analog outputs OWxx00 Analog output CH1 A 29 A 30 A Variable Tables A 3 1O Variables 8 CNTR 01 Module Variables Variable CNTRI_IN RUNSTS DataEr
422. ut to the Transfer After a connection is made to the Machine Controller the data in the currently open project file and the data in the Machine Controller RAM are compared and the results are output to the Transfer Subwindow Subwindow These methods are described in detail below 1 Offline 1 3 Select Online Transfer from the main menu and click the Compare with Controller Button in the Transfer Dialog Box The Communications Setting Dialog Box will appear Select the port to be used for the transfer and click the Connection Button W Communications Setting Set the communication setting Connection Logical port Mo The Compare Program Compare with Controller Dialog Box will appear Select Batch or Individual and then click the Start Button Compare Program Compare with Controller Destination of comapre controller MP2300 Serial Uniti 070 Th Individual The Following Files are compared System Configuration System Definition Scan Time Definition Program Module Configuration Data Trace a Pagter Ladder Program High speed Low speed Start Interrupt Function C Comment Motion Program Mainf Sub Table Data Variable Axis Input Output Global Constant User Structure When selecting the Batch or Individual Button the types of data to be compared System Configuration Pro gram Register and Comment can be selected When selecting the Individual Button the particular da
423. vilege when the File reading restriction is set Security key Change the Security key Current Status Displays the security setting status Apply File Reading Restriction Select the check box to prevent the data from being read Set the privilege level to prevent the ladder program motion program and C language program from being read in the Restriction Privilege Box If the security key is set without selecting the Apply File Reading Restriction check box only the security key will be set The privilege restriction privilege to prevent the data from being read will not be set Restriction Privilege Privilege level to restrict the files the user may read Note that the user must have a privilege level higher than the set privilege to read files Security Key Security Key Confirmation The password required to set online security Enter from 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters The password is case sen sitive Change the Security Key Click this button to change the security key Set Click this button to set the read file restriction Set to None Click this button to clear the current security setting Close Click this button to close the Security Setting Dialog Box Y When the Apply File Reading Restriction check box is selected while the CARD and SAVE DIP switches on Machine Controller MP2200 CPU 02 are set to ON the function for saving to a CF card will be disabled For details refer to Machine Controller MP2200 User s Ma
424. w Documents jioso ymw SE Testoos vw Ho o me test yaw Eiio oi ymw SOE TTT yew Gila 1107 01 MW 01108 01 yM Haaa Mw accw G8 M2100 4M Gila MP2100M vw ls MP2200 4M Files of type Project File 5M i Cancel hy Network Help The Compare Program Compare with Controller Dialog Box will appear The subsequent operations are the same as from step 3 onwards in 7 71 10 1 Offline 1 80 1 11 Transferring Data 1 11 11 Comparing Flash Memory and RAM This function compares the data in the Machine Controller RAM with the data in the flash memory and outputs the results to the Transfer Subwindow The function is valid only while connected online to the Machine Controller The procedure is as follows 1 Select Online Transfer from the main menu and click the Compare Flash to RAM Button in the Transfer Dialog Box The Compare Program Compare Flash to RAM Dialog Box will appear 2 Click the Start Button Compare Program Compare Flash to RAM Compare target controller MP2300 Serial Uniti 070 The comparison between the data in flash memory and the data in RAM will begin When the comparison has been completed one of the following messages will be displayed Click OK to end the compare operation MPE 20 Ver 6 MPE 20 Ver 6 1 Compare Flash to RAM ended normally Compare Flash to RAM were difference Please confirm the content displayed in the output window
425. will appear E Error Generating Information f Error code 0x40050E43 The character string which cannot be used as a variable name is used CAUSE 1 Invalid character strings used 2 Reserved words used 3 The system variable 5 register prepared by system is used 4 The axis variable prepared Motion register by system is used 5 The character string recognized as a register name is used SOLUTION 1 Please use the alphanumeric character 4 2 a z 0 9 and the sign _ The figure cannot be used For the First character 2 The words Doublejint long are reserved for use in C language programming and cannot be used as a name 3 The system variable 5 register cannot be changed 4 If necessary please register the axis variable after confirm the axis variable of the variable sub window 5 Please register a character string different From the register name Take MWO00100 as an example Mis a register type W is a data type and 00100 is an address Check the error causes and take corrective action 5 46 5 8 Exporting Importing Variables 5 8 2 Exporting Importing Local Variables and Comments 1 Outline Internal variables variables outside functions and D X Y Z and A register comments can be exported to a CSV file CSV files will be saved under the specified folder for each program MPE720 version 6 adds csv to the program number which is used as the file name For the names of CSV files fo
426. will be saved Communication Manager ie View Tool Control Modem Help Setting Save Exit CP 216 1 mol eB oO ha 3 215AIF 01 Module Network Relay Function An entire system can be managed and controlled from the MPE720 version 6 by using more than one 215AIF 01 Mod ule mounted relay station Machine Controller By allocating an unique network number NW nn to each network segment and a unique station number ST nn to the 215AIF 01 Module in each network segment all devices con nected to all networks can be identified by their network addresses specified with the combination of these two num bers 2 In this way the relay function enables message communications among networks Chapter 1 Overview and Basic Operations of MPE720 Version 6 1 3 5 Communication Process Settings The following diagram illustrates an example of a network configuration that uses the relay function ST 1 ST 2 ST 3 ST 4 ST 5 CP 215 NW 1 ST 6 MPE720 RS 232C 41 Relay Station indicates an MP20100 Machine Controller eqipped with more than one 215AIF 01 Module whose MPLINK or MR connectors are connected with another network s MPLINK CP 215 cables to transmit data between networks 2 Only engineering message transmission is possible with the relay function To use the relay function Message relay function must be enabled and Relayed
427. wing as the Y axis scale Auto YI Axis or Y2 Axis vanse When Auto is set the scale is automatically adjusted and displayed for each Monitor Variable When Y Axis is selected the scale data is displayed at the left side of the graph and when Y2 Axis is selected the scale data is displayed at the right side of the graph Maximum value Displayed by selecting List Maximum Minimum Value from the Main Menu Maximum values for See note trace data are displayed display only Minimum value Displayed by selecting List Maximum Minimum Value from the Main Menu Minimum values for See note trace data are displayed display only Displayed by selecting List Cursor Position from the Main Menu Values for cursor A are dis See note played display only Displayed by selecting List Cursor Position from the Main Menu Values for cursor B are displayed See note display only Difference A B Displayed by selecting List Cursor Position from the Main Menu The difference between the val See note ues for cursors A and B is displayed display only Select Convert Unit xN Displayed by selecting List Convert Unit from the Main Menu Sets values with a multiplication factor for unit conversion Variable values The product of the two values is displayed See note j Set for operations such as replacing machine coordinate systems Note The Maximum values and Minimum values Cursors A and B Difference A B
428. y delete the variable please select Only Variable Do you want to delete the variable and comment Only Variable Yes Deletes the variable and the comment Only Variable Deletes only the variable Cancel Cancels the deleting operation and closes the dialog box 2 Global Constants C Registers After ranges of C registers are assigned as a group the C registers in that range can be named and constant values WORD LONG FLOAT their units pulse mm deg inch um and comments can be set a Assigning Global Constant Groups Use the following procedure to assign the variable groups first 1 Inthe Variable Subwindow right click the Constant Variable Folder and select Add from the pop up menu that will be displayed The Constant Group Variable Registration Dialog Box will be displayed W Constant Group Variable Regstration Variable Mame Size of Use 100 Search Empty Register Register CWOOO00 Cwooo99 coamment Chapter 5 Variables 5 3 1 Variables that can be Referred from Any Program 2 Set the following items as described Variable Name Enter the group name with up to eight alphanumeric characters C_ will be automatically displayed at the beginning of the variable name Enter a letter of the alphabet for the leading character of the variable name An error will occur if a number is entered first Size of Use Enter the number of Words to be used beginning from the leading address s

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Alvin MiniMaster II Drawing Table User's Manual  Tyan Computer TYAN S1572 ATX Network Card User Manual  汚れの正体を知れば楽に掃除ができる[PDF形式](1.4  自動車用緊急脱出ハンマーについて  The DS3V Program User's Guide  312600 Raupiano Plus - itcg galilei di avigliana  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file